🗣️ World Languages · High School · CHIN 100

High School Mandarin Chinese I

High School Mandarin Chinese I is a complete first year of Mandarin for a student who starts with none and may be working alone. It begins with sound: pinyin, the four tones and the neutral tone, the tone changes of real speech, and zhuyin, the system Taiwan uses to teach pronunciation. Characters arrive from the first lesson, 300 of them by the end of the year, taught in simplified form with the…

Start the interactive course (quizzes, progress, videos) →

Free forever. No sign-up, no ads. 27 lessons. The full lesson text is below so you can read it right here.

Module 1: Sounds and Scripts

What Mandarin is and where it is used every day, how its sounds are written in pinyin and zhuyin, the four tones and the neutral tone, and the tone changes of connected speech.

One Language, Several Standards: Mandarin, Characters, Pinyin and Zhuyin

  • Explain what standard Mandarin is called in mainland China, Taiwan, Hong Kong and Singapore, and how Mandarin relates to Cantonese, Hokkien and the other Chinese languages.
  • Compare how simplified and traditional characters, Hanyu Pinyin and zhuyin are used in those four places.
  • Write your first ten characters with the basic strokes in the correct order, and say each one aloud.

Two first graders, two sets of symbols

On 11 February 1958, the National People's Congress in Beijing approved a scheme for writing the sounds of Chinese in the Latin alphabet, with four small marks over the vowels for the tones. Its full name is 汉语拼音 (Hànyǔ Pīnyīn), roughly "spelling the sounds of Chinese", and almost everyone calls it pinyin. In 1982 the International Organization for Standardization adopted it as ISO 7098, the world standard for writing Chinese in Latin letters. Mainland China's language law still requires primary schools to teach it, so a six-year-old in Beijing can read mā before she can write 妈 (mother).

A six-year-old in Taipei starts with different symbols. Taiwan's national curriculum expects children in grades 1 and 2 to read, spell and write 注音符號 (zhùyīn fúhào, "sound-marking symbols"), usually called zhuyin, or bopomofo after its first four symbols, ㄅ ㄆ ㄇ ㄈ (b, p, m, f). The same curriculum expects those children to recognise at least 1,000 characters by the end of grade 2. Two children, two sets of sound symbols, one language: Mandarin.

Before you say a word of it, this lesson maps where Mandarin is used and how it is written. You will compare four places where people use it every day, see how it relates to Cantonese and the other Chinese languages, and learn which places write simplified characters and which write traditional ones. Then you will write your first ten characters.

Mandarin among the Chinese languages

"Chinese" is the name of a family of languages, not of one language. Glottolog, the catalogue of the world's languages kept by linguists at the Max Planck Institute for Evolutionary Anthropology, groups them as the Sinitic family. Mandarin is one member. Others include Yue, whose best-known form is Cantonese; Min Nan, which includes Hokkien and Taiwanese; Wu, which includes Shanghainese; Hakka; Gan; and Xiang.

Linguists count these as separate languages, not accents, because their speakers generally cannot follow one another's everyday speech without learning it. What holds the family together is writing. Educated writers across the family share one set of characters and a written standard built on Mandarin. Take the greeting 你好, "hello". Wiktionary's pronunciation tables give it as nǐ hǎo in Mandarin, nei5 hou2 in Cantonese (written in Jyutping, where the numbers mark tones) and lí hó in the Hokkien of Xiamen and Kaohsiung. Same two characters, three pronunciations.

If you grew up hearing Cantonese, Hokkien or another Chinese language at home, you already own part of this course. You know that the pitch of a syllable can change its meaning, and you may recognise characters on menus and signs. Mandarin pronunciation will still be new in places, and the course gives you the reading and writing that a home language rarely teaches. If your family speaks Mandarin, you will move quickly through the sound lessons and slow down, like everyone else, at the characters.

Key idea: Mandarin is one of several Chinese languages. They sound different enough to count as separate languages, but they share one writing system.

One standard, three names

Mandarin has a standard form, the one used in schools, news broadcasts and dictionaries. Different places call it by different names, and you will meet all of them.

  • 普通话 (pǔtōnghuà, "common speech") in mainland China. Its language law defines the national common language and script as 普通话 and 规范汉字 (guīfàn hànzì, standardized characters). The National People's Congress Standing Committee revised that law on 27 December 2025, and the new version took effect on 1 January 2026 with the same definition. Hong Kong uses the same word, 普通話, for the Mandarin that its schools have taught as a core subject in primary and junior secondary school since 1998.
  • 國語 (guóyǔ, "national language") in Taiwan, which is also part of the name of the school subject, 國語文. When Taiwan's Ministry of Education writes about teaching Mandarin overseas, it uses 華語 (huáyǔ).
  • 华语 (huáyǔ) in Singapore, built on 华 (huá), an old word for Chinese. Singapore's Constitution names Mandarin as one of the country's four official languages, alongside Malay, Tamil and English.

Two more words cover the language in general. 中文 (Zhōngwén) means Chinese, especially written Chinese, and is the word you would write on a form that asks which languages you know. 汉语 (Hànyǔ) means "the Han language", after the Han, China's largest ethnic group; it appears in textbook titles and in the name 汉语拼音.

The standards are close but not identical. Taiwan's Ministry of Education dictionary gives 垃圾 (garbage) as lèsè, while the usual mainland pronunciation is lājī. Differences like this are few, and this course points them out as they come up.

Characters: a syllable with a meaning

Chinese is written in characters, 汉字 (hànzì, "Han characters"). Each character fills the same imaginary square, is read as one syllable, and almost always carries a meaning of its own. 中 (zhōng) means middle; 文 (wén) means writing or language. Put them together and 中文 is the Chinese language. Most words in modern Mandarin are two characters long, and one character can turn up in hundreds of words.

There is no alphabet underneath. You cannot sound out a character you have never seen, the way you can sound out an unfamiliar English word, although Lesson 9 shows the clues that most characters do carry. So learners ask the obvious question: how many do I need? Jun Da of Middle Tennessee State University counted every character in about 194 million characters of modern Chinese text. In his count, the 100 most frequent characters made up about 42 percent of all the text, the 300 most frequent about 65 percent, and the 1,000 most frequent about 89 percent.

This course teaches 300 characters, chosen for what a beginner needs rather than for raw frequency. A first-year course has to teach 妈 (mother) and 筷 (chopstick) long before the vocabulary of newspapers, so its list is not the same as Jun Da's top 300. About half of the course's characters are among his 300 most frequent, and two thirds are among his top 500.

Two ways to write: simplified and traditional

In the 1950s and 1960s, mainland China reduced the number of strokes in many common characters. The results are called simplified characters (简体字, jiǎntǐzì), and the older forms are called traditional characters (繁體字, fántǐzì). Today simplified characters are standard in mainland China and Singapore, and traditional characters are standard in Taiwan and Hong Kong. Chinese communities elsewhere use both.

Much of the time the two scripts agree. Every one of your first ten characters, 一 二 三 十 人 大 小 中 文 口, is written the same way in both. Where they differ, this course shows the traditional form beside the simplified one, as in 妈 and 媽 (mother), or 们 and 們 (the plural ending for people), which you meet in the next two lessons. Mainland China's language law itself lists places where traditional characters may still be used, among them historic sites, works of calligraphy, and handwritten inscriptions and shop signs. Lesson 10 shows how the two scripts relate and how to read both.

Pinyin and zhuyin side by side

Pinyin writes Mandarin with Latin letters and puts tone marks above the vowels: ā, á, ǎ, à. Zhuyin uses symbols of its own, thirty-seven of them in the basic Mandarin set that Unicode encodes, and writes most tones as small marks after the syllable. Here are the same words in both systems, with the Taiwan dictionary forms.

CharactersPinyinZhuyinMeaning
你好nǐ hǎoㄋㄧˇ ㄏㄠˇhello
中文Zhōngwénㄓㄨㄥ ㄨㄣˊChinese (language)
谢谢 (traditional 謝謝)xièxieㄒㄧㄝˋ ˙ㄒㄧㄝthank you
垃圾lājī on the mainland, lèsè in Taiwan's dictionaryㄌㄜˋ ㄙㄜˋgarbage

Notice three things. Zhuyin leaves the first tone unmarked, so ㄓㄨㄥ is zhōng. It puts the dot for the light, neutral tone in front of the syllable, so ˙ㄒㄧㄝ is the unstressed second half of xièxie. And where pinyin marks the tone on a vowel, zhuyin marks it after the whole syllable.

Taiwan uses both systems, for different jobs. Zhuyin is how children learn to pronounce. For writing Chinese names and places in Latin letters, the Ministry of Education's transliteration principles, revised in December 2008, say that Taiwan follows Hanyu Pinyin unless other rules apply. The same principles let people keep the spelling they prefer for their own names, and the Bureau of Consular Affairs notes that the older Wade-Giles system survives in some personal names and place names. So a classmate from Taipei may write her surname Chen in pinyin, while her grandfather's name card uses Wade-Giles.

Key idea: pinyin and zhuyin are both ways of writing pronunciation, not ways of writing the language. Everyday Chinese is written in characters.

Four places, compared

Mainland ChinaTaiwanHong KongSingapore
Name for standard Mandarin普通话 pǔtōnghuà國語 guóyǔ; 華語 huáyǔ when taught overseas普通話 pǔtōnghuà华语 huáyǔ
Standard charactersSimplifiedTraditionalTraditionalSimplified
How children learn pronunciationHanyu Pinyin, required in primary school by lawZhuyin in grades 1 and 2Pinyin in Putonghua lessonsHanyu Pinyin
Place of MandarinThe national common languageThe school language; national languages include all the languages of Taiwan's ethnic groupsA core school subject since 1998; most people's everyday language is CantoneseOne of four official languages, with Malay, Tamil and English

Read the table across its rows and two patterns appear. First, script and sound system do not travel together. Hong Kong writes traditional characters, as Taiwan does, but its Putonghua lessons teach pinyin, as the mainland's do. Second, Mandarin almost never stands alone. Taiwan's Development of National Languages Act of 2019 defines its national languages as the natural languages and sign languages used by all of Taiwan's ethnic groups. Hong Kong's education policy aims for students to communicate in Cantonese, English and Putonghua. Singapore's Constitution names four official languages.

What changes from place to place is mostly the name, the script and the sound symbols. The language you are about to learn is the same in all four places, and a speaker from any one of them understands standard Mandarin from the others.

Your first ten characters

These ten are simple, common and identical in both scripts. The tone numbers after each pinyin syllable are a second way of showing the tone, explained in Lesson 2; the radical is the part a dictionary files the character under, explained in Lesson 9.

CharacterTraditionalPinyinMeaningRadicalStrokes
一sameyī (yi1)one一1
二sameèr (er4)two二2
三samesān (san1)three一3
十sameshí (shi2)ten十2
人samerén (ren2)person人2
大samedà (da4)big大3
小samexiǎo (xiao3)small小3
中samezhōng (zhong1)middle丨4
文samewén (wen2)writing, language文4
口samekǒu (kou3)mouth, opening口3

Already you can read two real words: 中文 (Zhōngwén, Chinese) and 大人 (dàrén, adult, literally "big person"). And 人口 (rénkǒu), "person mouths", is the ordinary word for population: a country counts the mouths it has to feed.

The basic strokes

Every character is built from a small set of strokes, each one a single movement of the pen without lifting it. Your ten characters use these:

  • 横 (héng), the horizontal: left to right, as in 一.
  • 竖 (shù), the vertical: top to bottom, as in the upright of 十.
  • 撇 (piě), the left-falling stroke: from upper right down to lower left, the first stroke of 人.
  • 捺 (nà), the right-falling stroke: from upper left down to lower right, widening at the end, the second stroke of 人.
  • 点 (diǎn), the dot: a short, slanting stroke, the first stroke of 文.
  • 折 (zhé), the turn: one stroke that changes direction at a corner, as in the top and right side of 口.
  • 钩 (gōu), the hook: a small flick at the end of a stroke, as at the foot of the middle stroke of 小.

The order of the strokes matters as much as their shapes. It keeps your characters balanced, it is how handwriting recognition and dictionaries expect them, and it makes fast handwriting readable. Here is the order for all ten.

  1. 一: one horizontal.
  2. 二: the short top horizontal, then the longer bottom one.
  3. 三: top to bottom. The middle line is the shortest and the bottom line the longest.
  4. 十: the horizontal first, then the vertical through it.
  5. 人: the left-falling stroke, then the right-falling one, which starts a little below the top of the first.
  6. 大: the horizontal, then the left-falling stroke through it, then the right-falling stroke.
  7. 小: the middle vertical with its hook first, then the short stroke on the left, then the dot on the right.
  8. 口: the left vertical; then the top and the right side in one stroke, turning at the corner; then the bottom horizontal, which closes the box.
  9. 中: the left vertical, the turning stroke, the bottom horizontal of the box, and last the long vertical through the middle.
  10. 文: the dot, the horizontal, the left-falling stroke, then the right-falling stroke.

Four rules are already at work in that list: horizontal before vertical (十), left-falling before right-falling (人), top to bottom (三), and the middle before the two sides (小). Lesson 8 collects the rest.

Key idea: a character has a fixed number of strokes written in a fixed order. Learn the order with the character, not afterwards.

Listening: ten characters, four pitch patterns

Every link below opens a Wiktionary entry. Scroll to the Chinese section and press play on the Mandarin recording, which Wikimedia Commons hosts free of charge; no account is needed. Listen to each character twice before you read the answers.

  1. Open 一, 三 and 中. What does the voice do on each? Answer: it stays high and level from start to finish.
  2. Open 十, 人 and 文. Answer: the voice rises, the way an English speaker's voice rises on a surprised "what?"
  3. Open 小 and 口. Answer: the voice dips low before it comes up again.
  4. Open 二 and 大. Answer: the voice falls sharply, like a firm "No!"
  5. Now three words: 中文, 普通話 and 漢語. For each syllable, decide whether the voice stays high, rises, dips or falls. Answers: 中文 is high then rising; 普通話 is dipping, high, falling; 漢語 is falling, then dipping.

You have just heard all four Mandarin tones. Lesson 2 names them and shows you how pinyin marks them.

Speaking: your first words aloud

Alone: record yourself on your phone saying the ten characters in order, then 中文, 大人 and 人口. Play each Wiktionary recording, then your own, and listen for one thing only: does your voice go high, up, down-and-up or down in the same places? Record again until it does.

With a partner: write the ten characters on cards. One of you holds up a card and the other says the character; then swap. Next, one of you says a character and the other points to the card. Finally, say the four-place table aloud to each other in English, place by place, without looking.

Character writing: ten characters on paper

Use squared paper, or rule a page into squares about two centimetres wide. Write each of the ten characters six times, one per square, saying it aloud each time. Keep each character centred in its square and roughly the same size as its neighbours: 口 should be a compact box, not a large frame, and the right-falling stroke of 人 and 大 should reach out further than the left-falling one.

Check the order of strokes as you go. Each Wiktionary entry linked in the Listening section shows an animated stroke order near the top of the page, made by Wikimedia's Stroke Order Project; for traditional forms later in the course, the Taiwan Ministry of Education's 國語小字典 (Mandarin Mini Dictionary) plays the official stroke order for every character. Count your strokes: 一 has 1, 二 2, 三 3, 十 2, 人 2, 大 3, 小 3, 中 4, 文 4 and 口 3. Start a character notebook now, with one line per character: the character, its pinyin, its meaning and its stroke count.

Common misconceptions

  • "Mandarin is one accent of Chinese, and Cantonese is another." They are separate languages in the same family. Their speakers generally cannot follow each other's everyday speech, though they share a writing system.
  • "People in China write in pinyin." Pinyin records pronunciation. It is used for learning, for typing characters on a phone, for names and on signs, but everyday writing is in characters.
  • "Taiwan uses zhuyin instead of pinyin." Taiwan uses zhuyin to teach children pronunciation and, since the transliteration principles revised in 2008, follows Hanyu Pinyin for writing Chinese in Latin letters unless other rules apply.
  • "Simplified and traditional Chinese are two languages." They are two sets of character forms for the same language. Many characters, including all ten in this lesson, are the same in both.
  • "Chinese characters are pictures of things." A few began as pictures, but most characters combine a part that hints at meaning with a part that hints at sound. Lesson 9 shows how.

What to carry forward

Mandarin is one of the Sinitic languages, alongside Cantonese, Hokkien, Shanghainese, Hakka and others; they are distinct when spoken but share one writing system. Its standard form is called 普通话 in mainland China and Hong Kong, 國語 in Taiwan and 华语 in Singapore. Simplified characters are standard in mainland China and Singapore, traditional characters in Taiwan and Hong Kong, and many characters are the same in both. Pinyin, approved in 1958 and an international standard since 1982, writes pronunciation in Latin letters with tone marks; zhuyin writes it with its own symbols and is how children in Taiwan learn to pronounce. You have written ten characters with seven basic strokes and heard all four tones. In Lesson 2 those tones get their names, their marks and their numbers.

Sources

  1. National People's Congress. (1958). 汉语拼音方案 [Scheme for the Chinese phonetic alphabet; approved 11 February 1958]. Wikisource transcription. zh.wikisource.org
  2. Wei, C. (2025). Law on the Standard Spoken and Written Chinese Language (revision): Comparison chart of the 2000 text and the version revised 27 December 2025 [Articles 2, 19 and 20]. NPC Observer. npcobserver.com
  3. Xinhua. (2025, December 27). China revises law on standard spoken, written Chinese language. The State Council of the People's Republic of China. english.www.gov.cn
  4. National Academy for Educational Research. (2018). 十二年國民基本教育課程綱要: 語文領域-國語文 [Curriculum guidelines of 12-year basic education: Mandarin; learning performances 3-I-1 and 4-I-1]. naer.edu.tw
  5. Ministry of Education, Taiwan. (2011). 中文譯音使用原則 [Principles for Chinese transliteration; points 2, 4 and 6; revised 18 December 2008 and 10 March 2011]. crptransfer.moe.gov.tw
  6. Bureau of Consular Affairs, Ministry of Foreign Affairs, Taiwan. (n.d.). 護照外文姓名中譯英系統: 4種拼音方式介紹 [Four romanization systems for passport names]. boca.gov.tw
  7. Government of the Hong Kong SAR. (2024, November 6). LCQ11: Raising public's Putonghua standard [Press release]. info.gov.hk
  8. Attorney-General's Chambers of Singapore. (n.d.). Constitution of the Republic of Singapore, Article 153A. Singapore Statutes Online. sso.agc.gov.sg
  9. Heng, B. H. (2024, May 10). Leveraging technology to enhance students' Mother Tongue Language learning experience [Forum letter reply]. Ministry of Education, Singapore. moe.gov.sg
  10. Ministry of Justice, Taiwan. (2019). Development of National Languages Act, Article 3. Laws and Regulations Database. law.moj.gov.tw
  11. Hammarström, H., Forkel, R., Haspelmath, M., and Bank, S. (2026). Sinitic. In Glottolog 5.3. Max Planck Institute for Evolutionary Anthropology. glottolog.org
  12. Unicode Consortium. (2026). The Unicode Standard, Version 18.0, section 18.3, Bopomofo. unicode.org
  13. Da, J. (2004). Chinese character frequency list: Modern Chinese. Middle Tennessee State University. lingua.mtsu.edu
  14. Ministry of Education, Taiwan. (2021). 國語辭典簡編本 [Concise Mandarin Chinese dictionary], entry 垃圾; 重編國語辭典修訂本 [Revised Mandarin Chinese dictionary], entry 中文. dict.concised.moe.edu.tw
  15. Wiktionary contributors. (2026). 你好; 垃圾; 中文 [Entries with Mandarin, Cantonese and Hokkien pronunciations and Mandarin audio]. Wiktionary. en.wiktionary.org
  16. Wikipedia contributors. (2026). Varieties of Chinese [background on mutual intelligibility]. Wikipedia. en.wikipedia.org
Key terms
Mandarin
The Chinese language with the largest number of speakers; its standard form is the national language of mainland China and Taiwan and an official language of Singapore.
普通话, 國語, 华语
Three names for standard Mandarin: pǔtōnghuà (common speech) in mainland China and Hong Kong, guóyǔ (national language) in Taiwan, huáyǔ in Singapore.
Sinitic languages
The family of Chinese languages, including Mandarin, Cantonese (Yue), Hokkien (Min Nan), Shanghainese (Wu) and Hakka; separate in speech, shared in writing.
汉字 (hànzì)
A Chinese character: one syllable, usually one unit of meaning, written in an imaginary square with a fixed number of strokes.
simplified and traditional characters
Two sets of character forms for the same language: simplified in mainland China and Singapore, traditional in Taiwan and Hong Kong. Many characters are the same in both.
Hanyu Pinyin
The system for writing Mandarin pronunciation in Latin letters with tone marks, approved in 1958 and adopted as ISO 7098 in 1982.
zhuyin (bopomofo)
A set of phonetic symbols, beginning ㄅ ㄆ ㄇ ㄈ, that children in Taiwan learn first to read and write Mandarin pronunciation.
stroke
One movement of the pen in writing a character, such as 横 (horizontal), 竖 (vertical), 撇 (left-falling), 捺 (right-falling) and 点 (dot).

The Four Tones and the Neutral Tone

  • Describe each of the four Mandarin tones and the neutral tone in words and with the five-level numbers 55, 35, 214 and 51, and say each one on a single syllable.
  • Read and write pinyin tone marks and tone numbers, and put the tone mark on the correct letter.
  • Read and write 女, 子, 好, 马, 妈 and 吗, and explain why 妈 and 吗 both contain 马.

Five words in one syllable

The 1958 Scheme for the Chinese Phonetic Alphabet, the document that created pinyin, needs only one line to show how its tone marks work. It lists five words: 妈 mā (mother), 麻 má (hemp), 马 mǎ (horse), 骂 mà (to scold) and 吗 ma, a little word that turns a statement into a question. The consonant is the same in all five, and so is the vowel. The only thing that changes is the tone: the shape your voice gives the syllable as it rises, falls, dips or stays level.

English uses pitch too, but for attitude, not for meaning. Say "Mom." flatly, "Mom?" as a question and "Mom!" as a warning, and you have one word with three moods. In Mandarin the pitch pattern belongs to the word itself. Say mǎ when you mean mā and you have said horse instead of mother. Context usually rescues the listener, but you cannot rely on it, and a tone said clearly is the difference between being understood and being guessed at.

This lesson builds the four tones one at a time, in the order most learners find easiest, then adds the neutral tone, then shows how pinyin writes them all. At the end you will run the same procedure on a second syllable and hear how every tone changes the meaning again.

Step 1: find your own five levels

In 1930 the linguist Yuen Ren Chao published a way of describing tones on a scale of five pitch levels. In the Chinese convention, 5 is the top of your normal speaking voice and 1 is the bottom. A tone is then written as the levels it passes through. The scale is relative to you. A deep voice and a high voice both have their own 5 and their own 1, and a Mandarin first tone from a bass and from a soprano are equally correct.

Find your range now. Say "ah" on the most comfortable note you can, then slide up to the top of your speaking voice, without straining into a squeak, and down to the bottom, without croaking. The top is your 5. The bottom is your 1. Your comfortable middle note is about a 3. Everything in this lesson happens inside that range.

Step 2: the first tone, high and level (55)

The first tone starts at 5 and stays at 5: mā. Think of holding one steady note, the way a doctor asks you to say "ahhh". It should not rise or fall, and it should not drift down at the end the way English words do when you finish a sentence. The University of Texas course Pitch Perfect Pinyin puts it simply: the first tone is high and remains high with no change in pitch.

Try it on the first character you learned in Lesson 1, 一 yī (one), and on 三 sān (three) and 中 zhōng (middle). Hold each for a full second. If you hear your voice sag at the end, start again a little higher.

Step 3: the fourth tone, falling (51)

The fourth tone drops from the top to the bottom, 5 to 1, quickly and firmly: mà. It is the sound of a firm "No!" or of stamping your foot. Learners from English usually manage this tone first, because English already uses a falling pitch for commands. The danger is starting it too low. Begin at your 5, as high as the first tone, and fall all the way.

Practise on 二 èr (two) and 大 dà (big). Then alternate: mā mà, mā mà. The first tone is a plateau and the fourth is a cliff that starts from the same height.

Step 4: the second tone, rising (35)

The second tone starts in the middle and rises to the top, 3 to 5: má. It is the pitch of a surprised "What?" or of "Yeah?" when someone calls your name. Keep the rise steady and let it finish high.

Practise on 十 shí (ten), 人 rén (person) and 文 wén (writing). Then string three tones together: mā má mà, high, rising, falling. If your má sounds like an English question that falls again at the end, cut the syllable shorter.

Step 5: the third tone, low and dipping (214, often just 21)

The third tone is the one learners argue about, because it has two forms. Said alone, or at the end of a sentence, it is the full third tone: it starts low at 2, sinks to 1, then rises to about 4, a dip and a climb, as in mǎ. That is the shape dictionaries give it, 214. Pitch Perfect Pinyin describes it as a curve that starts mid-low and is raised to mid-high.

In ordinary speech, though, the climb usually disappears. Before another syllable, a third tone is normally just low, 21, the half third tone. Pitch Perfect Pinyin notes that speakers nearly always use the half form when a third tone is the first syllable of a two-syllable word, and that the full curve appears mainly when the syllable is stressed. So practise both: the full dip and climb on its own, and the low, creaky half form inside words. The secret of a good third tone is how low it goes, not how high it climbs.

Practise on 小 xiǎo (small) and 口 kǒu (mouth), first alone with the full curve. Then try 小 inside a word: in 小人 xiǎorén (a mean-spirited person, literally "small person"), 小 stays low and leads straight into the rise of 人.

Remember: the first tone is high and level (55), the second rises (35), the third dips low and may climb back (214, often just 21), and the fourth falls from the top (51).

Step 6: the neutral tone

Some syllables carry no tone of their own. They are said lightly and briefly, and pinyin leaves them unmarked: the Scheme's own example is 吗 ma. This is the neutral tone, also called the light tone, and in the second syllable of 妈妈 māma (mom) you hear it after a first tone.

A neutral syllable takes its pitch from the syllable in front of it. The standard description, going back to Chao, is that it sits at about 2 after a first tone, 3 after a second, 4 after a third and 1 after a fourth. In practice that means it sounds low after mā, middling after má, rather high after a low mǎ, and lowest of all after a falling mà. You do not need to memorise the numbers. Say the first syllable fully, then let the second one fall off it, short and relaxed.

Step 7: marks, numbers and where the mark goes

Pinyin shows tones with four marks over a vowel. Many dictionaries, keyboards and word lists also use numbers, written after the syllable, and this course gives both. The numbers are only a second way of writing the same tones.

ToneMarkNumberFive-level descriptionIn wordsExample
Firstā (a line)ma155high and level妈 mā, mother
Secondá (rising slash)ma235rising from the middle to the top麻 má, hemp
Thirdǎ (a v-shaped check)ma3214, often 21low, dipping, sometimes climbing back马 mǎ, horse
Fourthà (falling slash)ma451falling from the top to the bottom骂 mà, to scold
Neutralno markma5, ma0 or madepends on the tone beforeshort and light吗 ma, question word

Dictionaries disagree about how to number the neutral tone: some write 5, some 0, and some, like Jun Da's frequency list from Lesson 1, simply leave the number off. All of them write the four full tones as 1 to 4.

Where does the mark sit? The Scheme says on the main vowel. In practice three checks settle every syllable:

  1. If the syllable has an a or an e, the mark goes there: hǎo, xiè, mǎi.
  2. If it has ou, the mark goes on the o: dōu, kǒu.
  3. Otherwise the mark goes on the last vowel: guì, liù, duō.

Pitch Perfect Pinyin gives the same three patterns as ǎo, iú and uì. The letter ü keeps its two dots and takes the tone mark above them, as in 女 nǚ (woman) and lǜ (green). One trap is visual rather than spoken: the third-tone mark is a v-shaped check (ǎ), not the round cup of a breve (ă) that some fonts and keyboards offer. On a phone, hold down a vowel and choose the version with the pointed v.

Remember: a tone mark goes on a or e if there is one, on the o of ou, and otherwise on the last vowel; tone numbers are a second way to write the same thing.

The procedure again, with a changed syllable: tang

Run the seven steps on a second syllable and every tone gives a different word again. On tang: 汤 tāng is soup, 糖 táng is sugar or candy, 躺 tǎng is to lie down, and 烫 tàng is scalding hot. "The soup is hot" and "the sugar is lying down" differ only in pitch. On ba it happens a third time: 八 bā is eight, 拔 bá is to pull out, 把 bǎ is to hold, and 爸 bà is the first syllable of 爸爸 bàba, dad.

Notice what does not change. The consonant and vowel stay put and only the tone moves, so a syllable written without its tone mark is ambiguous. That is why this course never writes pinyin without tone marks, and why you should not either.

Characters to learn

CharacterTraditionalPinyinMeaningRadicalStrokes
女samenǚ (nü3)woman, female女3
子samezǐ (zi3); light zi as a word endingchild; a common noun ending子3
好samehǎo (hao3)good, well女6
马馬 (10 strokes)mǎ (ma3)horse; a surname马 (traditional 馬)3
妈媽 (13 strokes)mā (ma1)mom, mother女6
吗嗎 (13 strokes)ma (ma5)question word at the end of a yes-no question口6

These six already show how characters are built. The Shuowen Jiezi, a dictionary finished around 100 CE, explains 好 as "beautiful", made of 女 (woman) and 子 (child). Now look at the other three. 妈 puts 女 beside 马: the woman part points to the meaning, and 马 (mǎ) points to the sound, ma. 吗 puts 口 (mouth) beside 马: the mouth marks a spoken word, and 马 again gives the sound. Neither has anything to do with horses. Lesson 9 shows how far this sound-hint trick goes and where it breaks down.

The traditional forms differ only in 马 itself, which is 馬 in traditional script, with four dots at the bottom for the legs. Wherever 马 appears inside a character, the traditional form uses 馬: 媽, 嗎.

A classroom tongue twister

Generations of Mandarin learners have practised tones on this rhyme. It is traditional, and only 妈 and 马 are characters you know so far.

ChinesePinyinEnglish
妈妈骑马,Māma qí mǎ,Mom rides a horse,
马慢,mǎ màn,the horse is slow,
妈妈骂马。māma mà mǎ.Mom scolds the horse.

Count the tones: 妈 is first, 骑 second, 马 third, 慢 and 骂 fourth, and the second 妈 of 妈妈 is neutral. Say it slowly with a hand moving to show each tone: flat for the first, up for the second, down and up for the third, sharply down for the fourth. Then say it at speaking speed.

Listening: hear the tones, then name them

All of these are free and need no account.

  1. Harvard's Chinese Language Program recommends the Yabla pinyin chart with audio, where clicking a syllable lets you play it in each of the four tones. Find ma and play all four. Then find tang, ba and yi, and play each set in order 1, 2, 3, 4.
  2. Open Wiktionary's entries for 媽媽, 麻, 馬, 罵 and 嗎, and play the Mandarin recording on each. You will hear māma, má, mǎ, mà and the light ma; the 嗎 entry also has recordings of its rarer readings, so play the first one.
  3. Test yourself before you read the answers. Open 八, 把, 拔, 躺, 湯 and 糖 in that order and write the tone number of each. Answers: 1, 3, 2, 3, 1, 2.
  4. The University of Texas at Austin's Pitch Perfect Pinyin has a short recorded introduction to the tones in its Basic Information unit; play each example. Then open its practice page, where you click a two-syllable word, type the two tone numbers and press submit to be checked. Do the first twenty words, and repeat any you miss.

Speaking: tones out loud

Alone: record yourself saying mā má mǎ mà ma, then tāng táng tǎng tàng and bā bá bǎ bà, moving your hand with each tone. Play it back beside the Yabla recordings. Check three things: is your first tone really level, does your fourth tone start high, and does your third tone go low? Then record the tongue twister twice, slowly and at speed.

With a partner: one of you says a syllable from the ma, ba or tang sets in any tone; the other holds up one, two, three or four fingers. Swap after ten. Then make it harder: say two syllables in a row, such as mā mǎ or táng tàng, and have your partner give both numbers.

Character writing: six characters

On squared paper, write each character six times, saying it aloud each time. 女 has 3 strokes, 子 3, 好 6, 马 3, 妈 6 and 吗 6. When 女 sits on the left of 好 or 妈, it is drawn narrower, and its last stroke slants up towards the right instead of running flat, so it does not collide with the right half. 吗 is written 口 first, then 马, left before right.

Watch the stroke order animated before you begin. The free Chinese character dictionary 汉典 (zdic.net) plays the mainland stroke order under the heading 笔顺 (bǐshùn, stroke order) and has a play button for the pronunciation; change the character at the end of the address, or use its search box, to see 妈, 吗 and the others. For the traditional forms, the Taiwan Ministry of Education's 國語小字典 animates 馬 under 筆順播放; write it once or twice too, so that you can recognise 媽 and 嗎 when you see them in Taiwan or Hong Kong.

Common misconceptions

  • "Tones are like English intonation, so they add feeling, not meaning." In Mandarin the tone is part of the word: mā, má, mǎ and mà are four different words.
  • "You need a high voice to make a proper first tone." Tones are relative to your own range. A low voice's 5 is lower than a high voice's 5, and both are right.
  • "The third tone always dips and rises." The full 214 curve is mostly heard alone or at the end of a phrase. Before another syllable it is usually just low, 21.
  • "The neutral tone is a fifth tone with its own fixed pitch." It has no pitch of its own. It is light and short, and its height depends on the tone before it.
  • "Tone marks are optional extras." Without them a syllable such as ma or tang is ambiguous. Always write and learn pinyin with its marks.

The short version

Mandarin uses pitch to tell words apart. On Chao's five-level scale, the first tone is high and level (55), the second rises (35), the third dips low and may climb back (214, usually just 21 before another syllable) and the fourth falls from the top (51). A neutral syllable is short and light and takes its pitch from the one before it. Pinyin writes the tones as ā á ǎ à, leaves the neutral tone unmarked, and puts the mark on a or e, on the o of ou, or otherwise on the last vowel; numbers 1 to 4 are a second way of writing the same tones. Your six new characters show the first pattern of the writing system: 妈 and 吗 borrow the sound of 马. Lesson 3 turns to the consonants and vowels around the tones, where pinyin's letters do not mean what English readers expect.

Sources

  1. National People's Congress. (1958). 汉语拼音方案 [Scheme for the Chinese phonetic alphabet], section 4, tone marks. Wikisource transcription. zh.wikisource.org
  2. Teng, W.-H. (n.d.). Pitch Perfect Pinyin: Basic information [Unit 0] and practice pages. Liberal Arts Instructional Technology Services, University of Texas at Austin. laits.utexas.edu
  3. Kenstowicz, M. (2010). Tone 2: Asian languages [Lecture 16 notes; Mandarin tones in Chao numbering and third-tone sandhi]. 24.901 Language and Its Structure I: Phonology. MIT OpenCourseWare. ocw.mit.edu
  4. Harvard University Chinese Language Program. (n.d.). Pronunciation study [recommends the Yabla pinyin chart with audio]. clp.hsites.harvard.edu
  5. Xu, S. (c. 100 CE). 說文解字 [Shuowen Jiezi], chapter 12, entries 女 and 好. Wikisource transcription. zh.wikisource.org
  6. Wiktionary contributors. (2026). 媽媽; 麻; 馬; 罵; 嗎; 八; 把; 拔 [Entries with Mandarin audio]. Wiktionary. en.wiktionary.org
  7. Wikipedia contributors. (2026). Standard Chinese phonology: Tones; Neutral tone [background, citing Chao 1968 for neutral-tone pitch]. Wikipedia. en.wikipedia.org
  8. Wikipedia contributors. (2026). Tone letter [background on Chao's 1930 tone letters and the five-level convention]. Wikipedia. en.wikipedia.org
  9. Unicode Consortium. (2026). Unihan database: entries for 女, 子, 好, 马, 妈, 吗 and their traditional forms [stroke counts and radicals]. unicode.org
Key terms
tone
The pitch pattern that belongs to a Mandarin syllable and changes its meaning, as in mā (mother) and mǎ (horse).
first tone (55)
High and level, held at the top of your range: mā. Marked with a line over the vowel, or the number 1.
second tone (35)
Rising from the middle of your range to the top, like a surprised question: má. Marked ´ or 2.
third tone (214)
Low and dipping, climbing back only when said alone or stressed: mǎ. Usually just low (21) before another syllable. Marked ˇ or 3.
fourth tone (51)
Falling sharply from the top to the bottom of your range: mà. Marked ` or 4.
neutral tone
A short, light syllable with no tone of its own, unmarked in pinyin, whose pitch depends on the syllable before it: the ma of 妈妈.
Chao tone numbers
Yuen Ren Chao's five-level scale, from 1 (bottom of your voice) to 5 (top), used to describe each tone as 55, 35, 214 and 51.
tone number
A digit after a pinyin syllable that stands in for the tone mark: ma1, ma2, ma3, ma4; the neutral tone is written 5, 0 or with no number.

Initials and Finals: Why Pinyin Is Not English Spelling

  • Pronounce the 21 Mandarin initials, including the aspirated pairs and the j q x, zh ch sh r and z c s groups, and the main finals, from their pinyin spelling.
  • Apply pinyin's spelling rules for ü, y, w, the shortened finals iu, ui and un, and the apostrophe, and match pinyin to zhuyin.
  • Read and write 我, 你, 他, 她, 们, 是 and 去, and use them in short questions with 吗.

Three readings of Xi'an

In 1974, near the city of 西安 in northwest China, the first pieces of the First Qin Emperor's army of clay soldiers came out of the ground. UNESCO's World Heritage listing says simply that the site, 35 kilometres northeast of the city, "was not discovered until 1974". Millions of visitors have come since, and many English speakers arrive saying the city's name one of three ways: "Zye-an", "Ex-ee-an" or "Shee-ahn". Only the third is close. The first two are not careless; they are what you get when you read pinyin with English letter values.

This lesson starts from those wrong readings and traces each mistake to its source, because the same few mistakes account for most of a beginner's accent. Pinyin borrowed the Latin alphabet, but it assigned Chinese sounds to the letters, just as Italian decided that c before i sounds like English ch. Learn what each letter means in pinyin, and the spelling becomes completely regular.

First, two terms. A Mandarin syllable has an initial, the consonant at the start (the x of xī), and a final, everything after it (the ī). Some syllables, such as ān, have no initial at all. Pitch Perfect Pinyin, the University of Texas course you met in Lesson 2, uses the same two terms, and so does every Chinese textbook.

Bug 1: giving the letters their English sounds

"Zye-an" reads x as z, the way English handles xylophone, and i as the "eye" of English time. "Ex-ee-an" reads x as the ks of box. In pinyin, x is neither. Pitch Perfect Pinyin describes xi as close to English she, but said with the lips spread rather than rounded and the tongue tip resting behind the lower teeth. So 西 xī (west) sounds roughly like "shee" with a smile.

The same bug hits other letters. Pinyin q is close to the ch of cheese, again with spread lips, so 七 qī (seven) sounds like "chee", not "kee". Pinyin c is the ts at the end of cats, so 次 cì (time, occurrence) begins "ts", not "k" or "s". Pinyin z is the ds of beds: 字 zì (character). And pinyin zh is not the French j of Beijing as many English speakers say it; it is closer to the j of jump, with the tongue tip curled up.

The point: pinyin letters are labels for Mandarin sounds. Read x, q, c, z and zh with English habits and the word comes out wrong even when the tone is right.

Bug 2: hearing b and p as English b and p

English separates b from p mainly by voicing: your vocal cords buzz for b and not for p. Mandarin separates them by aspiration, a puff of air. Pitch Perfect Pinyin explains that Mandarin b is voiceless and sounds like the p in speed, while p is said with a strong burst of air, like the p in pin. Hold a strip of paper in front of your mouth and say bā, then pā. The paper should stay still for bā and jump for pā.

Six pairs work this way, and English speakers who miss the puff confuse all of them: b and p, d and t, g and k, j and q, zh and ch, z and c. In each pair the first has no puff and the second has a strong one. Voicing simply does not carry meaning here. Pitch Perfect Pinyin points out that a voiced b, English style, would not change the meaning of a Mandarin word; leaving out or adding the puff of air can.

All 21 initials

Here are the initials grouped by where your mouth makes them, with the zhuyin symbol for each and an English comparison. The comparisons are approximate.

GroupPinyinZhuyinRoughly likeExample
Lipsb, p, m, fㄅ ㄆ ㄇ ㄈp in speed; p in pin with a puff; m; f八 bā (eight), 马 mǎ
Tongue tipd, t, n, lㄉ ㄊ ㄋ ㄌt in stay; t in top with a puff; n; l大 dà, 他 tā, 你 nǐ
Back of the tongueg, k, hㄍ ㄎ ㄏk in skill; k in kite with a puff; a rougher h好 hǎo
Flat tongue, spread lipsj, q, xㄐ ㄑ ㄒj in jeep; ch in cheese; sh in she, lips spread去 qù, 西 xī
Tongue tip curled backzh, ch, sh, rㄓ ㄔ ㄕ ㄖj in jump; ch in church; sh in shirt; r with no lip rounding中 zhōng, 是 shì, 人 rén
Tongue tip behind the teethz, c, sㄗ ㄘ ㄙds in beds; ts in cats; s字 zì, 次 cì, 四 sì

Two of these deserve extra attention. The j, q, x group is only ever followed by i or ü, and is said with the lips spread and the tongue flat. The zh, ch, sh, r group is said with the tongue tip curled up towards the roof of the mouth; Pitch Perfect Pinyin calls them retroflex. Say 西 xī and then 是 shì: the first is made with a flat tongue near the teeth, the second with the tongue tip turned up.

Bug 3: one letter i, three sounds

Most of the time pinyin i is the ee of see, with the corners of the mouth pulled back: 你 nǐ, 一 yī, 七 qī. But after the curled-back group, zh, ch, sh and r, the i is not an ee at all. Pitch Perfect Pinyin explains that this i is "only used to bring the quality of a vowel" to the consonant: you hold the tongue where it was and let your voice buzz. 是 shì (to be), 知 zhī (to know), 吃 chī (to eat) and 日 rì (sun, day) all end in that buzz.

After z, c and s the same thing happens with the tongue tip behind the teeth: 字 zì, 次 cì, 四 sì (four). So shì does not rhyme with English she, and sì does not sound like English see. If you say "see" for 四, a listener may hear 西 xī instead.

Bug 4: the u that is really ü

Mandarin has a vowel English lacks: ü, made by rounding your lips for oo while your tongue stays where it is for ee. You hear it in 女 nǚ (woman) and 绿 lǜ (green). The 1958 Scheme lets ü drop its dots in four places, because no confusion is possible there: after j, q and x, and at the start of a syllable, where it is spelled yu. So 去 qù (to go) is q plus ü, and 鱼 yú (fish) is ü with nothing in front. Read qù as "kwoo" and you have committed two bugs in one syllable.

After n and l the dots stay, because nu and lu exist with a plain u: 路 lù (road) and 绿 lǜ (green) are different words. That is the only place you need to write them.

Bug 5: the vowels that look familiar

  • e alone is not the e of bed. Pitch Perfect Pinyin compares it to the uh in duh, with unrounded lips: 热 rè (hot).
  • e in ie and üe is the e of yes: 谢谢 xièxie, 学 xué (to study).
  • ian sounds like the English word yen, not "ee-ann": the an changes after i.
  • an on its own has the a of father: pinyin fan sounds closer to English fine than to fan.
  • o after b, p and m carries a hidden u: bo is said "bwo", mo "mwo".
  • ou is like the o of go: 口 kǒu (mouth).
  • ong needs rounded lips; it is not the ong of English long.
  • er is a single vowel with the tongue curled back: 二 èr (two), 儿 ér (child).

Spelling rules: y, w, missing letters and the apostrophe

A few rules from the 1958 Scheme explain spellings that otherwise look random.

  1. A syllable may not begin with i, u or ü on paper. Write yi, wu and yu instead, and use y or w at the start of longer finals: ya, ye, yao, wo, wa, yue, yuan. So the syllable for one is yī, and the w of 我 wǒ stands for u.
  2. Three finals lose a letter after a consonant: iou becomes iu, uei becomes ui and uen becomes un. You still say the missing vowel lightly: 六 liù (six) is li-o-u, and the Scheme's own examples are niu, gui and lun.
  3. When a syllable starting with a, o or e follows another syllable and the boundary could be misread, an apostrophe separates them. The Scheme's example is pí'ǎo (a fur-lined jacket), which would otherwise read as piao.

Back to Xi'an: the fix

Now debug the city's name step by step. The apostrophe tells you there are two syllables, so this is not the one-syllable word xiān. The first syllable is x plus i: a flat-tongued "shee" with spread lips, high and level. The second is ān: the a of father, then n, also high and level. Put them together: 西安 Xī'ān, "Shee-ahn", both syllables high, and the name means "western peace". "Zye-an" fails at bugs 1 and 3 together, reading x as z and i as eye; "Ex-ee-an" fails at bug 1 alone.

The point: almost every pinyin mistake is an English habit carried over. Fix the letter values of x, q, c, z and zh, add the puff of air to p, t, k, q, ch and c, and give the i after zh, ch, sh, r, z, c and s its buzz, and most of your accent is gone.

Zhuyin: the same sounds in Taiwan's symbols

Zhuyin divides each syllable the same way pinyin does, into an initial and a final, but gives every sound its own symbol. Unicode's code chart lists the 37 basic Mandarin symbols with their names, which match the pinyin values below.

Initialsㄅ b, ㄆ p, ㄇ m, ㄈ f, ㄉ d, ㄊ t, ㄋ n, ㄌ l, ㄍ g, ㄎ k, ㄏ h, ㄐ j, ㄑ q, ㄒ x, ㄓ zh, ㄔ ch, ㄕ sh, ㄖ r, ㄗ z, ㄘ c, ㄙ s
Medials (the i, u, ü in the middle of a syllable)ㄧ i, ㄨ u, ㄩ ü
Finalsㄚ a, ㄛ o, ㄜ e, ㄝ ê (the e of ie), ㄞ ai, ㄟ ei, ㄠ ao, ㄡ ou, ㄢ an, ㄣ en, ㄤ ang, ㄥ eng, ㄦ er

Zhuyin has no letter for the buzzing i of shì or zì: the consonant symbol stands alone. Taiwan's Ministry of Education dictionary writes 支持 (zhīchí, to support) as ㄓ ㄔˊ, two symbols and one tone mark. The y and w of pinyin also vanish, because they were only spelling devices: 我 wǒ is ㄨㄛˇ, 你 nǐ is ㄋㄧˇ, 去 qù is ㄑㄩˋ and 是 shì is ㄕˋ.

Characters to learn

CharacterTraditionalPinyinMeaningRadicalStrokes
我samewǒ (wo3)I, me戈7
你samenǐ (ni3)you (one person)亻 (人)7
他sametā (ta1)he, him亻 (人)5
她sametā (ta1)she, her女6
们們 (10 strokes)men (men5)plural ending for people亻 (人)5
是sameshì (shi4)to be (am, is, are)日9
去sameqù (qu4)to go厶5

Add 们 to a pronoun and it becomes plural: 我们 wǒmen (we, us), 你们 nǐmen (you, more than one person), 他们 tāmen (they) and 她们 tāmen (they, all women). The 们 is neutral in tone.

他 and 她 are pronounced exactly the same. Wiktionary's entry on 她 explains that the character was originally a variant of 姐 and was repurposed as a written "she" in the 1910s, a change credited to the linguist Liu Bannong, by swapping the person part of 他 for 女. Spoken Mandarin still makes no difference. In Taiwan and Hong Kong you may also see 妳, an older written form of nǐ used when the "you" is a woman; it is rare in simplified writing.

Dialogue: who is going? (written for this course)

Two friends, 小文 (Xiǎo Wén) and 大马 (Dà Mǎ), are deciding who will go. Every character here is one you know. 吗 at the end turns a statement into a yes-or-no question, which Lesson 6 explains fully.

SpeakerChinesePinyinEnglish
小文你去吗?Nǐ qù ma?Are you going?
大马我去。你们去吗?Wǒ qù. Nǐmen qù ma?I'm going. Are you all going?
小文我们去。她去吗?Wǒmen qù. Tā qù ma?We're going. Is she going?
大马她是我妈妈。她去。Tā shì wǒ māma. Tā qù.She's my mom. She's going.
小文好!我们去!Hǎo! Wǒmen qù!Great! Let's go!

Read the dialogue aloud and listen to the third line. Tā qù ma could mean "Is he going?" as easily as "Is she going?" Only the written 她 settles it.

Listening: initials, finals and real words

  1. Open Pitch Perfect Pinyin's Unit 4 (j, q, x), Unit 7 (zh, ch, sh) and Unit 9 (z, c, s). Play jī qī xī, then zhī chī shī, then zī cī sī, and repeat each set until you can hear three different tongue positions. Its Unit 12 plays near-identical pairs such as jīqì (machine) and zhìqì (ambition); play the first ten pairs.
  2. On Wiktionary, play 七, 吃 and 次 (qī, chī, cì); then 西, 是 and 四 (xī, shì, sì). On the 吃 page, play the first Mandarin recording.
  3. Dictation: play 去, 綠, 魚, 學, 熱 and 日 without looking at the spelling on the page, and write each in pinyin with its tone mark. Answers: qù, lǜ, yú, xué, rè, rì.
  4. Place names: play 北京 and 青島. Answers: Běijīng, with j as in jeep; Qīngdǎo, with q as in cheese. Then play 我們 and 他們 and notice how light the men is.

Speaking: pairs that must not merge

Alone: with a strip of paper in front of your mouth, say these pairs and watch the paper: bā pā, dā tā, gē kē, jī qī, zhī chī, zī cī. Then record these sets and compare them with the Pitch Perfect Pinyin recordings: jī zhī zī, qī chī cī, xī shī sī, lù lǜ, nǐ nǚ. Finally, read the dialogue aloud twice, once slowly with every tone exaggerated and once at speaking speed.

With a partner: take turns choosing one syllable from each set above and saying it; your partner writes the pinyin. Score a point for every correct spelling, tone mark included. Then perform the dialogue, swapping roles.

Character writing: seven characters

Write each character six times, saying it aloud. Stroke counts: 我 7, 你 7, 他 5, 她 6, 们 5, 是 9, 去 5. Three need care. 我 begins with the short left-falling stroke at the top left, and its long hooked stroke comes fifth, before the final left-falling stroke and dot. 是 is written 日 first, then the long horizontal under it, then the strokes of the lower part from left to right. In 你, 他 and 们, the standing-person part 亻 is written first, left to right as always.

Check each one animated in 汉典 (zdic.net), under 笔顺, changing the character in the address or the search box. For the traditional 們, use the Taiwan Ministry of Education's 國語小字典. Then write the five lines of the dialogue once, from memory, and check them against the table.

Common misconceptions

  • "Pinyin x is the x of box or the z of xylophone." It is close to the sh of she said with spread lips: 西 xī.
  • "Mandarin b and p differ the way English b and p do." The difference is a puff of air. Mandarin b sounds like the p of speed; p has a strong puff.
  • "The i of shì and sì is an ee sound." After zh, ch, sh, r, z, c and s, the i is a buzz that continues the consonant. shì does not rhyme with English she.
  • "qu sounds like the qu of quick." Pinyin q is close to the ch of cheese, and the u after it is really ü: 去 qù.
  • "他 and 她 are pronounced differently." Both are tā. The difference exists only in writing and dates from the 1910s.

What you now know

A Mandarin syllable is an initial plus a final, carried by a tone. Pinyin uses Latin letters with Mandarin values: x is close to a spread-lipped sh, q to ch, c to ts, z to ds, and zh is a curled-tongue j. Six pairs of initials, b and p, d and t, g and k, j and q, zh and ch, z and c, differ by a puff of air, not by voicing. The letter i is ee after most initials but a buzz after zh, ch, sh, r and after z, c, s. ü drops its dots after j, q, x and y, and keeps them after n and l. Spelling rules add y and w at the start of syllables, shorten iou, uei and uen to iu, ui and un, and use an apostrophe in words like Xī'ān. Zhuyin writes the same sounds with 37 symbols and drops pinyin's spelling devices. You can now say and write 我, 你, 他, 她, 们, 是 and 去. Lesson 4 shows what happens to tones when syllables run together in real speech.

Sources

  1. Teng, W.-H. (n.d.). Pitch Perfect Pinyin: Units 1, 4, 6, 7, 8, 9 and 12 [pronunciation tips and recordings]. Liberal Arts Instructional Technology Services, University of Texas at Austin. laits.utexas.edu
  2. National People's Congress. (1958). 汉语拼音方案 [Scheme for the Chinese phonetic alphabet], sections on finals, ü, y and w, and the syllable-dividing mark. Wikisource transcription. zh.wikisource.org
  3. UNESCO World Heritage Centre. (n.d.). Mausoleum of the First Qin Emperor [inscribed 1987]. whc.unesco.org
  4. Unicode Consortium. (2026). Bopomofo: Range 3100-312F [code chart with character names]. The Unicode Standard, Version 18.0. unicode.org
  5. Ministry of Education, Taiwan. (2021). 國語辭典簡編本 [Concise Mandarin Chinese dictionary], entry 謝謝, with linked entry 支持 [search the site for 謝謝]. dict.concised.moe.edu.tw
  6. Wiktionary contributors. (2026). 她; 妳 [Glyph origin and usage notes]. Wiktionary. en.wiktionary.org
  7. Wiktionary contributors. (2026). 七; 吃; 次; 西; 是; 四; 去; 綠; 魚; 學; 熱; 日; 北京; 青島; 我們; 他們 [Entries with Mandarin audio]. Wiktionary. en.wiktionary.org
Key terms
initial
The consonant at the start of a Mandarin syllable, such as the x of xī. Mandarin has 21; some syllables have none.
final
Everything in a syllable after the initial: a vowel or vowels, sometimes ending in n or ng, as in the ān of Xī'ān.
aspiration
A puff of air after a consonant. It separates b from p, d from t, g from k, j from q, zh from ch and z from c.
retroflex initials
zh, ch, sh and r, said with the tongue tip curled up towards the roof of the mouth, as in 是 shì.
ü
A vowel made with the tongue in the ee position and the lips rounded; written u after j, q, x and y, as in 去 qù and 鱼 yú.
buzzing i
The i after zh, ch, sh, r, z, c and s, which is not an ee but a continuation of the consonant, as in 是 shì and 四 sì.
们 (men)
A neutral-tone ending that makes pronouns and some nouns for people plural: 我们, 你们, 他们.
apostrophe in pinyin
A mark that separates syllables when the boundary could be misread, as in Xī'ān, which is not the one-syllable xiān.

Tones in Connected Speech: 你好, 不 and 一

  • Apply the third-tone change (two third tones become second plus third) and use the half third tone before other tones.
  • Pronounce 不 and 一 with the tone the next syllable requires, and explain how dictionaries and textbooks write these changes.
  • Read and write 不, 很, 也, 都, 对, 天, 客, 气 and 起, and use 不客气, 对不起, 一起 and 天气 in short exchanges.

A recording that disagrees with its label

Open Wiktionary's entry for 你好 and play the Mandarin recording. The audio file is named "Zh nǐ hǎo", two third tones, exactly as the dictionary spells it. Listen closely to the first syllable, though. It does not dip. It rises, like a second tone: ní hǎo. The speaker is not careless, and the file is not mislabelled. Almost every speaker of Mandarin says 你好 this way.

That is this lesson's problem. The tones you learned in Lesson 2 are the tones of syllables said one at a time. When syllables run together in speech, a few of them change, by regular rules that native speakers follow without thinking. Three rules cover nearly everything a first-year student meets: one for the third tone, one for 不 (not) and one for 一 (one). Linguists call such changes tone sandhi, from a Sanskrit word for "joining". You do not need the term to use the rules, but you will see it in dictionaries and on Wiktionary.

Rule 1: two third tones in a row

When a third tone is followed by another third tone, the first one is said as a second tone. MIT's phonology course writes it as a formula: 214 becomes 35 before 214. Pitch Perfect Pinyin, the University of Texas course, puts it in words: "Two third tones are normally not pronounced in a row." Its examples are the same greeting, nǐ hǎo, and suǒyǐ (so, therefore).

WrittenSaidMeaning
你好 nǐ hǎoní hǎohello
很好 hěn hǎohén hǎovery good, fine
可以 kěyǐkéyǐmay, can
水果 shuǐguǒshuíguǒfruit
老虎 lǎohǔláohǔtiger
洗澡 xǐzǎoxízǎoto take a bath

Why does Mandarin do this? Say two full 214 dips back to back and you will feel the problem: your voice has to dip, climb, plunge and climb again inside two syllables. Raising the first one smooths the line. Notice that the second syllable keeps its third tone, and if it ends a phrase it can keep the full dip and climb.

What matters here: two third tones in a row become second plus third. The first one rises; the last one stays low.

Rule 2: the half third tone

Lesson 2 introduced the half third tone. Here is where it lives. Before any tone other than a third tone, including the neutral tone, a third tone is normally said low, 21, without the climb. Pitch Perfect Pinyin notes that when a third tone opens a two-syllable word, the half form is nearly always used.

  • Before a first tone: 北京 Běijīng, low then high.
  • Before a second tone: 女儿 nǚ'ér (daughter), low then rising.
  • Before a fourth tone: 很大 hěn dà (very big), low then a fall from the top.
  • Before a neutral tone: 我们 wǒmen, low then a short, rather high syllable.

A useful way to think about it: the low part is the third tone's identity, and the climb is only an ending it adds when nothing follows. Pronounce the third tone low and short in the middle of a phrase, and you will sound more natural than a learner who carefully performs every dip.

Chains of third tones

Some phrases contain three or four third tones in a row. Pitch Perfect Pinyin's example is the name of the cellist Yo-Yo Ma, 马友友, written Mǎ Yǒuyǒu with three third tones. Said in the Western order, Yǒuyǒu Mǎ, it is normally said Yóuyóu Mǎ, two rises and a final third tone. Said in the Chinese order, surname first, it is normally Mǎ Yóuyǒu: the surname stays a low third tone and only the first yǒu of the given name changes. The rule is the same; what changed is how the words group. Speakers apply rule 1 inside each group of words that belong together, and a slight pause between groups resets it.

So when you meet 我也很好 (wǒ yě hěn hǎo, I'm fine too), four third tones in a row, apply the rule group by group. The AllSet Chinese Pronunciation Wiki states the principle simply: in each group, the last third tone stays a third tone and the ones before it rise, and in natural speech a long string is broken into groups by small pauses. With a tiny break after 我, the sentence comes out wǒ yé hén hǎo; rushed together as one group, wó yé hén hǎo. Both are normal. Keep the changed syllables short and the last third tone low, and listeners will hear nothing wrong.

Rule 3: 不 (not) becomes bú before a fourth tone

不 is normally a fourth tone, bù. Before another fourth tone it becomes a second tone, bú, for the same reason as rule 1: two sharp falls in a row are hard to say. Before a first, second or third tone, and at the end of a phrase, it stays bù. Pitch Perfect Pinyin's examples are bù shuō (not say), bù néng (cannot), bù gǎn (not dare) and bú yào (do not want).

Next syllableExampleSaidMeaning
First tone不吃bù chīnot eat
Second tone不来bù láinot come
Third tone不好bù hǎonot good
Fourth tone不是, 不对, 不客气bú shì, bú duì, bú kèqiis not; not right; you're welcome

One more change: inside some set phrases 不 goes light and loses its tone altogether. 对不起 (sorry) is said duìbuqǐ, and in a question built as "is or is not", 是不是 (shì bu shì), the 不 in the middle may also turn neutral. Lesson 20 returns to those questions.

Rule 4: 一 (one) changes to fit its neighbour

一 has three spoken tones, and which one you use depends on what follows.

  • yī, its own first tone, when it stands alone, when you count (一, 二, 三), at the end of a word, and in ordinal numbers such as 第一 dì-yī (first).
  • yì, fourth tone, before a first, second or third tone: 一天 yì tiān (one day), 一般 yìbān (ordinary), 一直 yìzhí (straight on), 一起 yìqǐ (together).
  • yí, second tone, before a fourth tone: 一样 yíyàng (the same), 一定 yídìng (certainly), and 一个 yí ge (one of something), where 个 is a fourth tone often said lightly.

Between a repeated verb, as in 看一看 (kàn yi kàn, take a look), 一 may become neutral too. The numbers 七 qī (seven) and 八 bā (eight) once changed in a similar way, but for most speakers today they stay first tone, so you can leave them alone.

What matters here: 不 is bú before a fourth tone and bù elsewhere; 一 is yí before a fourth tone, yì before the other tones, and yī when it counts, ends a word or names a place in order.

What pinyin writes and what you say

Dictionaries usually write each syllable's own tone and leave the changes to you. Taiwan's Ministry of Education dictionary, for example, writes a proverb that contains 一場 as yī cháng, although every speaker says yì cháng, and it writes 你 and 好 side by side as nǐ hǎo. Teaching materials differ on the 不 and 一 changes. Pitch Perfect Pinyin writes the third-tone change unmarked, nǐ hǎo, but marks the changes of 不 and 一 as they are said: bú yào, yí ge. Wiktionary's recordings are named the same way: its files include zh-búcuò and zh-yíyàng.

This course follows that common practice. Third tones are written as dictionary third tones, and you apply rules 1 and 2 as you speak. 不 and 一 are written with the tone you actually say, so 不是 appears as bú shì and 一个 as yí ge. When you look a word up in a dictionary, expect to see bù and yī instead.

Characters to learn

CharacterTraditionalPinyinMeaningRadicalStrokes
不samebù (bu4), bú before a fourth tonenot, no一4
很samehěn (hen3)very; the usual link before an adjective彳9
也sameyě (ye3)also, too乙3
都same (11 strokes in Taiwan's count)dōu (dou1)all, both阝10
对對 (14 strokes)duì (dui4)correct, right; facing寸 (traditional 寸)5
天sametiān (tian1)sky; day大4
客samekè (ke4)guest宀9
气氣 (10 strokes)qì (qi4)air, breath, gas气4
起sameqǐ (qi3)to rise, get up走10

Together these build some of the most useful words you will learn this year. 客气 kèqi means polite or standing on ceremony, so 不客气 bú kèqi, "don't be polite", is the everyday reply to thanks: you're welcome. 对不起 duìbuqǐ, sorry, is literally "not able to face" someone. 一起 yìqǐ means together. 天气 tiānqì, sky air, means weather. 都 and 也 always come before the verb or adjective they belong to, never at the end of the sentence the way English "too" does: 我也去 (I'm going too), 他们都去 (they're all going).

Dialogue: fine, thanks, and you? (written for this course)

小文 and 大马 meet again. Under each line, the pinyin shows the tones as they are actually said, so you can see every rule from this lesson at work.

SpeakerChineseSaidEnglish
小文你好!你好吗?Ní hǎo! Ní hǎo ma?Hi! How are you?
大马我很好。你也好吗?Wǒ hén hǎo. Nǐ yé hǎo ma?I'm fine. Are you well too?
小文我也很好。天气很好!Wǒ yé hén hǎo. Tiānqì hén hǎo!I'm fine too. The weather's great!
大马对。我们一起去吗?Duì. Wǒmen yìqǐ qù ma?Right. Shall we go together?
小文对不起,我不去。他们都去。Duìbuqǐ, wǒ bú qù. Tāmen dōu qù.Sorry, I'm not going. They're all going.
大马好,不客气!Hǎo, bú kèqi!OK, no problem!

Check the changes line by line. Ní hǎo: rule 1. Wǒ hén hǎo: a small break after 我, then 很好 follows rule 1. Nǐ yé hǎo: 也好 follows rule 1, and 你 stays low. Wǒ yé hén hǎo: the chain, grouped after 我. Tiānqì hén hǎo: rule 1 again. Yìqǐ and bú qù: rules 4 and 3. Strictly, 不客气 answers thanks; 大马 uses it loosely here, as people do, to mean "no worries". In Lesson 5 you will learn the proper reply to an apology, 没关系.

Listening: hear the changes

  1. Third tones in pairs. Play Wiktionary's recordings of 你好, 可以, 水果, 老虎, 洗澡 and 展覽 (zhǎnlǎn, exhibition). In each, which syllable rises? Answer: the first; the second stays low.
  2. Three kinds of 不. Play 不 on its own, then 不錯 (not bad), 不用 (no need) and 對不起. Write the tone of 不 in each. Answers: bù; bú, because cuò is a fourth tone; bú, because yòng is a fourth tone; neutral in duìbuqǐ.
  3. Three kinds of 一. Play 一, 一起, 一般, 一直, 一樣 and 一定, and sort them by the tone of 一. Answers: yī alone; yì in yìqǐ, yìbān and yìzhí; yí in yíyàng and yídìng.
  4. Pitch Perfect Pinyin's Unit 11 plays every pair of tones in real words. Play its row of 3+3 words, from xǐzǎo to bǎoshǒu, and say each one after the speaker. Then play its 3+neutral row, which includes wǒmen and jiějie, and listen for the short, rather high second syllable.
  5. Single words from this lesson: 很, 也, 都 and 天氣. On the 都 page, play the dōu recording.

Speaking: phrases, not syllables

Alone: record each phrase, then compare with the recordings: 你好, 很好, 可以, 不是, 不对, 不客气, 对不起, 一天, 一起, 一个, 一样, 第一. Then record the dialogue twice. In the second recording, speed up and listen for whether your third tones are getting shorter and lower; they should.

With a partner: one of you reads a phrase from the list using only the dictionary tones, robot-style; the other says it the way a speaker would. Swap after six phrases. Finally, perform the dialogue, then change it: replace 天气很好 with 天气不好 (the weather's bad) and 我不去 with 我也去 (I'm going too), and adjust the tones of 不 as you go.

Character writing: nine characters

Write each character six times, saying it aloud. Stroke counts: 不 4, 很 9, 也 3, 都 10, 对 5, 天 4, 客 9, 气 4, 起 10. Watch three details. 也 is only three strokes, and its middle stroke is a long hooked turn. In 客, the roof 宀 comes first and is wide enough to cover everything beneath it. In 起, the long final stroke of 走 runs under the right-hand part and is written last, after 己.

See each one animated on 汉典 (zdic.net), under 笔顺. For the traditional forms 對 and 氣, use Taiwan's 國語小字典 and write each twice. Then write the six lines of the dialogue from memory and check them.

Common misconceptions

  • "Tone changes are a regional accent, so I can skip them." The third-tone change and the changes of 不 and 一 are part of standard Mandarin everywhere. Skipping them makes your speech sound mechanical and can be hard to follow.
  • "If two third tones meet, both become second tones." Only the first changes. The last third tone in the group stays low.
  • "不 is always bù." Before a fourth tone it is bú: 不是 bú shì, 不客气 bú kèqi. In 对不起 it is neutral.
  • "The pinyin in a dictionary is how you should say the word." Dictionaries usually write each syllable's own tone. You apply the changes when you speak.
  • "也 and 都 go at the end, like English too." They go before the verb or adjective: 我也很好, not 我很好也.

Putting it together

Tones adjust when syllables meet. Two third tones in a row become second plus third: 你好 is said ní hǎo. Before any other tone, a third tone is usually just low, without the climb. In chains of third tones, apply the rule group by group, as in Mǎ Yóuyǒu. 不 is bù, except before a fourth tone, where it is bú, and in set phrases such as duìbuqǐ, where it is light. 一 is yī when it counts, ends a word or is an ordinal; yì before first, second and third tones; and yí before a fourth tone. Dictionaries usually write the original tones; this course writes 不 and 一 as they are said and leaves third-tone changes to you. With 不, 很, 也, 都, 对, 天, 客, 气 and 起 you can now say how you are, say sorry, say you're welcome and talk about the weather. Lesson 5 puts all of it to work in greetings, names and the forms of address that go with them.

Sources

  1. Teng, W.-H. (n.d.). Pitch Perfect Pinyin: Basic information [Unit 0: tone changes, 一 and 不] and Unit 11 [tone-pair review with recordings]. Liberal Arts Instructional Technology Services, University of Texas at Austin. laits.utexas.edu
  2. Kenstowicz, M. (2010). Tone 2: Asian languages [Lecture 16 notes: Mandarin third-tone sandhi, 214 to 35 before 214]. 24.901 Language and Its Structure I: Phonology. MIT OpenCourseWare. ocw.mit.edu
  3. Wikipedia contributors. (2026). Standard Chinese phonology: Tone sandhi [background on 一, 不, 七 and 八]. Wikipedia. en.wikipedia.org
  4. AllSet Learning. (n.d.). Tone changes for third tones. Chinese Pronunciation Wiki. resources.allsetlearning.com
  5. Ministry of Education, Taiwan. (2021). 重編國語辭典修訂本 [Revised Mandarin Chinese dictionary], entry 一場官司一場火,任你好漢沒處躲 [base tones written in pinyin and zhuyin; search the site for the proverb]. dict.revised.moe.edu.tw
  6. Wiktionary contributors. (2026). 你好; 可以; 水果; 老虎; 洗澡; 展覽; 不; 不錯; 不用; 對不起; 一; 一起; 一般; 一直; 一樣; 一定; 很; 也; 都; 天氣 [Entries with Mandarin audio]. Wiktionary. en.wiktionary.org
  7. 汉典 [Zdic]. (n.d.). 都; 起 [Character entries: stroke counts and stroke-order animations]. zdic.net
  8. Ministry of Education, Taiwan. (n.d.). 國語小字典 [Mandarin mini dictionary], entries 都, 對 and 氣 [Taiwan stroke counts and stroke order]. dict.mini.moe.edu.tw
Key terms
tone sandhi
Regular changes to a syllable's tone when it is spoken next to other syllables, such as nǐ hǎo becoming ní hǎo.
third-tone change
When two third tones meet, the first is said as a second tone: 很好 hěn hǎo is said hén hǎo.
half third tone
The low part of the third tone (21) without the final climb, used before first, second, fourth and neutral tones.
不 bù and bú
不 is bù before first, second and third tones and at the end of a phrase, bú before a fourth tone, and light in phrases such as 对不起.
一 yī, yì and yí
一 is yī when counting, at the end of a word and in ordinals; yì before first, second and third tones; yí before a fourth tone.
不客气 bú kèqi
You're welcome; literally 'don't be polite'. The usual reply to 谢谢 (thank you).
对不起 duìbuqǐ
Sorry, excuse me; the 不 in the middle is said in the neutral tone.
也 and 都
Also and all. Both go before the verb or adjective, after the subject: 我也去, 他们都去.

Module 2: Meeting People

Greetings, names and forms of address, sentences with 是 and questions with 吗, and describing people with adjectives and 很.

你好 and 您好: Greetings, Names and Forms of Address

  • Greet people, thank them, apologise and say goodbye in Mandarin, choosing between 你 and 您.
  • Ask for and give names and surnames correctly, with the surname first and 贵姓 used only in questions.
  • Address teachers, adults and classmates with the right titles, and read and write the 18 characters in the lesson.

Seven forty on a Monday in Taipei

At 7:40 on a Monday morning in September, Maya Chen walks through the gate of a high school in Taipei for the first day of a year-long Mandarin programme. She is fifteen, from Vancouver, and her grandparents speak Cantonese at home. She can understand a little of what they say, but she has never read a Chinese sentence. This lesson follows her through her first morning, a story written for this course, and stops at every place where she has to choose the right words.

The first choice comes at the classroom door. A man of about fifty is standing there with a class list. Maya has two ways to say hello. 你好 (nǐ hǎo), from Lesson 4, is the everyday greeting. 您好 (nín hǎo) uses 您, the polite form of "you", and is what you say to a teacher, an older stranger or a customer. She says 您好, and he smiles and answers 你好: he can use the everyday form to a student, but she should not use it to him.

Hello to one person, to many and to a teacher

The pattern behind 你好 is simple: a person or group, then 好 (good). Change the first part and you have a new greeting.

GreetingPinyinSaid to
你好nǐ hǎo (said ní hǎo)one person, any age, informally
您好nín hǎoone person, politely: a teacher, an older adult, a customer
你们好nǐmen hǎoa group
老师好lǎoshī hǎoa teacher
早zǎoanyone, in the morning; literally "early"

The 您 in 您好 is a different character from 你: it adds 心 (heart) underneath, and the Unicode database's definition of it is simply "honorific for 'you'". There is no polite form of "you" for a group in everyday speech; 你们 serves for everyone.

The core of it: greet one person with 你好, a group with 你们好, and a teacher or older adult with 您好 or 老师好.

What is your name? Two ways to ask

The teacher, whose name is Mr. Li, asks Maya the everyday question: 你叫什么名字? (Nǐ jiào shénme míngzi?, What is your name?, literally "You are called what name?"). She answers 我叫陈美雅 (Wǒ jiào Chén Měiyǎ, My name is Chen Meiya), the Chinese name her grandmother gave her. Notice two things. The question word 什么 (shénme, what) sits exactly where the answer goes, so the answer is the question with the name dropped in; Lesson 20 shows that this is how every Chinese question word works. And 名字 is said míngzi in mainland China, with a light second syllable, and míngzì in Taiwan, where Wiktionary records míngzì as the standard reading.

A more formal question asks only for the surname: 您贵姓? (Nín guìxìng?, May I ask your surname?, literally "your honourable surname?"). The reply drops the honour: 我姓陈 (Wǒ xìng Chén, My surname is Chen). Wiktionary's usage note for 贵姓 is blunt about this: it is used in questions and is not appropriate in a reply. Saying 我贵姓陈 would be like answering "What is your honourable name?" with "My honourable name is Chen." Its example adds a polite flourish, 免贵 (miǎn guì, "no need for honour"), before the surname.

The verbs differ too. 叫 (jiào, to be called) takes the full name or the given name: 我叫美雅 or 我叫陈美雅. 姓 (xìng, to be surnamed) is both a verb and a noun, and takes only the surname: 我姓陈.

Surname first, and the most common surnames

A Chinese name puts the surname first and the given name after it. In 陈美雅, 陈 is the surname and 美雅 the given name. The cellist known in English as Yo-Yo Ma is 马友友, Mǎ Yǒuyǒu, in Chinese order. Most surnames are one character and most given names are one or two, so most full names are two or three characters long.

A small number of surnames cover a large share of people. In February 2021 China's Ministry of Public Security reported that the five most common surnames by registered population in 2020 were 王 (Wáng), 李 (Lǐ), 张 (Zhāng), 刘 (Liú) and 陈 (Chén), together 30.8 percent of the registered population. Taiwan's Ministry of the Interior counted names as of 30 June 2023 and found a different order: 陳, 林 (Lín), 黃 (Huáng), 張 and 李 lead its list, and the ten most common surnames covered 52.79 percent of Taiwan's 23.37 million people. 陳 alone accounted for 11.21 percent.

Maya's surname shows why one surname can have many spellings in English. 陈 (traditional 陳) is Chén in pinyin. Her grandparents' Cantonese reading gives the Hong Kong spelling Chan, which is why her passport says Chan. In Hokkien and Teochew it is read Tan, the usual spelling in Singapore, Malaysia, Indonesia and the Philippines, and in Vietnamese it is Trần. All of these are the same written surname.

Titles go after the name

In English a title comes first: Mr. Li, Ms. Zhang, Teacher Wang. In Chinese it comes after the surname: 李先生 (Lǐ xiānsheng, Mr. Li), 张女士 (Zhāng nǚshì, Ms. Zhang), 王老师 (Wáng lǎoshī, Teacher Wang). A title can also stand alone when you speak to someone: students address a teacher simply as 老师, and in Wiktionary's definition 老师 is both "teacher" and "a term of address for a teacher".

TitlePinyinUsed forExample
老师lǎoshīa teacher; in some regions also a writer or artist李老师
先生xiānshenga man: Mr., sir王先生
女士nǚshìa woman: Ms.张女士
小姐xiǎojiěa young woman: Miss李小姐
同学tóngxuéa classmate or fellow student王同学, or just 同学

小姐 needs care. Wiktionary's usage note explains that in mainland China the word picked up a slang meaning, so it is now used less as a polite "Miss" there; people use 女士 as a title instead, and call a waiter or waitress 服务员 (fúwùyuán). The note adds that the plain meaning survives in set phrases and is starting to return. If in doubt, 女士 is always safe.

The core of it: surname first, title after, and 贵 only when you ask about someone else.

For adults whose names you do not know, Mandarin borrows family words. Wiktionary lists 阿姨 (āyí, auntie) as a form of address for any woman around your mother's age and 叔叔 (shūshu, uncle) for a man around your father's age. A teenager meeting a friend's parents, or asking a shopkeeper for help, will often use them, and they sound warm rather than overfamiliar.

Thank you, sorry, excuse me, goodbye

By the end of the morning Maya has used every phrase in this table.

You sayPinyinMeaningThe usual reply
谢谢xièxiethank you不客气 bú kèqi, or 不谢 bú xiè (you're welcome)
对不起duìbuqǐsorry没关系 méi guānxi (it doesn't matter)
请问qǐngwènexcuse me, may I ask...a question follows
再见zàijiàngoodbye; literally "again see"再见
拜拜báibái or bàibaibye-bye, from English拜拜

Two details. 请问 starts a question to a stranger, the way "excuse me" does in English; it is not an apology, which is 对不起. And 拜拜 is a loanword from English "bye-bye". Wiktionary gives báibái as the standard mainland pronunciation and bàibai as the standard in Taiwan: one more small difference between the standards.

Characters to learn

CharacterTraditionalPinyinMeaningRadicalStrokes
叫samejiào (jiao4)to be called; to call口5
姓samexìng (xing4)surname; to be surnamed女8
名samemíng (ming2)name口6
字samezì (zi4); light zi in 名字 on the mainlandcharacter, written word子6
什sameshén (shen2)first half of 什么, what亻4
么麼 (14 strokes)me (me5)second half of 什么丿3
老samelǎo (lao3)old耂6
师師 (10 strokes)shī (shi1)teacher, master巾6
先samexiān (xian1)first, before儿6
生sameshēng (sheng1); light sheng in 先生to be born; life生5
再samezài (zai4)again冂6
见見 (7 strokes)jiàn (jian4)to see见 (traditional 見)4
谢謝 (17 strokes)xiè (xie4)to thank讠 (traditional 言)12
您samenín (nin2)you (polite)心11
王samewáng (wang2)king; the surname Wang王4
李samelǐ (li3)plum; the surname Li木7
请請 (15 strokes)qǐng (qing3)please; to invite讠 (traditional 言)10
问問 (11 strokes)wèn (wen4)to ask门 (traditional 口)6

Eighteen characters is a long list, so look for the patterns. 谢 and 请 both have the speech radical 讠, the simplified form of 言 (words), on the left. The Shuowen Jiezi, the dictionary of about 100 CE you met in Lesson 2, explains three of the others. 问 is 口 (mouth) with 门 (door, mén) giving the sound. 姓 is 女 plus 生 (to be born), "that from which a person is born", with 生 also giving the sound. And 名 is 口 plus 夕 (evening): in the dark, it says, people cannot see each other, so they name themselves with their mouths. Whether or not that is how the character really arose, it is a memorable picture. 先生 is literally "born first", an elder, and 老师 is an "old master".

Dialogue: the first morning (written for this course)

SpeakerChinesePinyinEnglish
Maya老师,您好!Lǎoshī, nín hǎo!Hello, sir!
李老师你好!你叫什么名字?Nǐ hǎo! Nǐ jiào shénme míngzi?Hello! What's your name?
Maya我叫陈美雅。请问,您贵姓?Wǒ jiào Chén Měiyǎ. Qǐngwèn, nín guìxìng?My name is Chen Meiya. May I ask your surname?
李老师我姓李。你叫我李老师。Wǒ xìng Lǐ. Nǐ jiào wǒ Lǐ lǎoshī.My surname is Li. Call me Teacher Li.
Maya谢谢李老师!Xièxie Lǐ lǎoshī!Thank you, Teacher Li!
李老师不客气。这是王小文,她是你的同学。Bú kèqi. Zhè shì Wáng Xiǎowén, tā shì nǐ de tóngxué.You're welcome. This is Wang Xiaowen; she's your classmate.
王小文你好!Nǐ hǎo!Hi!
Maya你好!对不起,我的中文不好。Nǐ hǎo! Duìbuqǐ, wǒ de Zhōngwén bù hǎo.Hi! Sorry, my Chinese isn't good.
王小文没关系!再见,李老师!Méi guānxi! Zàijiàn, Lǐ lǎoshī!No problem! Goodbye, Teacher Li!

A few characters here are not on your list yet: 这 (zhè, this), 的 (de, the possessive ending, as in 我的, my), 美雅, and 没关系. Read them from the pinyin; you will learn 这 and 的 in Module 5. Notice that 叫 is used two ways: 你叫什么名字 (what are you called?) and 你叫我李老师 (you call me Teacher Li).

Listening: greetings and names

  1. Play the Wiktionary recordings of 您, 老師, 先生, 女士, 小姐, 同學, 阿姨 and 叔叔. For each, write the tones you hear. Answers: nín (2); lǎoshī (3, 1); xiānsheng (1, light); nǚshì (3, 4); xiǎojiě (3, 3, said xiáojiě); tóngxué (2, 2); āyí (1, 2); shūshu (1, light).
  2. Play 謝謝, 沒關係, 請問 and 再見, and repeat each three times. Which one ends in a light, toneless syllable? Answer: xièxie, and guānxi in méi guānxi.
  3. Names: play 叫, 姓, 貴姓, 名字 and 什麼, then the surnames 王 and 李. On the 陳 page (陳), find the pronunciation table and look for the Cantonese and Hokkien readings that give the spellings Chan and Tan.
  4. Watch "Hello", the first episode of Legit Mando from TaiwanPlus, the international service run since 2022 by Taiwan's Public Television Service. It is free to watch on the TaiwanPlus site with no account; the same episode is on TaiwanPlus's YouTube channel, which you can also watch without signing in. Its published chapter list says the hosts teach 你好 from 0:11 and show how to write 你好 from 4:22. At 4:22, write 你好 along with them and compare their stroke order with Lesson 3's. The series uses traditional characters, as Taiwan does.

Speaking: two introductions

Alone: record two introductions. The first is to a teacher: 老师,您好!我叫... 请问,您贵姓? The second is to a classmate: 你好!我叫... 你叫什么名字? Then record yourself saying thank you, sorry and goodbye, each with its usual reply. Listen back for your tones in 谢谢 (the second syllable light), 没关系 (light at the end) and 不客气 (bú, rising).

With a partner: act out the first-morning dialogue, then change it. One of you is a new teacher with a surname from the most-common list; the other asks the surname with 您贵姓 and must answer questions with 我姓 or 我叫. Finally, take turns naming a person (a teacher called Wang, a man called Li, a woman called Zhang, a classmate) while the other gives the correct title in Chinese order: 王老师, 李先生, 张女士, 同学.

Character writing: eighteen characters

Write each character five times, saying it aloud. Group them to make it easier: names (叫 姓 名 字), the question 什么, people (老 师 先 生 您), greetings (再 见 谢 请 问) and surnames (王 李). Stroke counts: 叫 5, 姓 8, 名 6, 字 6, 什 4, 么 3, 老 6, 师 6, 先 6, 生 5, 再 6, 见 4, 谢 12, 您 11, 王 4, 李 7, 请 10, 问 6. In 问, write the door 门 first, then the 口 inside it. In 您, write 你 on top, then the 心 underneath, which takes four strokes.

Check the stroke order animations on 汉典 (zdic.net) (shown here for 谢) and, for the traditional forms 麼, 師, 見, 謝, 請 and 問, on Taiwan's 國語小字典 (shown here for 請). Finally, write your own name in Chinese if you have one, surname first, or write 王小文 and 李老师 if you do not.

Common misconceptions

  • "Chinese names are written given name first, like English names." The surname comes first: in 王小文, Wang is the surname.
  • "I can use 贵 to talk about my own surname." 贵 is an honour you give the other person. Ask 您贵姓? and answer 我姓...
  • "Titles go in front of the name, as in English." They follow the surname: 李先生, 王老师.
  • "小姐 is the safe word for any young woman everywhere." In mainland China it acquired a slang meaning; 女士 is the safe title and 服务员 is how you call a server.
  • "Chen, Chan and Tan are different surnames." They can all be the same written surname, 陈 (陳), read in Mandarin, Cantonese and Hokkien.

Where this leaves us

You can now greet one person, a group or a teacher with 你好, 你们好, 您好 and 老师好, and leave with 再见 or 拜拜. You can thank people and answer thanks (谢谢, 不客气), apologise and accept an apology (对不起, 没关系), and open a question politely with 请问. You can ask names in two registers, 你叫什么名字 and 您贵姓, and answer with 我叫 and 我姓, never with 贵. Chinese names put the surname first, a handful of surnames cover a large share of people in both mainland China and Taiwan, and titles such as 老师, 先生 and 女士 follow the surname. Every sentence you said today had a "to be called" or "to be surnamed" verb in it. Lesson 6 adds the most important verb of all, 是 (to be), and the question word 吗.

Sources

  1. The Paper. (2021, February 8). 公安部公布2020年百家姓排名:王李张刘陈依旧名列前五 [Ministry of Public Security publishes the 2020 surname ranking]. thepaper.cn
  2. Department of Household Registration, Ministry of the Interior, Taiwan. (2023). 112年全國姓名統計分析 [National name statistics analysis, data as of 30 June 2023], section 3, ten most common surnames. ris.gov.tw
  3. Wiktionary contributors. (2026). 小姐; 貴姓; 阿姨; 叔叔; 老師; 名字; 拜拜 [Definitions and usage notes]. Wiktionary. en.wiktionary.org
  4. Wikipedia contributors. (2026). Chen (surname) [background on the romanizations Chen, Chan, Tan and Trần]. Wikipedia. en.wikipedia.org
  5. Xu, S. (c. 100 CE). 說文解字 [Shuowen Jiezi], chapter 12, entry 姓; chapter 2, entries 問 and 名. Wikisource transcription. zh.wikisource.org
  6. TaiwanPlus. (2021). Legit Mando, season 1, episode 1: Hello [Video and chapter list]. Public Television Service. taiwanplus.com
  7. Wikipedia contributors. (2026). TaiwanPlus [background on its launch in 2021 and management by the Public Television Service from June 2022]. Wikipedia. en.wikipedia.org
  8. 汉典 [Zdic]. (n.d.). Character entries for the lesson's characters [stroke counts, radicals and stroke-order animations]. zdic.net
  9. Unicode Consortium. (2026). Unihan database, entry U+60A8 您 [kDefinition: honorific for 'you']. unicode.org
Key terms
您 (nín)
The polite form of 'you' for one person, used to teachers, older adults and customers: 您好.
你叫什么名字?
What is your name? Answered with 我叫 plus your full or given name.
您贵姓?
May I ask your surname? (polite). Answered with 我姓 plus the surname; 贵 is never used about yourself.
surname first
Chinese names put the family name before the given name: in 王小文, 王 is the surname.
老师, 先生, 女士
Teacher, Mr. and Ms. These titles follow the surname: 李老师, 王先生, 张女士.
同学
Classmate or fellow student; also a way to address a student whose name you do not know.
谢谢 / 不客气
Thank you / you're welcome. 不谢 (bú xiè) is a shorter reply.
对不起 / 没关系
Sorry / it doesn't matter. 请问 (excuse me, may I ask) is used before a question, not as an apology.
再见 / 拜拜
Goodbye (literally 'again see') / bye-bye, a loan from English, said báibái on the mainland and bàibai in Taiwan.

是 and 吗: Who You Are and Where You Are From

  • Build sentences with 是 that link two nouns, negate them with 不是 and turn them into yes-no questions with 吗.
  • Answer yes-no questions without words for yes and no, add 也 and 都 in the right place, and turn a question back with 呢.
  • Say where you and others are from with country plus 人, ask 哪国人, and use 认识 and 很高兴认识你 when meeting people.

A treaty, a long name and a short one

On 3 July 1844, at the Kun Iam Temple in Macau, the American envoy Caleb Cushing and the Qing official Keying signed the first treaty between the United States and China, the Treaty of Wangxia. Its Chinese text needed a name for the United States and built one from sounds: 亞美理駕洲大合眾國, an attempt at "United States of America". Wiktionary records the short form 美國, today written 美国 (Měiguó) in simplified characters, in print by 1854. The 美 is there for its sound, the "me" of America.

美 also means beautiful, and that coincidence has persuaded generations of people that Chinese calls America "the beautiful country". Wiktionary calls this a false etymology. England got the same treatment: 英国 (Yīngguó), the United Kingdom, is contracted from 英吉利, a sound-based name for England, and 英 (flower, hero) was chosen for its sound, ying.

This lesson gives you the verb to use those names in a sentence. By the end you will say 我是美国人 (I am American) or whatever is true for you, ask other people where they are from, and answer their questions, one step at a time.

Step 1: A 是 B

The verb 是 (shì) links two nouns, the way "is" links "I" and "a student" in English. The AllSet Chinese Grammar Wiki gives the pattern as Noun 1 + 是 + Noun 2.

  • 我是学生。 Wǒ shì xuésheng. I am a student.
  • 她是老师。 Tā shì lǎoshī. She is a teacher.
  • 李老师是我的老师。 Lǐ lǎoshī shì wǒ de lǎoshī. Teacher Li is my teacher.

Two things English speakers have to unlearn. First, 是 never changes form. There is no "am", "is", "are" or "were": 我是, 你是, 他们是, today and yesterday alike. Second, there is no "a" or "the". 学生 is "student", "a student", "the student" or "students", and context decides.

Step 2: negate it with 不

Put 不 directly before 是: 不是 (bú shì), with 不 rising because 是 is a fourth tone, as Lesson 4 showed.

  • 我不是老师。 Wǒ bú shì lǎoshī. I am not a teacher.
  • 他不是英国人。 Tā bú shì Yīngguó rén. He is not British.

Nothing else moves. Learners sometimes try 是不 or put the 不 at the front of the sentence; neither works, because 不 always sits right before the word it negates.

Step 3: make a yes-no question with 吗

Any statement becomes a yes-or-no question when you add 吗 (ma) at the end, with no change of word order. The AllSet wiki puts it simply: any statement can be converted into a yes-no question with 吗.

  • 你是学生。 You are a student. → 你是学生吗? Are you a student?
  • 她是你的同学。 She is your classmate. → 她是你的同学吗? Is she your classmate?

English moves the verb to the front ("Are you...?"). Chinese leaves everything where it is and adds one light syllable. Your voice does not need to rise at the end either; 吗 does that work.

Step 4: answer without "yes" or "no"

Mandarin has no single all-purpose word for yes or no. You answer by repeating the verb of the question, positive or negative. For a question with 是, that means 是 or 不是, usually followed by the full sentence:

  • 你是学生吗? 是,我是学生。 Yes, I am a student.
  • 你是老师吗? 不是,我不是老师。 No, I'm not a teacher.

You can also answer with 对 (duì, correct) or 不对 (bú duì, not correct). The AllSet wiki notes that 对 confirms whatever the question said, so to the negative question 你不是老师吗? (aren't you a teacher?), 对 means "right, I'm not". Keep it simple for now: echo the verb.

In short: 是 links two nouns and never changes; 不是 negates it; 吗 at the end makes a yes-no question; and you answer by repeating the verb, 是 or 不是.

Step 5: add 也 and 都

Lesson 4 placed 也 (also) and 都 (all, both) before the verb. With 是 that gives:

  • 我也是学生。 Wǒ yě shì xuésheng. I am a student too.
  • 我们都是学生。 Wǒmen dōu shì xuésheng. We are all students.
  • 他们都不是老师。 Tāmen dōu bú shì lǎoshī. None of them is a teacher.

The AllSet wiki stresses that 也 can never end a sentence. To say "me too", keep 是 as a stand-in for everything the other person said: A says 我是美国人, and B says 我也是 (Wǒ yě shì), "I am too". 我也 on its own is incomplete.

Step 6: turn the question around with 呢

After answering, you usually want to ask the same thing back. Add 呢 (ne) to the person or thing you are asking about: 你呢? means "and you?". The AllSet wiki's example is the classic exchange 你好吗? 我很好。你呢?

  • 我是加拿大人,你呢? Wǒ shì Jiānádà rén, nǐ ne? I'm Canadian. And you?
  • 我是学生。你们呢? I'm a student. What about you two?

呢 has a second use you will hear: said about someone who is missing, as in 你妈妈呢?, it means "where's your mom?".

Step 7: countries, cities and 人

A country name plus 人 (person) gives the word for its people. Ask with 哪 (nǎ, which): 你是哪国人? (Nǐ shì nǎ guó rén?), "you are which-country person?".

CountryPinyinPerson from there
中国Zhōngguó (middle country)中国人
美国Měiguó美国人
英国Yīngguó英国人
加拿大Jiānádà加拿大人
墨西哥Mòxīgē墨西哥人
新加坡Xīnjiāpō新加坡人
马来西亚Mǎláixīyà马来西亚人
日本Rìběn (sun origin)日本人

The same pattern works for cities and regions, and people often answer that way: 北京人 (from Beijing), 台北人 (from Taipei), 纽约人 (Niǔyuē rén, a New Yorker). For ancestry rather than citizenship there is a separate word: 华人 (huárén), which Wiktionary defines as a person of Chinese descent or ethnicity. Maya, the Vancouver student from Lesson 5, can say 我是加拿大人 and also describe herself as 华人, and a Chinese Singaporean is 新加坡人 and 华人 at the same time. Lesson 25 returns to the word.

In short: country plus 人 names its people, 哪国人 asks for it, and 华人 describes Chinese ancestry wherever someone lives.

Step 8: meeting someone with 认识

认识 (rènshi) means to know a person, to be acquainted with them: 你认识他吗? (Do you know him?). Its most useful phrase is the one you say on meeting someone: 很高兴认识你 (Hěn gāoxìng rènshi nǐ), "very glad to know you", which Wiktionary glosses as "Pleased to meet you". 高兴 (gāoxìng) is glad or happy, and 朋友 (péngyou) is friend.

Three of this lesson's words show the pattern you met with 名字 in Lesson 5. Wiktionary gives 认识 as rènshi in mainland China and rènshì as the Taiwan standard, and 朋友 as péngyou on the mainland and péngyǒu in Taiwan. In each of these words, Taiwan's standard keeps a full tone on a second syllable that mainland speech makes light, a pattern you will meet again. Both are correct; follow the one you hear most.

When 是 is the wrong verb

Now change one input. Try the procedure on "I am tall": 我是高。 It fails. The AllSet wiki is direct about this: 是 is not used to link adjectives to nouns, and 他是高 is a common learner mistake. Adjectives such as 高 (tall), 忙 (busy) and 好 (good) take a different structure, usually with 很: 他很高 (He is tall). That is the whole of Lesson 7, but remember the rule now: 是 joins two nouns, not a noun and an adjective.

Characters to learn

CharacterTraditionalPinyinMeaningRadicalStrokes
国國 (11 strokes)guó (guo2)country囗8
美sameměi (mei3)beautiful; the 美 of 美国羊9
英same (9 strokes in Taiwan's count)yīng (ying1)flower, hero; the 英 of 英国艹8
学學 (16 strokes)xué (xue2)to study, learn子8
同sametóng (tong2)same, together口6
呢samene (ne5)and you?, what about...?口8
哪same (10 strokes in Taiwan's count)nǎ (na3)which口9
朋samepéng (peng2)friend (in 朋友)月8
友sameyǒu (you3); light you in 朋友 on the mainlandfriend又4
认認 (14 strokes)rèn (ren4)to recognise讠 (traditional 言)4
识識 (19 strokes)shí (shi2); light shi in 认识 on the mainlandto know讠 (traditional 言)7
高samegāo (gao1)tall, high高10
兴興 (16 strokes)xìng (xing4) in 高兴mood, interest八 (traditional 臼)6

Look at the word families. 学 gives 学生 (student, "study-person") and 同学 (classmate, "same-study"). 中 and 国 give 中国, and 高 and 中 give 高中 (gāozhōng), senior high school. 呢, 哪 and 吗 all carry the mouth radical 口, which often marks a sound-based word. And 认 and 识 both carry the speech radical 讠, which you met in 谢 and 请.

The traditional forms here show how much simplification can change. 識 has 19 strokes and 识 has 7; 學 has 16 and 学 has 8. Yet the left-hand radical of 认 and 识 is still recognisably the speech radical, simplified from 言 to 讠.

Dialogue: where are you from? (written for this course)

At lunch on her first day, Maya meets two more students in the programme.

SpeakerChinesePinyinEnglish
Maya你好!我叫陈美雅。你是学生吗?Nǐ hǎo! Wǒ jiào Chén Měiyǎ. Nǐ shì xuésheng ma?Hi! I'm Chen Meiya. Are you a student?
Daniel是,我也是学生。我叫丹尼尔。Shì, wǒ yě shì xuésheng. Wǒ jiào Dānní'ěr.Yes, I'm a student too. I'm Daniel.
Maya很高兴认识你!你是哪国人?Hěn gāoxìng rènshi nǐ! Nǐ shì nǎ guó rén?Nice to meet you! Where are you from?
Daniel我是美国人。你呢?Wǒ shì Měiguó rén. Nǐ ne?I'm American. And you?
Maya我是加拿大人。她是你的朋友吗?Wǒ shì Jiānádà rén. Tā shì nǐ de péngyou ma?I'm Canadian. Is she your friend?
Daniel是。她是林老师的学生,她是新加坡人。Shì. Tā shì Lín lǎoshī de xuésheng, tā shì Xīnjiāpō rén.Yes. She's Teacher Lin's student; she's from Singapore.
Maya我们都是学生!Wǒmen dōu shì xuésheng!We're all students!

丹尼尔 (Dānní'ěr) is a sound-based Chinese version of Daniel, built the same way as 美国; notice the apostrophe from Lesson 3 before ěr. Count the steps of this lesson in the dialogue: A 是 B, a 吗 question, an answer that repeats 是, 也, 呢 and 都.

Listening: nationalities and introductions

  1. Play Wiktionary's recordings of 中國, 美國 and 美國人. In 美國, does 美 dip and climb back, or stay low? Answer: it stays low, a half third tone, because guó follows. In 美國人 listen for the three syllables low, rising, rising.
  2. Play 學生, 認識, 朋友 and 高興. Which three end in a light second syllable? Answer: xuésheng, rènshi and péngyou; gāoxìng keeps a full fourth tone.
  3. Play the single words 國, 哪 and 呢, then say 你是哪国人? and 你呢? aloud, keeping 呢 light.
  4. Pitch Perfect Pinyin's Unit 11 includes Zhōngguó (China) in its 1+2 row, Déguó (Germany) in its 2+2 row and Ménggǔ (Mongolia) in its 2+3 row. Play each, and note that only Zhōngguó starts high.

Speaking: an interview

Alone: record answers to these questions, in full sentences: 你叫什么名字? 你是学生吗? 你是老师吗? 你是哪国人? Then record yourself introducing two other people, real or imaginary: 他是我的朋友,他叫...,他是...人。

With a partner: interview each other with the four questions, then report to a third person or to your recorder: 她叫...,她是...人。她也是学生。 Finally, play "Is it true?": one of you makes a statement about a famous person (她是英国人); the other answers 是 or 不是 and corrects it with a full sentence.

Character writing: thirteen characters

Write each character five times, saying it aloud. Stroke counts: 国 8, 美 9, 英 8, 学 8, 同 6, 呢 8, 哪 9, 朋 8, 友 4, 认 4, 识 7, 高 10, 兴 6. In 国, write the frame's left side and its top and right side first, then 玉 inside, and close the frame with the bottom stroke last. In 英, the grass radical 艹 is three strokes in the mainland standard; Taiwan's standard writes it in four, which is why Taiwan counts 英 as nine strokes. 朋 is two copies of 月 side by side, the left one narrower.

Watch the animations on 汉典 (zdic.net) (shown for 识), and for the traditional forms 國, 學, 認, 識 and 興 on Taiwan's 國語小字典 (shown for 識). Then write five sentences about yourself and people you know with 是, 也, 都 and 不是.

Common misconceptions

  • "美国 means 'beautiful country'." 美 was chosen for its sound, the "me" of America. Wiktionary calls the beautiful-country story a false etymology.
  • "A question needs a change of word order, as in English." A yes-no question keeps the statement's order and adds 吗 at the end.
  • "是 means 'yes' and 不是 means 'no' in every answer." They work as yes and no only when the question's verb is 是. Otherwise you repeat that question's verb.
  • "也 can go at the end, like English too." 也 goes before the verb and never ends a sentence: 我也是, never 我是也.
  • "是 is the Chinese for 'to be', so 我是高 means I am tall." 是 links nouns. With adjectives Chinese uses another structure, usually with 很: 我很高.

Summing up

The verb 是 links two nouns and never changes form: 我是学生. 不是 negates it, with 不 rising before the fourth tone of 是. Add 吗 to any statement to make a yes-no question, and answer by repeating the verb, 是 or 不是. 也 and 都 go after the subject and before 是, and 也 never ends a sentence, so "me too" is 我也是. 呢 turns a question back on the other person. A place name plus 人 names its people, 哪国人 asks for it, and 华人 refers to Chinese ancestry anywhere. 美国 and 英国 are sound-based names, whatever their characters seem to say. Lesson 7 deals with the sentences 是 cannot make: describing people and things with adjectives.

Sources

  1. AllSet Learning. (n.d.). Connecting nouns with "shi"; Yes-no questions with "ma"; Questions with "ne"; The "also" adverb "ye"; The "all" adverb "dou"; Simple "noun + adjective" sentences. Chinese Grammar Wiki. resources.allsetlearning.com
  2. Wiktionary contributors. (2026). 美國; 英國; 華人; 認識; 朋友; 高興 [Etymologies, definitions and Mainland and Taiwan standard readings]. Wiktionary. en.wiktionary.org
  3. Wikipedia contributors. (2026). Treaty of Wangxia [background: signed 3 July 1844 at the Kun Iam Temple, Macau]. Wikipedia. en.wikipedia.org
  4. Teng, W.-H. (n.d.). Pitch Perfect Pinyin: Unit 11 [tone-pair review with recordings]. Liberal Arts Instructional Technology Services, University of Texas at Austin. laits.utexas.edu
  5. 汉典 [Zdic]. (n.d.). 英; 识 [Character entries: mainland stroke counts and stroke-order animations]. zdic.net
  6. Ministry of Education, Taiwan. (n.d.). 國語小字典 [Mandarin mini dictionary], entries 英, 國, 學, 識 [Taiwan stroke counts and stroke order]. dict.mini.moe.edu.tw
  7. Unicode Consortium. (2026). Unihan database [radicals and traditional variants for the lesson's characters]. unicode.org
Key terms
是 (shì)
The verb that links two nouns, 'to be': 我是学生. It never changes form and is not used before adjectives.
不是 (bú shì)
Is not, am not, are not: 我不是老师. 不 rises before the fourth tone of 是.
吗 questions
Add 吗 to the end of any statement to make a yes-no question, with no change of word order: 你是学生吗?
answering yes-no questions
Repeat the verb, positive or negative: 是 / 不是. 对 confirms whatever the question said.
也 and 都 with 是
Both go before 是: 我也是学生, 我们都是学生. 'Me too' is 我也是.
呢 (ne)
Turns a question back on someone: 我是美国人,你呢? (And you?). Said about a missing person, it asks where they are.
哪国人
Which-country person: 你是哪国人? asks someone's nationality. Answer with a country plus 人.
华人 (huárén)
A person of Chinese descent or ethnicity, wherever they live and whatever their citizenship.
认识 / 很高兴认识你
To know (a person) / Pleased to meet you. Mainland rènshi, Taiwan standard rènshì.

Why 很 Is Not 'Very': Describing People without 是

  • Describe people, things and the weather with adjectives, using 很 as the normal link and never 是.
  • Negate adjectives with 不 and 不太, ask about them with 吗, and use 太...了, 真, 非常 and 好 for stronger feelings.
  • Read and write 太, 真, 忙, 累, 可, 爱, 漂, 亮, 非, 常, 冷 and 热.

Two sentences with no verb "to be"

Episode 10 of Legit Mando, the Mandarin series from Taiwan's public broadcaster TaiwanPlus, teaches two sentences in its first minute, according to its published chapter list: 今天好熱 and 今天好冷, which its own English title renders as "It's so hot today!" and "It's so cold today!". 今天 (jīntiān) is today, 熱 (rè) is hot and 冷 (lěng) is cold. Look for the "is". There isn't one.

Now watch what an English speaker does with "Today is hot" after Lesson 6. Today is a noun, "is" is 是, hot is 热, so: 今天是热. Every word is right and the sentence is wrong. This lesson starts from that wrong sentence and a few of its relatives, works out exactly why each one fails, and ends with the handful of patterns that describe people, things and weather correctly.

Bug 1: putting 是 before an adjective

Lesson 6 ended with a warning: 是 links two nouns. The AllSet Chinese Grammar Wiki states that 是 is not used to link adjectives to nouns and lists 他是高 as a very common mistake. Wikipedia's survey of Chinese grammar explains why. Mandarin adjectives behave more like verbs than like English adjectives: 高 does not mean "tall" so much as "to be tall", so it needs no extra verb to make a sentence. Adding 是 gives the sentence two verbs where it needs one.

WrongRightMeaning
我是忙。我很忙。 Wǒ hěn máng.I'm busy.
今天是热。今天很热。 Jīntiān hěn rè.It's hot today.
她是漂亮。她很漂亮。 Tā hěn piàoliang.She's pretty.

The fix is always the same. Remove 是 and put 很 in its place.

Bug 2: reading 很 as "very"

The fixed sentences contain 很 (hěn), which a dictionary translates as "very". So 我很忙 must mean "I'm very busy"? Usually it does not. Wiktionary's usage note gives the reason: Mandarin speakers have a strong tendency to avoid one-syllable terms, so 很 is added before one-syllable adjectives "without any actual meaning or emphasis". The AllSet wiki agrees that 很 is often "just a way to link a noun to an adjective". In 我很忙, 很 is closer to a spoken hyphen than to an intensifier, and the right translation is just "I'm busy".

When you really mean "very", say so with a word that carries weight. The AllSet wiki recommends 非常 (fēicháng, extremely): 他非常高, he is very tall. You can also stress 很 heavily in speech, but on paper 非常 is clearer.

Why this matters: 很 is the normal link between a subject and an adjective, not a sign of strong feeling. Leave it out of a plain statement and the sentence sounds bare; translate it as "very" every time and you will overstate everything you read.

Bug 3: using both, as in 她是很高

Some learners hedge their bets and keep both words: 她是很高. It is still wrong, for the same reason as bug 1: 是 cannot introduce an adjective, even one with 很 in front of it. Delete 是: 她很高 (Tā hěn gāo, she's tall). A useful test: if you could put 很 in front of the word, it is behaving like an adjective, and 是 has no place.

Bug 4: saying "not very" with 不很

To say "not busy", put 不 directly before the adjective, with no 很: 我不忙 (Wǒ bù máng). 不 negates the word right after it, as Wikipedia's grammar survey describes for verbs, and adjectives behave like verbs. To soften it to "not very", use 不太 (bú tài): 我不太忙, I'm not very busy. Wiktionary notes that 太 means "very" mostly in negative sentences, which is exactly this use. Notice the tone of 不 before 太: bú, because 太 is a fourth tone.

StatementQuestionNegativeSofter negative
我很忙。你忙吗?我不忙。我不太忙。
今天很冷。今天冷吗?今天不冷。今天不太冷。
她很高。她高吗?她不高。她不太高。

Look at the question column: in a 吗 question the bare adjective is normal, with no 很. Answer with 很 plus the adjective, or with 不 plus it: 你累吗? 很累。/ 不累。 (Are you tired? Very. / No.)

Bug 5: forgetting the 了 after 太

太 (tài) means "too" or "so", and Wiktionary notes that it is often used with 了 (le) at the end of the sentence for emphasis. 太热了! (Tài rè le!) is "It's way too hot!", and 太好了! (Tài hǎo le!) is the all-purpose "Great!". Without the 了, 太热 sounds clipped and unfinished. Remember 太...了 as a frame, an exclamation with the adjective inside. Lesson 21 explains what this 了 is doing; for now, treat it as part of the pattern.

The finished toolkit: five ways to describe

PatternExampleMeaning and feel
很 + adjective他很忙。He's busy. The neutral, everyday statement.
非常 + adjective他非常忙。He's extremely busy. Real emphasis.
真 + adjective你真好!You're really kind! Exclamations about something you can see.
好 + adjective今天好热!It's so hot today! Common in casual speech, as in Legit Mando.
太 + adjective + 了太冷了!It's too cold! / So cold! Strong feeling, often a complaint or delight.

真 (zhēn) means true or real, and Wiktionary also gives "really; truly; very" for it. 好 in 好热 is the same character as the 好 of 你好; here it works like English "so".

Words for people, things and weather

AdjectivePinyinMeaning
高 / 矮gāo / ǎitall / short (of people)
漂亮piàoliang (Taiwan standard piàoliàng)pretty, beautiful; also of things and places
帅shuàihandsome; cool-looking
可爱kě'àicute, lovable
忙 / 累máng / lèibusy / tired
好 / 不好hǎo / bù hǎogood, well / bad, not well
热 / 冷rè / lěnghot / cold (weather, food, drink)
有意思yǒuyìsiinteresting, fun; literally "has meaning"

漂亮 is another word, like 认识 and 朋友 in Lesson 6, where Wiktionary gives a light second syllable on the mainland, piàoliang, and a full tone in Taiwan's standard, piàoliàng. 有意思 behaves like an adjective even though it is built from the verb 有 (to have) and 意思 (meaning): 中文很有意思, Chinese is very interesting.

Characters to learn

CharacterTraditionalPinyinMeaningRadicalStrokes
太sametài (tai4)too, so; very (in negatives)大4
真samezhēn (zhen1)real, true; really目10
忙samemáng (mang2)busy忄 (心)6
累samelèi (lei4)tired糸11
可samekě (ke3)can; the 可 of 可爱口5
爱愛 (13 strokes)ài (ai4)love; to love爫 (爪)10
漂samepiào (piao4)first half of 漂亮氵 (水)14
亮sameliàng (liang4); light liang in 漂亮 on the mainlandbright亠9
非samefēi (fei1)not, non-非8
常samecháng (chang2)often; ordinary巾11
冷samelěng (leng3)cold冫7
热熱 (15 strokes)rè (re4)hot灬 (火)10

Several of these carry their meaning on their sleeve. 冷 has 冫, the two-stroke ice radical. 热 has 灬, the four dots that are the fire radical when it sits at the bottom of a character. 忙 has 忄, the form 心 (heart) takes on the left. And the two forms of love differ in a way people like to point out: traditional 愛 has 心 (heart) in its middle, while simplified 爱 replaces the lower half with 友 (friend). 非常 is literally "not ordinary", which is a good way to remember that it means extremely.

Dialogue: a hot afternoon (written for this course)

SpeakerChinesePinyinEnglish
王小文今天真热!Jīntiān zhēn rè!It's really hot today!
Maya对,太热了!你忙吗?Duì, tài rè le! Nǐ máng ma?Yes, way too hot! Are you busy?
王小文不太忙。可是我很累。你呢?Bú tài máng. Kěshì wǒ hěn lèi. Nǐ ne?Not very. But I'm tired. You?
Maya我不累。中文课很有意思!Wǒ bú lèi. Zhōngwén kè hěn yǒuyìsi!I'm not tired. Chinese class is really interesting!
王小文李老师非常好。他是我的好朋友的爸爸!Lǐ lǎoshī fēicháng hǎo. Tā shì wǒ de hǎo péngyou de bàba!Teacher Li is great. He's my good friend's dad!
Maya真的吗?太好了!Zhēn de ma? Tài hǎo le!Really? That's great!

Find every adjective in the dialogue and say which pattern it uses. Notice the one 是 that remains: 他是我的好朋友的爸爸, which links two nouns, "he" and "my good friend's dad". 可是 (kěshì) means "but", 课 (kè) is a class, which you will learn to write in Lesson 17, and 真的吗 is "really?".

Listening: adjectives and exclamations

  1. Watch episode 10 of Legit Mando, free on the TaiwanPlus site with no account, or on TaiwanPlus's YouTube channel. Its chapter list puts 今天好熱 and 今天好冷 at 0:11 and the hosts writing both sentences at 5:30. At 0:11, repeat each sentence after the hosts, copying their pitch on 好: in 好熱 it stays low, a half third tone, before the fourth tone of 熱. At 5:30, write the sentences with them; they use the traditional 熱, and you can compare it with 热.
  2. Play Wiktionary's recordings of 忙, 冷, 熱, 高, 矮 and 帥, and write the tone number of each before you check. Answers: 2, 3, 4, 1, 3, 4. On the 冷 page, play the first Mandarin recording, lěng.
  3. Play 漂亮, 可愛, 非常 and 有意思. Which one has a light final syllable? Answer: 漂亮, piàoliang, and the si of yǒuyìsi.
  4. Play 太, 真, 很 and 愛, then say 太热了, 真冷, 很忙 and 我爱中文 aloud with the right tones.

Speaking: describe three people

Alone: choose three people you know or have seen, such as a friend, a teacher and a famous person. For each, record three sentences: one with 很, one with 不 or 不太, and one exclamation with 真, 好 or 太...了. Example: 她很高。她不太忙。她真漂亮! Then describe today's weather the same way.

With a partner: take turns asking adjective questions with 吗 (你累吗? 中文难吗? 今天冷吗?) and answering with 很, 不 or 不太. Then play "Fix it": one of you says a sentence with a deliberate bug from this lesson (我是忙), and the other corrects it out loud (我很忙).

Character writing: twelve characters

Write each character five times, saying it aloud. Stroke counts: 太 4, 真 10, 忙 6, 累 11, 可 5, 爱 10, 漂 14, 亮 9, 非 8, 常 11, 冷 7, 热 10. In 太, the dot is written last, after 大. In 非, write the two vertical strokes in order from the left, each followed by its three short horizontals. In 热, the four dots of 灬 go from left to right along the bottom, after everything above them.

Use the animations on 汉典 (zdic.net) (shown for 爱), and for 愛 and 熱 use Taiwan's 國語小字典 (shown for 愛). Then write the five-pattern table from memory with one example of your own for each row.

Common misconceptions

  • "Every English 'is' becomes 是." 是 links nouns. With adjectives Mandarin needs no verb "to be": 我很忙, not 我是忙.
  • "很 always means very." In a plain statement 很 is usually just the link, added because Mandarin avoids a bare one-syllable adjective. For real emphasis use 非常 or stress the word.
  • "Not very busy is 不很忙." Use 不 alone for "not" (我不忙) and 不太 for "not very" (我不太忙).
  • "太 means very, so 太热 means very hot." 太 means too or so, and it usually comes in the frame 太...了: 太热了.
  • "In a question you also need 很." A 吗 question usually uses the bare adjective: 你忙吗?

What to remember

Mandarin adjectives work like verbs, so they never need 是. A plain description uses 很 as a link, usually without the meaning "very": 我很忙, 今天很热. For real emphasis use 非常; for exclamations use 真, 好 or the frame 太...了. Negate an adjective with 不 alone, soften it with 不太, and ask about it with the bare adjective plus 吗. With the twelve new characters you can talk about how people look and feel and what the weather is like. Module 3 now turns from speaking to the writing system itself, starting with the strokes and the rules for their order.

Sources

  1. AllSet Learning. (n.d.). Simple "noun + adjective" sentences; Connecting nouns with "shi". Chinese Grammar Wiki. resources.allsetlearning.com
  2. Wiktionary contributors. (2026). 很 [usage note]; 太; 真; 漂亮 [Definitions and Mainland and Taiwan standard readings]. Wiktionary. en.wiktionary.org
  3. Wikipedia contributors. (2026). Chinese grammar: Adjectives; Negation [background on adjectival predicates and the copula]. Wikipedia. en.wikipedia.org
  4. TaiwanPlus. (2021). "It's so hot/cold today!": Legit Mando, episode 10 [Video and published chapter list]. youtube.com
  5. TaiwanPlus. (n.d.). Legit Mando, episode 10: It's so hot today! Public Television Service. taiwanplus.com
  6. 汉典 [Zdic]. (n.d.). 爱; 热 [Character entries: mainland stroke counts, components and stroke-order animations]. zdic.net
  7. Unicode Consortium. (2026). Unihan database [radicals and traditional variants for the lesson's characters]. unicode.org
Key terms
adjectival predicate
An adjective used as the main part of a sentence. In Mandarin it works like a verb and needs no 是: 她很高.
很 (hěn)
The usual link before an adjective in a statement, often with no meaning of 'very': 我很忙, I'm busy.
非常 (fēicháng)
Extremely, very; literally 'not ordinary'. Use it when you really mean very: 他非常高.
不 / 不太
Not / not very, placed directly before the adjective: 我不忙, 我不太忙. 不 is bú before 太.
太...了
Too...! / So...! An exclamation frame: 太热了, 太好了.
真 and 好 as intensifiers
Really and so, in exclamations: 你真好! 今天好热!
有意思 (yǒuyìsi)
Interesting, fun; literally 'has meaning'. It works like an adjective: 中文很有意思.
吗 with adjectives
A yes-no question about an adjective uses the bare adjective: 你累吗? Answer 很累 or 不累.

Module 3: How Characters Work

Strokes and the rules for their order, radicals and sound components and the limits of both, and how simplified and traditional characters relate.

Strokes and Stroke Order

  • Name the basic strokes, read a numeric stroke code, and apply the main stroke-order rules to characters you have not seen before.
  • Explain where the mainland and Taiwan stroke-order standards differ, with examples.
  • Read and write 日, 月, 山, 水, 火, 木, 林, 田, 力, 男, 目, 心 and 手, and explain how several of them began as pictures.

A standard for 8,105 characters

On 1 March 2021 a new national standard took effect in mainland China. Its number is GF 0023-2020, its title is the Stroke Orders of the Commonly Used Standard Chinese Characters, and it comes from the Ministry of Education and the State Language Commission. It replaced a standard from 1997. For each character in China's 2013 table of standard characters, it gives the stroke order twice: stroke by stroke, and as a string of numbers. Taiwan has its own authority. The Ministry of Education's stroke-order website, 國字標準字體筆順學習網, animates the official order of every character in its standard and publishes seventeen basic rules for working it out.

Two governments maintain stroke-order standards for good reasons. Stroke order is part of how children are taught to write: Taiwan's curriculum asks pupils in grades 1 and 2 to learn the basic strokes and their order. Dictionaries count strokes by it. A character written in the right order also comes out balanced. In fast handwriting, strokes run into each other in ways that only make sense if the order is shared.

You learned the order of your first ten characters in Lesson 1 as a list. This lesson gives you the system behind it, so that you can work out the order of a new character yourself. You will write three characters step by step, then a fourth where the same rule gives a different answer.

Step 1: name the strokes

Every stroke belongs to one of a few types. Wikipedia's article on strokes lists the basic names, and you met most of them in Lesson 1.

StrokeNameDirectionCodeExample
一横 héng, horizontalleft to right1the top of 木
a short rising stroke提 tí, riselower left to upper right1the last stroke of 女 in 好
丨竖 shù, verticaltop to bottom2the middle of 木
丿撇 piě, left-fallingupper right to lower left3the first stroke of 手
丶点 diǎn, dotshort, downward to the right4the first stroke of 心
a long stroke widening at its end捺 nà, right-fallingupper left to lower right4the last stroke of 人
any stroke that turns a corner折 zhé, turn (often ending in a 钩 gōu, hook)changes direction without lifting the pen5the second stroke of 日

The code column uses the mainland system of five stroke categories. Code 1 is for horizontals and rises, 2 for verticals, 3 for left-falling strokes, 4 for dots and right-falling strokes, and 5 for every stroke that turns. Strung together, these digits make the stroke-number form of stroke order that the 2021 standard uses. The online dictionary 汉典 (zdic.net) prints the same kind of code under the heading 笔顺 for every character.

Step 2: read a stroke code

A code is a recipe. The code for 木 (mù, tree) is 1234: horizontal, vertical, left-falling, then the right-falling stroke, which the code counts with the dots. The code for 日 (rì, sun) is 2511: the left vertical, the top and right side in one turning stroke, the middle horizontal, and the bottom horizontal that closes the box. And 心 (xīn, heart) is 4544: a dot, a long curving stroke with a hook, then two dots.

A code tells you the type and order of the strokes, not their exact shape or position, so always check it against an animation or a printed model. What it gives you is a way to check yourself without a teacher. If you wrote 日 as 2151, with the middle line before the frame was finished, the code shows you exactly where you went wrong.

Step 3: two characters side by side, 木 and 林

林 (lín, woods, grove) is two trees. Its code, 12341234, is simply 木 twice, and it shows the first and most basic rule: left before right. Taiwan's rule list puts this first, with 川, 仁, 街 and 湖 as its examples. Write the whole left-hand 木 before you start the right-hand one.

The shapes change, though, even when the code does not. The left 木 is squeezed narrower, and its last stroke shrinks from a long right-falling stroke to a short dot, so that it does not run into its neighbour. The right 木 keeps its full spread. This is why copying characters from a printed model matters even when you know the order: parts change shape according to where they sit.

Step 4: an enclosed character, 日 and then 田

A box gets three moves. First write the frame's left side, then its top and right side together. Then write whatever is inside, and finish with the bottom of the box, like closing a lid. Taiwan's rules call this writing the outside first and the inside next, with the bottom stroke that seals the opening written last; its examples are 日, 田, 回 and 國. The mainland codes agree. 日 is 2511, and 田 (tián, field) is 25121: frame left, frame top and right, the inner horizontal, the inner vertical, and the closing bottom stroke.

The same move works for 目 (mù, eye), 25111: frame left, frame top and right, two inner horizontals, closing bottom. And it explains 国 from Lesson 6, where the whole of 玉 goes inside the frame before the bottom stroke closes it.

Step 5: a middle that stands alone, 山 and 水

Some characters have a vertical stroke in the middle that does not cross anything. Taiwan's rule 6 says that such a vertical, on top or in the middle and not crossing other strokes, is written first, and it lists 上, 小, 山 and 水 as examples. The code for 山 (shān, mountain) is 252: the middle vertical first, then the left side with its turn along the bottom, then the short right vertical. The code for 水 (shuǐ, water) is 2534: the hooked middle vertical first, then the stroke on the left that turns, then the two strokes on the right. You met the same pattern in 小 in Lesson 1.

The changed input: 十 against 上

Now apply "horizontal before vertical", the rule you used for 十 in Lesson 1. 十 is 12: horizontal first, then the vertical that crosses it. Taiwan's rule 4 says horizontal goes first when a horizontal and a vertical cross, or meet with the horizontal on top. The character 上 (shàng, up), which you will write in Lesson 9, also has one vertical and some horizontals, so you might expect the horizontal first. But in 上 the vertical does not cross the long bottom stroke; it stands on it. That makes rule 6 apply instead, and 上 begins with the vertical: vertical, short horizontal, long horizontal. Two characters made of the same kinds of strokes, two different orders, because the strokes meet differently.

Bottom line: stroke order is not a list to memorise character by character. It follows from how the strokes meet, so check whether they cross, enclose, or stand apart before you choose a rule.

The rules, collected

Taiwan's Ministry of Education publishes seventeen rules; the most useful nine cover almost everything you will write this year, and the mainland standard follows the same principles.

  1. Left before right: 林, 你, 好.
  2. Top before bottom: 三, 字, 星.
  3. Outside before inside, when a frame is open on one or two sides: 月, 问, 句.
  4. Horizontal before vertical, when they cross or the horizontal is on top: 十, 木.
  5. Left-falling before right-falling, when they cross or meet: 人, 大, 文.
  6. A vertical that stands apart in the middle or on top comes first: 山, 水, 小, 上.
  7. The bottom horizontal of a stack that a vertical touches often comes last: 王, 里.
  8. A closed box: frame, inside, then the bottom stroke: 日, 田, 目, 国.
  9. A dot on top or upper left comes first; a dot at the bottom, inside or upper right comes last: 文 begins with its dot; 我 ends near its dot.

Where the mainland and Taiwan standards differ

For the great majority of characters the two standards agree. A few differences are worth knowing, because they change stroke counts in dictionaries.

  • The grass radical 艹. The mainland standard writes it in three strokes, and Taiwan's writes it in four. That is why 汉典 counts 英 as eight strokes and Taiwan's 國語小字典 as nine.
  • The ear radical 阝. It is two strokes on the mainland and three in Taiwan, so 都 has 10 strokes in one count and 11 in the other, and 哪 has 9 and 10.
  • The dot of 戈. In characters built on 戈, such as 我, the mainland code puts the dot last (我 is 3121534, ending in 4). Taiwan's rule 11 for characters with 戈 writes the horizontal first and finishes with the dot and then the left-falling stroke, so the dot comes second to last.

Neither standard is more correct; each is correct where it is taught. Follow one consistently, and use the matching dictionary: 汉典 for mainland forms, 國語小字典 for Taiwan's.

Pictures that became characters

Most of this lesson's characters began as drawings, which is part of why they are good for practising strokes. Wiktionary's entry for 日 describes it as a picture of the sun, with a dot or line added in the centre to tell it apart from 口. The Shuowen Jiezi of about 100 CE describes 木 as a sprout with its roots drawn underneath, 田 as the four sides of a field with the cross of paths between the plots, and 力 as a person's sinews. The characters 月 (moon), 山 (mountain), 水 (water), 火 (fire), 目 (eye), 心 (heart) and 手 (hand) have similar origins. Their Wiktionary entries show their ancient forms, which look far more like pictures than the modern ones.

Two characters show the next step: combining pictures. The character 林 is two trees, which the Shuowen defines as a stand of trees on level ground. The character 男 (nán, man) is 田 above 力, and the Shuowen explains it as a man using his strength in the fields. Be careful not to over-learn this. Pictographs like these are a small minority of characters, and their modern forms are so stylised that you could not guess most of them. Lesson 9 shows how the great majority of characters really work.

Characters to learn

CharacterTraditionalPinyinMeaningRadicalStrokesCode
日samerì (ri4)sun; day日42511
月sameyuè (yue4)moon; month月43511
山sameshān (shan1)mountain山3252
水sameshuǐ (shui3)water水42534
火samehuǒ (huo3)fire火44334
木samemù (mu4)tree, wood木41234
林samelín (lin2)woods; the surname Lin木812341234
田sametián (tian2)field田525121
力samelì (li4)strength力253
男samenán (nan2)male, man田72512153
目samemù (mu4)eye目525111
心samexīn (xin1)heart, mind心44544
手sameshǒu (shou3)hand手43112

All thirteen are the same in both scripts, and the codes are the mainland ones shown by 汉典. The characters 木 and 目 sound the same, mù, and differ only in writing, which is one reason Chinese needs characters at all. You already know two of them as parts: 日 in 是, and 心 in 您. Several of them also become radicals with new shapes on the left of a character, as Lesson 9 shows: 水 becomes 氵, 手 becomes 扌, 心 becomes 忄, and 火 becomes 灬 at the bottom.

Practice paper: the 田字格

A common kind of practice paper for characters is ruled into squares, each split into four by a dashed cross. Wiktionary defines its name, 田字格 (tiánzìgé), as a grid shaped like the character 田. The cross shows you where the centre of each square is. Use it to balance each character: the two trees of 林 meet at the vertical line, and the horizontal line runs through the middle of 日. Rule your own: draw squares about two centimetres wide, then a light dashed cross in each one.

Listening: thirteen characters, four tones

Play each character's Mandarin recording on Wiktionary and write its tone number before you check: 日, 月, 山, 水, 火, 林, 力, 男, 目, 心 and 手. Answers: 4, 4, 1, 3, 3, 2, 4, 2, 4, 1, 3. The 林 entry plays volunteer recordings from the Lingua Libre project; listen to both speakers. Then use the table below: which character on it sounds exactly like 目? Answer: 木, which is also mù.

For a writing demonstration, watch episode 2 of TaiwanPlus's Legit Mando on its TaiwanPlus page or YouTube channel. Its chapter list says the hosts show how to write 你, 我 and 他 from 4:45. Watch the end of 我 and compare the order of its last two strokes with the mainland order in this lesson.

Speaking: name the strokes as you write

Alone: write each character slowly while saying the stroke names aloud in Chinese: for 木, héng, shù, piě, nà. Then record yourself reading all thirteen characters with their tones. Finish with three words built from them: 山水 (shānshuǐ, landscape, literally mountains and water), 火山 (huǒshān, volcano, fire mountain) and 手心 (shǒuxīn, palm of the hand).

With a partner: one of you reads a stroke code aloud, such as 2511 or 252, and the other writes the character it describes; then swap. Codes for characters you have not learned yet make a good challenge: 4111251 is 言 (yán, speech), the full form of the speech radical 讠.

Character writing: thirteen characters

Write each character six times on your squared paper, following the code in the table and saying the character aloud. Check each one against the animations on 汉典 (zdic.net) (shown for 木) or on Taiwan's 國語小字典 (shown for 男); if the two ever disagree, follow the one for the script you are writing. Then test the rules on characters you have not learned. Work out the order of 回 (huí, to return) and 古 (gǔ, ancient) from the rules alone, write them, and check them on 汉典. Answers: 回 is 252511, the outer frame's first two strokes, the whole inner box, then the outer bottom stroke; 古 is 12251, the cross of 十 first, then 口.

Common misconceptions

  • "If the character looks right, the order does not matter." Order affects balance, fast handwriting and dictionary stroke counts, and both the mainland's national standard and Taiwan's curriculum set it out for learners.
  • "A box is four strokes, one per side." The top and right side are one turning stroke, so 口 has three strokes and 日 four.
  • "Horizontal always comes before vertical." Only when they cross or the horizontal is on top. In 上 and 山 the vertical comes first.
  • "Every Chinese-speaking place uses the same stroke order." The mainland and Taiwan standards differ in a few components, such as 艹 and 阝, which changes stroke counts.
  • "Characters are drawings of things." A small number began as pictures, like 日 and 山, but even these are now stylised, and most characters are built differently, as Lesson 9 explains.

Recap

Strokes come in a few types, horizontal, rise, vertical, left-falling, dot, right-falling and turning strokes with or without hooks, and the mainland system codes them 1 to 5. A stroke code such as 2511 for 日 is a recipe you can check yourself against. Most order follows a few rules. Write left before right, top before bottom and outside before inside, and close a box last. Write horizontal before vertical when they cross, left-falling before right-falling, and a standalone middle vertical first. The mainland standard of 2021 and Taiwan's Ministry of Education rules agree on most characters but differ on some components, such as 艹 and 阝, and on the dot of 戈. Your thirteen new characters include pictographs such as 日 and 山 and two combinations, 林 and 男. Lesson 9 moves to the parts of characters: radicals that hint at meaning and components that hint at sound.

Sources

  1. Ministry of Education, Taiwan. (n.d.). 筆順基本法則說明 [Explanation of the basic rules of stroke order]. 國字標準字體筆順學習網. stroke-order.learningweb.moe.edu.tw
  2. National Academy for Educational Research. (2018). 十二年國民基本教育課程綱要: 語文領域-國語文 [Curriculum guidelines: Mandarin; learning performance 4-I-5, basic strokes and stroke order]. naer.edu.tw
  3. Sinoss. (2021, March 2). 《通用规范汉字笔顺规范》等两项国家语委语言文字规范正式实施 [Two national language standards, including the stroke-order standard GF 0023-2020, take effect]. sinoss.net
  4. 汉典 [Zdic]. (n.d.). Character entries 日, 月, 山, 水, 火, 木, 林, 田, 力, 男, 目, 心, 手, 我, 英, 都 [mainland stroke counts and 笔顺 codes]. zdic.net
  5. Ministry of Education, Taiwan. (n.d.). 國語小字典 [Mandarin mini dictionary], entries 英, 都, 哪 [Taiwan stroke counts]. dict.mini.moe.edu.tw
  6. Xu, S. (c. 100 CE). 說文解字 [Shuowen Jiezi], chapters 6 and 13, entries 木, 林, 田, 力 and 男. Wikisource transcription. zh.wikisource.org
  7. Wikipedia contributors. (2026). Stroke order [background on national standards and their differences]; Stroke (CJK character) [stroke names and categories]. Wikipedia. en.wikipedia.org
  8. Wiktionary contributors. (2026). 日 [Glyph origin]; 田字格; 林 and other entries with Mandarin audio. Wiktionary. en.wiktionary.org
  9. TaiwanPlus. (2021). "You, I, He and She": Legit Mando, episode 2 [Video and published chapter list]. youtube.com
Key terms
stroke order (笔顺 bǐshùn)
The fixed order in which a character's strokes are written, set by national standards: GF 0023-2020 on the mainland and the Ministry of Education's rules in Taiwan.
stroke code
A string of digits giving each stroke's category in order: 1 horizontal or rise, 2 vertical, 3 left-falling, 4 dot or right-falling, 5 turning. 日 is 2511.
横, 竖, 撇, 点, 捺, 提, 折, 钩
Horizontal, vertical, left-falling, dot, right-falling, rise, turn and hook: the names of the basic strokes.
left before right, top before bottom
The two most general stroke-order rules: 林 is written left 木 then right 木; 字 is written 宀 then 子.
close the box last
In an enclosed character, write the frame's left side, then its top and right side, then the inside, and the bottom stroke last: 日, 田, 国.
pictograph
A character that began as a drawing, such as 日 (sun) or 山 (mountain). They are a small minority and are now heavily stylised.
田字格 (tiánzìgé)
Practice paper ruled in squares, each divided by a dashed cross like the character 田, used to balance handwritten characters.
艹 and 阝 differences
The grass radical is 3 strokes on the mainland and 4 in Taiwan; 阝 is 2 and 3. So 英 is 8 or 9 strokes, 都 10 or 11.

Radicals and Sound Components: What a Character's Parts Can Tell You

  • Explain the six categories of character formation in the Shuowen Jiezi, and recognise indicatives, pictographs, meaning compounds and sound-meaning compounds.
  • Use common radicals and their position forms to guess a character's area of meaning and to look it up in a dictionary.
  • Weigh the evidence on how far a sound component predicts pronunciation, and read and write 上, 下, 青, 清, 晴, 河, 海, 休, 话, 说, 读 and 听.

Nine thousand characters, six kinds

Around 100 CE a scholar named Xu Shen finished a dictionary that still frames how characters are taught. The Shuowen Jiezi, "explaining simple and analysing compound characters", filed 9,353 characters under 540 headings, and its postface sorted the ways characters are made into six kinds, each with two examples. Two of those examples are characters you have already written: 日 and 月. Two more are in this lesson: 上 and 下. And one pair, 江 and 河, two words for river, is the centre of a disagreement this lesson asks you to judge.

The question is practical. Most characters are built from parts, and one part often hints at the sound. If that hint were reliable, you could read aloud a character you had never seen, the way you sound out an unfamiliar English word. Some teachers stress how much logic the parts contain; others warn that the hints mislead as often as they help. You will see the evidence for each view, then test it on twenty characters you know.

The six kinds, in Xu Shen's words

Here are the six categories from the Shuowen's postface, with his own examples and a short translation of his definitions. The text is nearly two thousand years old and free to quote.

CategoryXu Shen's definition (translated)His examplesExamples you know
指事 zhǐshì, indicativesseen, it can be recognised; examined, its meaning appears上, 下上 (up), 下 (down), 一, 二, 三
象形 xiàngxíng, pictographsdrawn as the thing itself, following its form日, 月山, 水, 木, 目, 人
形声 xíngshēng, sound-meaning compoundsa category for the meaning, with a comparison that completes it江, 河妈, 吗, 请, 清, 河
会意 huìyì, meaning compoundscategories joined so that their meanings point the way武, 信好, 林, 男, 休
转注 zhuǎnzhù, derived cognatesone category head, related meanings that receive each other考, 老scholars still disagree about what this means
假借 jiǎjiè, loansno character for the word, so one is borrowed for its sound令, 长none yet; sound-based names such as 美国 work on a similar principle

The Chinese of his definitions is compressed and has been argued over for centuries, and Wikipedia's article on character classification notes that his categories are neither rigorously defined nor mutually exclusive. The first four are ways of building a shape; the last two are ways of reusing one. For a learner, the four building methods are what matter.

Your new characters cover three of them. 上 (shàng, up) and 下 (xià, down) are indicatives, a line marked above or below a base. 休 (xiū, to rest) is a meaning compound, and the Shuowen explains it as a person 亻 leaning on a tree 木. The rest of this lesson's characters are sound-meaning compounds.

Radicals: the filing system

Xu Shen's 540 headings were the first radicals, 部首 (bùshǒu, section heads): a shared part used to file characters in a dictionary. Later dictionaries cut the number. Wikipedia's article on radicals notes that the Zihui of 1615 reduced them to 214, which became known as the Kangxi radicals after the famous Kangxi Dictionary of 1716. Unicode encodes all 214 as a block of their own. Mainland China's 2009 standard table uses 201 principal radicals, while Taiwan's dictionaries keep the Kangxi system, so a character can sit under different headings. Taiwan's 國語小字典 files 都 under 邑, the full form of the ear radical, while the mainland dictionary 汉典 files it under 阝.

Usually the radical is the part that hints at meaning. Many radicals change shape depending on where they sit, so learn the position forms alongside the full ones.

RadicalFull form and meaningCharacters you know with it
亻人, person你, 他, 们, 什, 休
氵水, water清, 河, 海, 漂
讠言, speech (simplified form)谢, 请, 认, 识, 话, 说, 读
口mouth吗, 呢, 哪, 叫, 名, 问, 听
女woman妈, 她, 好, 姓
忄 and 心heart, feelings忙, 您, 情 (feeling)
日sun, time晴, 是, 明 (bright)
木tree, wood林, 李
灬火, fire热

Two cautions. A radical points to an area of meaning, not a definition: 情 (feeling) has the heart radical, but so does 忙 (busy). And the dictionary radical is not always the meaning part. Wikipedia notes that some radicals are just a convenient part of the shape, which is why 是 sits under 日.

Worth holding on to: the radical tells you roughly what a character is about and where to find it in a dictionary. It does not tell you what the character means.

The case for the sound component

The richest category is the sound-meaning compound: one part for meaning, one for sound. Xu Shen's example, 江 (jiāng, river), is 氵 for water plus 工 (gōng) for sound. Estimates of how common these compounds are vary with what you count. Wikipedia's article on radicals puts them at over 80 percent of characters, and its article on classification cites a count of 58 percent among frequently used characters. Either way, they are the commonest kind.

Some families work beautifully. Here is the 青 (qīng, blue-green) family, with the meaning part of each.

CharacterMeaning partPinyinMeaning
请讠 speechqǐngplease, invite
清氵 waterqīngclear
晴日 sunqíngsunny
情忄 heartqíngfeeling
睛目 eyejīngeyeball, as in 眼睛 yǎnjing, eye

Each one combines a meaning part with 青, and each is read ing with a q or j sound. You can see the system working: clear water, a sunny day, a feeling in the heart, a request in speech. A 2003 study in Child Development by Shu Hua, Chen Xi, Richard Anderson and colleagues analysed the 2,570 characters taught in Chinese elementary schools and concluded that written Chinese "has a logic that children can understand and use". It also found that the characters met in later grades are more often phonetically regular and semantically transparent.

The case against relying on it

Now look at Xu Shen's own example again. 江 is jiāng, and its sound part 工 is gōng. The two shared a sound when the character was formed, but two thousand years of sound change have pulled them apart. Many families have drifted the same way. The mainland dictionary 汉典 analyses 海 (hǎi, sea) as 氵 plus a sound part 每, which today is měi; 他 (tā) as 亻 plus 也, which is yě; and 都 (dōu) as 阝 plus 者, which is zhě. Wikipedia's article on classification gives a family where the hint has collapsed completely: 逾 yú, 输 shū and 偷 tōu all share the sound part 俞.

The same 2003 study has a sharper finding. Characters taught in grades 1 and 2, and high-frequency characters in general, are less likely to be phonetically regular than the rarer characters taught later. The characters a beginner learns first are exactly the ones whose sound hints are least reliable. Simplification adds another layer: 读 (dú, to read) has 卖 (mài, to sell) as its sound part in 汉典's analysis, because its traditional form 讀 used 賣.

What settles it: test twenty characters you know

By the end of this lesson you will know at least twenty characters that 汉典 classifies as sound-meaning compounds. Here is how well the sound part predicts each one.

How well the hint worksCharacters (sound part in brackets)Count
Exact, tone included清 qīng (青 qīng)1
Same syllable, different tone妈 mā, 吗 ma (马 mǎ); 们 men (门 mén); 请 qǐng, 晴 qíng, 情 qíng (青 qīng)6
Part of the syllable matches问 wèn (门 mén); 睛 jīng (青); 姓 xìng (生 shēng); 河 hé (可 kě); 忙 máng (亡 wáng)5
No useful hint today江 (工), 海 (每), 他 (也), 都 (者), 话 (舌 shé), 说 (兑 duì), 读 (卖 mài), 听 (斤 jīn)8

The result supports both sides, which is what the evidence predicts. The sound part helped with twelve of the twenty, but it gave the full pronunciation, tone included, only once, and for eight it was no help at all. The study's finding shows up too: the failures include everyday words such as 他, 都, 说 and 听.

Worth holding on to: treat a sound component as a clue to a family of similar syllables, and a reason to remember a character, never as a way to pronounce it. Check every new character's pronunciation in a dictionary or recording.

Characters to learn

CharacterTraditionalPinyinMeaningRadicalStrokes
上sameshàng (shang4)up, above, on; to go up一3
下samexià (xia4)down, below; to go down一3
青sameqīng (qing1)blue-green青8
清sameqīng (qing1)clear, clean氵 (水)11
晴sameqíng (qing2)sunny, clear (weather)日12
河samehé (he2)river氵 (水)8
海samehǎi (hai3)sea氵 (水)10
休samexiū (xiu1)to rest亻 (人)6
话話 (13 strokes)huà (hua4)speech, words讠 (traditional 言)8
说說 (14 strokes)shuō (shuo1)to speak, say讠 (traditional 言)9
读讀 (22 strokes)dú (du2)to read; to study讠 (traditional 言)10
听聽 (22 strokes)tīng (ting1)to listen, hear口 (traditional 耳)7

These give you useful words straight away: 上海 (Shànghǎi, Shanghai, literally "on the sea"), 晴天 (qíngtiān, a sunny day), 说话 (shuōhuà, to talk), 休息 (xiūxi, to rest), and 说中文, 听中文 and 读中文 (to speak, listen to and read Chinese). The traditional forms here are among the heaviest you will meet: 讀 and 聽 have 22 strokes each, against 10 and 7 in their simplified forms. Lesson 10 shows how simplification produced forms like 听, which replaced the ear radical 耳 of 聽 with 口.

A short text: four skills (written for this course)

ChinesePinyinEnglish
我在上海学中文。Wǒ zài Shànghǎi xué Zhōngwén.I'm studying Chinese in Shanghai.
我们听中文,说中文,读中文。Wǒmen tīng Zhōngwén, shuō Zhōngwén, dú Zhōngwén.We listen to Chinese, speak Chinese and read Chinese.
今天是晴天。上海的海很漂亮!Jīntiān shì qíngtiān. Shànghǎi de hǎi hěn piàoliang!Today is a sunny day. Shanghai's sea is beautiful!
老师说:"休息一下吧!"Lǎoshī shuō: "Xiūxi yíxià ba!"The teacher says, "Let's take a break!"

A few new words: 在 (zài, in, at), which Lesson 12 teaches as a character; 今天 (jīntiān, today); 休息一下 (xiūxi yíxià, rest a moment), with 一 rising before the fourth tone of 下; and 吧 (ba), a softening word for suggestions. Notice that 是 is fine in 今天是晴天, because 晴天 is a noun, a sunny day. Compare 今天很晴 from Lesson 7's pattern, where 晴 is an adjective.

Listening: one family, many tones

  1. The 青 family. Play Wiktionary's recordings of 清, 請, 晴 and 情. Write the tone of each. Answers: qīng 1, qǐng 3, qíng 2, qíng 2. The shared sound part gave you "qing"; only the recording gives you the tone.
  2. Rivers and seas. Play 江, 河 and 海. Do any of them sound like their sound parts 工 (gōng), 可 (kě) and 每 (měi)? Answer: only partly; 河 shares its vowel with 可, and the other two do not resemble theirs.
  3. Speech words. Play 話, 說 (the first recording, shuō), 讀 and 聽, and say each one after the speaker.
  4. Opposites. Play 上 and 下. Both are fourth tones. Say 上下 (shàngxià, up and down) five times quickly, starting each fall high.

Speaking: read a family aloud

Alone: record yourself reading the 青 family table, then the twenty-character test table, saying each character and then its sound part: 妈 mā, 马 mǎ; 们 men, 门 mén; and so on. Hearing the pairs side by side fixes the differences. Then read the four-skills text twice.

With a partner: one of you names a radical in English (water, speech, person, sun, heart); the other says and writes every character from this course that has it. Then swap and use the sound parts instead: 马, 门, 青. Score a point for each correct character with the right tone.

Character writing: twelve characters

Write each character five times, saying it aloud. Stroke counts: 上 3, 下 3, 青 8, 清 11, 晴 12, 河 8, 海 10, 休 6, 话 8, 说 9, 读 10, 听 7. Two order points from Lesson 8: 上 starts with its vertical, 211, while 下 starts with its horizontal, 124. The water radical 氵 is written top dot, middle dot, then the rising stroke from the bottom, 441, in 清, 河 and 海.

Check the animations on 汉典 (zdic.net) (shown for 读), and look at the traditional forms 話, 說, 讀 and 聽 on Taiwan's 國語小字典 (shown for 聽). Write 讀 and 聽 once each, slowly, and count the strokes as you go. Then write the four-skills text from memory.

Common misconceptions

  • "Most characters are pictures." Pictographs are a minority. Most characters are compounds, and the commonest kind joins a meaning part with a sound part.
  • "The sound component tells you how to pronounce a character." It gives a clue to a family of similar sounds at best, and often nothing at all today; the tone in particular is rarely predictable.
  • "The radical is the character's meaning." It points to an area of meaning, and sometimes it is only a filing convenience, as with 是 under 日.
  • "Every dictionary uses the same 214 radicals." Taiwan's dictionaries use the Kangxi system, while mainland China's standard has 201 principal radicals, so the same character can be filed differently.
  • "Simplified characters keep all the old sound hints." Some simplified forms changed the parts, as 读 and 听 show, sometimes losing the hint the traditional form had.

Pulling it together

Xu Shen's Shuowen Jiezi of about 100 CE described six ways of forming characters. Four build shapes: indicatives such as 上 and 下, pictographs such as 日 and 山, meaning compounds such as 休 and 林, and sound-meaning compounds such as 江 and 河, which are the most common kind. Radicals, from his 540 headings to the 214 Kangxi radicals and the mainland's 201, file characters by a shared part that usually hints at meaning and changes shape by position: 氵, 亻, 讠, 忄. The sound component divides opinion. The 青 family shows it working, and a 2003 study of school characters finds a learnable logic, but sound change has broken many hints, and the commonest characters are the least regular. In your own twenty-character test, the hint gave the full pronunciation once and was useless eight times. So use it as a memory aid, not a pronunciation guide. Lesson 10 turns to the other way the shapes changed: the simplification of the 1950s and 1960s.

Sources

  1. Xu, S. (c. 100 CE). 說文解字 [Shuowen Jiezi], postface (敘) on the six categories, and chapter 6, entry 休. Wikisource transcription. zh.wikisource.org
  2. Shu, H., Chen, X., Anderson, R. C., Wu, N., and Xuan, Y. (2003). Properties of school Chinese: Implications for learning to read. Child Development, 74(1), 27-47. doi.org
  3. 汉典 [Zdic]. (n.d.). 字形分析 [structure analyses] for 妈, 吗, 们, 问, 请, 清, 晴, 情, 睛, 姓, 河, 江, 海, 他, 都, 忙, 话, 说, 读, 听, 休 and 上. zdic.net
  4. Ministry of Education, Taiwan. (n.d.). 國語小字典 [Mandarin mini dictionary], entries 都 and 聽 [radical and stroke data]. dict.mini.moe.edu.tw
  5. Unicode Consortium. (2026). Kangxi Radicals: Range 2F00-2FDF [code chart of the 214 radicals]. The Unicode Standard, Version 18.0. unicode.org
  6. Wikipedia contributors. (2026). Radical (Chinese characters) [background on the 540, 214 and 201 radical systems and position forms]; Chinese character classification [background on the six categories and the 俞 family]. Wikipedia. en.wikipedia.org
  7. Wiktionary contributors. (2026). 清; 請; 晴; 情; 江; 河; 海; 話; 說; 讀; 聽; 上; 下 [Entries with Mandarin audio]. Wiktionary. en.wiktionary.org
Key terms
Shuowen Jiezi (说文解字)
Xu Shen's dictionary of about 100 CE: 9,353 characters under 540 headings, with six categories of character formation.
指事 (indicative)
A character that marks an idea on a simple base, such as 上 (up) and 下 (down).
会意 (meaning compound)
A character whose parts combine their meanings, such as 休 (a person by a tree: to rest) or 林 (two trees: woods).
形声 (sound-meaning compound)
A character with one part for meaning and one for sound, such as 清 (water + 青 qīng). The commonest kind of character.
radical (部首 bùshǒu)
The part a dictionary files a character under, usually its meaning part: 氵 in 河, 讠 in 说.
position forms
Shapes a radical takes in different positions: 水 becomes 氵, 人 becomes 亻, 心 becomes 忄, 言 becomes 讠 in simplified script.
Kangxi radicals
The 214 radicals of the Kangxi Dictionary of 1716, still used in Taiwan's dictionaries; the mainland's 2009 standard has 201.
sound component
The part of a compound that hints at its sound. It points to a family of similar syllables, rarely to the exact pronunciation or tone.

Simplified and Traditional: Two Ways to Write the Same Words

  • Describe how simplified characters were introduced and where simplified and traditional characters are standard today.
  • Recognise the main methods of simplification, including one simplified character standing for two or more traditional ones, and use them to read traditional forms.
  • Read and write 门, 东, 西, 车, 书, 开, 关, 长, 后, 发 and 电, and recognise their traditional forms.

Two official lists

On 19 August 2013, China's central government website published a State Council notice dated 5 June: the Table of General Standard Chinese Characters. It contains 8,105 characters in three levels, the first 3,500 of them chosen for basic education, and the notice states that general use should follow it and that the earlier lists stop being used. Its first annex pairs each standard character with its traditional and variant forms. Across the strait in Taipei, schoolbooks follow a different list. Taiwan's Ministry of Education promulgated the Chart of Standard Forms of Common National Characters on 1 September 1982, with 4,808 characters, and textbooks have used its forms ever since.

Both lists describe the same language. A sentence in one can be converted into the other, and most characters are the same in both. But a reader who knows only one script will stumble on a page in the other, and some conversions are not one-to-one. This lesson compares the two systems method by method, so that you can read traditional characters, which Taiwan and Hong Kong use, while you write simplified ones.

How simplification happened

Mainland China's simplification came in rounds. Wikipedia's account dates the first to 1956, when the Chinese Character Simplification Scheme set out 515 simplified characters and 54 simplified components. A General List followed in 1964. A second round in 1977 was poorly received and quickly fell out of use, and it was formally withdrawn in 1986, when the General List was reissued with six changes. The 2013 table brought these lists together. Many of the new forms were not invented in the 1950s: Wikipedia notes that many were drawn from popular cursive handwriting that people had used for centuries.

Elsewhere, Singapore adopted simplified characters in stages from 1969 and aligned fully with the mainland's forms in 1976, according to Wikipedia's article on Singapore's characters. Today simplified characters are the standard in mainland China, Singapore and Malaysia, and traditional characters are official in Taiwan, Hong Kong and Macau. Even on the mainland, the language law lists places where traditional characters may still be used, such as historic sites, calligraphy and handwritten shop signs.

Comparing the methods

Wikipedia's article on simplified characters groups the methods roughly as follows. Every row has examples from this course.

MethodTraditional to simplifiedFrom this course
A whole component simplified, changing every character that uses it門 to 门, 車 to 车, 長 to 长, 馬 to 马, 見 to 见, 言 to 讠门, 车, 长, 们, 问, 妈, 吗, 见, 谢, 请, 说
A handwritten cursive shape made standard書 to 书, 東 to 东书, 东
Part of the character kept, the rest dropped開 to 开, 關 to 关, 電 to 电开, 关, 电
A component replaced by a simpler one聽 to 听, 讀 to 读, 對 to 对听, 读, 对
Two or more characters merged into one後 and 后 to 后; 發 and 髮 to 发后, 发
No change at all一, 人, 大, 中, 你, 好, 是, 山most of your characters

The first row is the most useful for a reader. Learn the simplified forms of about a dozen common components, and hundreds of traditional characters become recognisable: 讠 is 言, 门 is 門, 马 is 馬, 车 is 車, 见 is 見, 长 is 長, 贝 is 貝 (shell, money), 钅 is 金 (metal), 饣 is 食 (food), 纟 is 糸 (silk) and 鱼 is 魚 (fish). The third row is the easiest to see: 開 (open) and 關 (close) both lost the door 門 that framed them, and 電 (electricity) lost its rain radical 雨.

So what?: a simplified reader can learn to read traditional characters quickly, because most differences follow a small number of component patterns. Writing them takes longer, because some traditional forms have more than twice as many strokes.

When one simplified character stands for two

The fifth row needs care. When two traditional characters with the same or similar sound were merged, the simplified form does double duty, and converting back to traditional means choosing the right one from context. The Unicode database records these one-to-many pairs.

SimplifiedTraditionalMeaningsExamples
后後 / 后after, behind / queen, empress以后 (以後, afterwards); 皇后 (皇后, empress)
发發 / 髮to send out, emit / hair发音 (發音, pronunciation); 头发 (頭髮, hair)
面面 / 麵face, surface / noodles面条 (麵條, noodles), in Lesson 22
只只 / 隻only / a measure word for animals一只猫 (一隻貓, a cat), in Lesson 15
历歷 / 曆to experience, history / calendar历史 (歷史, history); 农历 (農曆, lunar calendar), in Lessons 13 and 17

The pairs also show why conversion software can go wrong. A program that turns every 发 into 發 will write 頭發 for hair, which a Taiwanese reader sees at once as a mistake. Note too that 发 has two pronunciations to match: fā for 發, as in 发音, and fà for 髮, hair. In the word 头发, Wiktionary gives tóufa, with a light second syllable, on the mainland and tóufǎ in Taiwan.

The same sentences in both scripts

SimplifiedTraditionalPinyinEnglish
请开门。請開門。Qǐng kāi mén.Please open the door.
这是我的中文书。這是我的中文書。Zhè shì wǒ de Zhōngwén shū.This is my Chinese book.
以后我们一起说中文。以後我們一起說中文。Yǐhòu wǒmen yìqǐ shuō Zhōngwén.From now on, let's speak Chinese together.
你好,谢谢!你好,謝謝!Nǐ hǎo, xièxie!Hello, thank you!

Count the characters that change in each pair: all three in the first sentence, two of seven in the second, three of nine in the third, and two of four in the last. That ratio is typical: a page of traditional text is mostly familiar, with a minority of characters to decode.

Characters to learn

CharacterTraditionalPinyinMeaningRadicalStrokes
门門 (8 strokes)mén (men2)door, gate门 (門)3
东東 (8 strokes)dōng (dong1)east一 (traditional 木)5
西samexī (xi1)west西 (襾)6
车車 (7 strokes)chē (che1)vehicle, car车 (車)4
书書 (10 strokes)shū (shu1)book乙 (traditional 曰)4
开開 (12 strokes)kāi (kai1)to open; to drive廾 (traditional 門)4
关關 (19 strokes)guān (guan1)to close, turn off八 (traditional 門)6
长長 (8 strokes)cháng (chang2) long; zhǎng (zhang3) to growlong; to grow长 (長)4
后後 (9 strokes) for after; 后 for queenhòu (hou4)after, behind; queen口6
发發 (12 strokes) to send; 髮 (15 strokes) hairfā (fa1); fà (fa4) in hair wordsto send out; hair又5
电電 (13 strokes)diàn (dian4)electricity田 (traditional 雨)5

These combine into useful words at once. The pair 东西 is famous: said dōngxī it means east and west, but said dōngxi, with a light second syllable, it means thing or stuff, as in 买东西 (mǎi dōngxi, to go shopping, literally "buy things"). The words 开门 and 关门 are to open and close a door, and on a shop sign they mean open and closed. A 电车 (diànchē) is a tram or trolleybus, and a 电话 (diànhuà) is a telephone, "electric speech". And 书 gives 读书 (dúshū), to read or to study.

Look at the radical column. For several of these characters, simplification changed the radical too. Traditional 開 and 關 are filed under 門, and 電 under 雨, but their simplified forms lost those parts and are filed elsewhere, which is one more reason to know both systems if you use dictionaries from both places.

Dialogue: two scripts, one book (written for this course)

Maya is learning simplified characters. Her classmate 王小文 in Taipei reads traditional ones. They are looking at Maya's notebook.

SpeakerChinese (simplified)PinyinEnglish
王小文这是什么书?Zhè shì shénme shū?What book is this?
Maya是我的中文书。我写简体字。Shì wǒ de Zhōngwén shū. Wǒ xiě jiǎntǐzì.It's my Chinese book. I write simplified characters.
王小文我写繁体字。你看,"书"和"書"。Wǒ xiě fántǐzì. Nǐ kàn, "shū" hé "shū".I write traditional characters. Look: 书 and 書.
Maya"門"是"门"吗?"Mén" shì "mén" ma?Is 門 the same as 门?
王小文对!很多字都一样,比如"中文"。Duì! Hěn duō zì dōu yíyàng, bǐrú "Zhōngwén".Right! Lots of characters are the same, for example 中文.
Maya太好了!以后我也读繁体字。Tài hǎo le! Yǐhòu wǒ yě dú fántǐzì.Great! From now on I'll read traditional characters too.

New words here: 简体字 (jiǎntǐzì, simplified characters), 繁体字 (fántǐzì, traditional characters), 写 (xiě, to write, a Lesson 17 character), 看 (kàn, to look, Lesson 18), 很多 (hěn duō, many), 一样 (yíyàng, the same) and 比如 (bǐrú, for example). Xiaowen would write her own lines in traditional characters; the table shows them in simplified so that you can read them now.

Listening: pairs of scripts, one sound

  1. Play the Wiktionary recordings of 門, 東, 西, 車, 書, 關, 後, 發 and 電. Each entry is filed under the traditional form, and its page also shows the simplified form. Write the tone of each. Answers: 2, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 4, 1, 4.
  2. Two readings of one character: on the 長 page, play both cháng (long) and zhǎng (to grow). Which uses a curled-tongue initial? Answer: both do; ch and zh are both retroflex, and only the puff of air and the tone differ.
  3. Thing or directions? Play 東西. Is the recording dōngxī (east and west) or dōngxi (thing)? Answer: dōngxi, with a light second syllable; the file is named zh-dōngxi.

Speaking: read both scripts aloud

Alone: read the four sentence pairs aloud, first the simplified line, then the traditional one, and notice that your mouth does exactly the same thing twice. Record yourself reading 买东西, 开门, 关门, 电话, 电车 and 读书, then make a sentence with each, such as 请关门 (please close the door).

With a partner: one of you writes a character from this course in traditional form; the other reads it aloud and writes its simplified form. Score a point for each, and a bonus point for naming the method of simplification from the comparison table.

Character writing: eleven characters, plus their traditional forms

Write each simplified character five times: 门 3 strokes, 东 5, 西 6, 车 4, 书 4, 开 4, 关 6, 长 4, 后 6, 发 5, 电 5. Then write each traditional form twice: 門 8, 東 8, 車 7, 書 10, 開 12, 關 19, 長 8, 後 9, 發 12, 髮 15, 電 13. Two order points: in 门, the dot comes first, then the vertical on the left, then the turning stroke with its hook; in 书, the dot is the last of its four strokes.

Check simplified forms on 汉典 (zdic.net) (shown for 关) and traditional forms on Taiwan's 國語小字典 (shown for 關). Taiwan's Ministry of Education also offers its list of 4,808 common characters as a free PDF; scan its first page and count how many characters you can already read.

Common misconceptions

  • "Simplified characters were all invented by a committee in the 1950s." Many came from cursive and popular handwriting that people had used for centuries; the reforms made them standard.
  • "Every simplified character matches exactly one traditional character." Some simplified characters stand for two or more traditional ones, such as 发 for 發 and 髮, so converting back needs context.
  • "Traditional Chinese is a different language." Both scripts write the same language, and most characters are the same in both.
  • "You must master writing both scripts." Writing one well and reading the other is a realistic goal; most differences follow a dozen component patterns.
  • "Traditional characters are banned in mainland China." Mainland law sets simplified characters as the standard but allows traditional ones in listed situations, such as historic sites, calligraphy and handwritten signs.

Looking back

Simplified characters became mainland China's standard through the reforms of 1956 and 1964, reissued with six changes in 1986 after a second round from 1977 was abandoned, and gathered into the 8,105-character table of 2013. Singapore aligned with them by 1976, and Malaysia uses them too; Taiwan, Hong Kong and Macau use traditional characters, with Taiwan's 4,808 standard forms fixed in 1982. Simplification simplified components across many characters at once, standardised cursive shapes, dropped parts, replaced components and merged some characters, so that 发 now stands for both 發 and 髮. Most characters did not change, and the rest follow patterns you can learn to read. You can now write 门, 东, 西, 车, 书, 开, 关, 长, 后, 发 and 电 and recognise their traditional forms. Module 4 starts counting: numbers from 零 to 万.

Sources

  1. State Council of the People's Republic of China. (2013, June 5). 国务院关于公布《通用规范汉字表》的通知 [Notice on publishing the Table of General Standard Chinese Characters] (国发〔2013〕23号). gov.cn
  2. China News Service. (2013, August 21). 《通用规范汉字表》出炉 [The Table of General Standard Chinese Characters is published: 8,105 characters in three levels]. chinanews.com
  3. Ministry of Education, Taiwan. (n.d.). 教育部常用字 [The Ministry's 4,808 common characters, PDF]. 國字標準字體筆順學習網. stroke-order.learningweb.moe.edu.tw
  4. Wikipedia contributors. (2026). Simplified Chinese characters [background on the 1956, 1964, 1977 and 1986 lists, cursive origins and methods]; Chart of Standard Forms of Common National Characters [Taiwan, 1982, 4,808 characters]; Singapore Chinese characters. Wikipedia. en.wikipedia.org
  5. Wei, C. (2025). Law on the Standard Spoken and Written Chinese Language (revision): Comparison chart [Article 19, situations where traditional characters may be used]. NPC Observer. npcobserver.com
  6. Unicode Consortium. (2026). Unihan database: kTraditionalVariant data for 后, 发, 面, 只 and 历. unicode.org
  7. Wiktionary contributors. (2026). 東西; 頭髮; 長 and other entries with Mandarin audio. Wiktionary. en.wiktionary.org
Key terms
简体字 (jiǎntǐzì)
Simplified characters, standard in mainland China, Singapore and Malaysia, set out from 1956 onwards and collected in the 2013 table of 8,105 characters.
繁体字 (fántǐzì)
Traditional characters, official in Taiwan, Hong Kong and Macau; Taiwan's 4,808 standard forms date from 1982.
component simplification
Simplifying a part such as 言 to 讠 or 門 to 门, which changes every character that contains it.
merged characters
Two or more traditional characters written with one simplified form, such as 后 for 後 and 后, or 发 for 發 and 髮.
东西 (dōngxi / dōngxī)
Thing, stuff, with a light second syllable; east and west with two first tones.
开门 / 关门
To open / close the door; on a shop sign, open / closed. The traditional forms 開 and 關 both contain the door 門.
电话 (diànhuà)
Telephone; literally 'electric speech'. 电 is 電 in traditional script, without the rain radical.
one-to-many conversion
Turning simplified text into traditional text when one simplified character has several traditional forms; it needs context, or software makes errors like 頭發.

Module 4: Numbers, Dates and the Calendar

Counting to a hundred million in groups of four, ages and phone numbers, dates and clock times with time words before the verb, and the lunar calendar with its festivals.

Numbers from 零 to 万: Counting, Ages and Phone Numbers

  • Say and write numbers from 0 to 100,000,000, reading large numbers in groups of four digits with 万 and 亿, and placing 零 correctly.
  • Choose between 二 and 两, read phone numbers digit by digit, and ask and give ages with 几岁, 多大 and 岁.
  • Read and write 四, 五, 六, 七, 八, 九, 零, 百, 千, 万, 两, 岁, 几, 多 and 少.

23,373,283

On 30 June 2023, Taiwan's Ministry of the Interior counted 23,373,283 people in its population registers, the figure behind the surname statistics in Lesson 5. Try to read that number aloud in Mandarin before you go on. An English speaker splits it by thousands: twenty-three million, three hundred seventy-three thousand, two hundred eighty-three. A Mandarin speaker splits it differently, and if you carry the English grouping across, you will get stuck at "thousand thousand", because Mandarin has no word for million.

That is this lesson's problem: Mandarin counts large numbers in groups of four digits, around a unit English lacks, 万 (wàn), ten thousand. The digits themselves are easy, and the system is more regular than English. Once you have the four-digit habit, the population of Taiwan, the price of a car and the number of characters in a dictionary all read the same way. The answer is at the end of the section on 万.

Zero to ten

012345
零 líng一 yī二 èr三 sān四 sì五 wǔ
678910
六 liù七 qī八 bā九 jiǔ十 shí

Two reminders from Lesson 4. When you count, 一 keeps its own first tone, yī. And 七 and 八 stay first tones for most speakers today. Watch 四 sì (four) against 十 shí (ten): the first has a flat-tongue s and a falling tone, the second a curled-tongue sh and a rising tone. Mixing them up is one of the commonest number mistakes, so practise the pair until your tongue knows the difference.

Eleven to ninety-nine: no new words

From 11 to 99 Mandarin simply says the parts, as the AllSet Chinese Grammar Wiki sets out. Eleven is ten-one, 十一 (shíyī). Twenty is two-ten, 二十 (èrshí). Twenty-three is two-ten-three, 二十三 (èrshísān). Ninety-nine is 九十九 (jiǔshíjiǔ). There are no special words like eleven, twelve or the -teens, and no -ty endings to learn.

NumberChineseBuilt as
11十一 shíyīten + one
15十五 shíwǔten + five
20二十 èrshítwo tens
36三十六 sānshíliùthree tens + six
84八十四 bāshísìeight tens + four
99九十九 jiǔshíjiǔnine tens + nine

Hundreds and thousands, and the zero in the middle

Hundreds use 百 (bǎi) and thousands use 千 (qiān). The AllSet wiki adds three rules that trip up beginners.

  1. Say zero in the middle, once. A gap inside a number is read 零 (líng), with no unit after it: 101 is 一百零一, and 1,019 is 一千零一十九. However many zeros sit together, you say 零 only once.
  2. Say the one in "a hundred and ten". Above 100, a ten is said 一十: 110 is 一百一十 (yìbǎi yīshí), not 一百十.
  3. Drop the last unit when it is obvious. 150 can be 一百五十 or, more often, simply 一百五, which always means 150, never 105.

One more detail: 一 before 百 and 千 follows the tone rules of Lesson 4, so 一百 is yìbǎi and 一千 is yìqiān, because bǎi and qiān are not fourth tones.

万 and 亿: thinking in fours

Here is the heart of the lesson. Mandarin has a word for ten thousand, 万 (wàn), and the next big unit is 亿 (yì), a hundred million, which is ten thousand ten-thousands. The AllSet wiki's advice is to move the comma: break a number into groups of four digits from the right, instead of English groups of three. Then read each group as an ordinary number up to 9,999 and add the unit.

NumberGroups of fourChinese
10,0001,0000一万 yíwàn
56,7005,6700五万六千七百
100,00010,0000十万 shíwàn
1,000,000100,0000一百万 yìbǎi wàn
10,000,0001000,0000一千万 yìqiān wàn
100,000,0001,0000,0000一亿 yíyì

A million is "a hundred ten-thousands", 一百万, which the AllSet wiki recommends memorising as a fixed point. Now solve the problem. Taiwan's population, 23,373,283, regroups as 2337,3283. The first group is 两千三百三十七 (2,337), followed by 万; the second group is 三千二百八十三 (3,283). Together: 两千三百三十七万三千二百八十三, liǎngqiān sānbǎi sānshíqī wàn sānqiān èrbǎi bāshísān.

The upshot: for any number above 9,999, count four digits from the right, read the left-hand group, add 万, then read the right-hand group as usual.

二 or 两?

Mandarin has two words for two. A college Mandarin course published on LibreTexts, Carl Polley's Beginning Mandarin, sets out the division, and Wiktionary's usage note agrees.

  • 二 (èr) is the number itself: counting, 十二 (12), 二十 (20), ordinals such as 第二 (second), and the month 二月 (February).
  • 两 (liǎng) counts things: it comes before a measure word, as in 两个人 (two people), 两点 (two o'clock) and 两块钱 (two yuan). Lesson 15 explains measure words.
  • Before 百, 千 and 万 both are heard: 两百 or 二百 for 200, and usually 两千 and 两万.

The commonest mistake is 二个人 for two people. Wiktionary marks it as wrong: before a measure word, use 两.

Phone numbers, room numbers and 幺

Phone numbers are read digit by digit, never as one large number. Wiktionary records one twist used on the mainland: 1 is often said yāo, written 幺, to reduce ambiguity, especially on the phone, when reading an ID card, in aviation and in the military. Said quickly, yī can be confused with qī (seven); yāo cannot. So a made-up mobile number such as 139 1234 5678 might be read aloud as yāo sān jiǔ, yāo èr sān sì, wǔ liù qī bā. Wiktionary labels this use of yāo as mainland usage, so do not be surprised to hear plain yī elsewhere.

To ask for a number, Mandarin uses 多少 (duōshao), how many or how much: 你的电话号码是多少? (Nǐ de diànhuà hàomǎ shì duōshao?), what is your phone number? Wiktionary notes that this use of 多少 for phone numbers comes from the fact that they are made up of digits.

How old are you? 几岁 and 多大

Age needs no verb. The AllSet wiki's pattern is subject + number + 岁 (suì, years of age), with no 是 and no measure word: 我十六岁 (Wǒ shíliù suì), I'm sixteen. Two questions ask for it.

  • 你几岁? (Nǐ jǐ suì?) uses 几 (jǐ), how many, which expects a small number. It is the question for a child, and Wiktionary's example notes that it may be impolite to an adult.
  • 你多大? (Nǐ duō dà?), literally "you how big?", is the question for teenagers and adults of your own age; Wiktionary gives "how old" as one of its meanings.

Answer with the number and 岁: 我十五岁. Notice that 多 (many) and 少 (few) combine in 多少 for "how many" when the answer may be large: 你们学校有多少学生? (How many students does your school have?)

Lucky eight, cautious four

The Beijing Olympic Games opened, NPR reported, at 8:08 p.m. on 8 August 2008, a time chosen because "eight is a lucky number in China". Wikipedia's article on numbers in Chinese culture explains the usual reason: 八 (bā) sounds like 发 (fā), to prosper. Four has the opposite reputation in some places, because 四 (sì) is close to 死 (sǐ), death, and some buildings in East Asia leave out floors and room numbers with a 4 in them. The same article notes that the dislike of four is strongest among Cantonese speakers and that Teochew speakers treat four as lucky, so these associations vary. They are worth knowing about, not a rule that everyone follows.

Characters to learn

CharacterTraditionalPinyinMeaningRadicalStrokes
四samesì (si4)four囗5
五samewǔ (wu3)five二4
六sameliù (liu4)six八4
七sameqī (qi1)seven一2
八samebā (ba1)eight八2
九samejiǔ (jiu3)nine乙2
零samelíng (ling2)zero雨13
百samebǎi (bai3)hundred白6
千sameqiān (qian1)thousand十3
万萬 (13 strokes)wàn (wan4)ten thousand一3
两兩 (8 strokes)liǎng (liang3)two (before measure words)一7
岁歲 (13 strokes)suì (sui4)years of age山6
几幾 (12 strokes)jǐ (ji3)how many (a few)几2
多sameduō (duo1)many, much夕6
少sameshǎo (shao3)few, little小4

Two details. The character 零 is heavy, thirteen strokes under the rain radical; learn it anyway, because you will read it in prices, dates and addresses. And 几 is one of the merged characters from Lesson 10: in traditional script, 幾 means "how many", while 几 survives as a separate character for a small table.

Dialogue: numbers at lunch (written for this course)

The phone number is invented, and is read the mainland way, with yāo.

SpeakerChinesePinyinEnglish
Daniel你多大?Nǐ duō dà?How old are you?
Maya我十五岁。你呢?Wǒ shíwǔ suì. Nǐ ne?I'm fifteen. You?
Daniel我十六岁。我妹妹八岁。Wǒ shíliù suì. Wǒ mèimei bā suì.I'm sixteen. My little sister is eight.
Maya你的电话号码是多少?Nǐ de diànhuà hàomǎ shì duōshao?What's your phone number?
Daniel一三九,一二三四,五六七八。Yāo sān jiǔ, yāo èr sān sì, wǔ liù qī bā.139, 1234, 5678.
Maya我们学校有多少学生?Wǒmen xuéxiào yǒu duōshao xuésheng?How many students does our school have?
Daniel两千五百!很多!Liǎngqiān wǔbǎi! Hěn duō!Two thousand five hundred! That's a lot!

Check the choices: 两千 because it counts students, 十五 and 十六 with no 是 before 岁, and 多少 for a number that could be large. 学校 (xuéxiào, school) and 有 (yǒu, to have) arrive as characters in Lessons 17 and 14.

Listening: numbers by ear

  1. Play Wiktionary's recordings of 四, 五, 六, 七, 八, 九 and 零, with 一, 二, 三 and 十 from Lesson 1. Repeat each, then count from 零 to 十 aloud without stopping.
  2. Play 百, 千, 萬 and 兩. Write the tones. Answers: bǎi 3, qiān 1, wàn 4, liǎng 3.
  3. Play 幺 and compare it with 一. Which vowel sound makes yāo hard to confuse with qī? Answer: the ao, which no other digit has.
  4. Play 歲, 幾, 多 and 少, then read the dialogue aloud.
  5. Dictation with a partner or a recording of yourself: have someone read these numbers, or record them and play them back a day later, and write the digits: 四十, 十四, 一百零八, 两千零二十六, 三万五千, 一百万. Answers: 40, 14, 108, 2026, 35,000, 1,000,000.

Speaking: count, ask, answer

Alone: count from 1 to 30 aloud, then by tens to 100, then say these years as numbers: 1958, 2008, 2026. Record your phone number twice, once with yāo and once with yī, then say your age and the ages of three people you know. Finally, read Taiwan's population aloud from the four-digit grouping.

With a partner: take turns asking 你多大? and 你的电话号码是多少? (invent a number), and write down what you hear. Then play "Higher, lower": one of you thinks of a number below 1,000, the other guesses aloud in Chinese, and the first answers 多 (more) or 少 (less) until the guess is right.

Character writing: fifteen characters

Write each character five times, saying it aloud. Stroke counts: 四 5, 五 4, 六 4, 七 2, 八 2, 九 2, 零 13, 百 6, 千 3, 万 3, 两 7, 岁 6, 几 2, 多 6, 少 4. In 四, the inner strokes come before the closing bottom stroke, as with 日. In 万, the horizontal comes first, then the turning stroke with its hook, then the left-falling stroke; 汉典 gives it as 153.

Check the animations on 汉典 (zdic.net) (shown for 零), and see the traditional forms 萬, 兩, 歲 and 幾 on Taiwan's 國語小字典 (shown for 萬). Then write these numbers in characters: 17, 45, 99, 105, 2,026, 30,000. Answers: 十七, 四十五, 九十九, 一百零五, 两千零二十六, 三万.

Common misconceptions

  • "Mandarin groups big numbers in thousands, like English." It groups them in ten-thousands: a million is 一百万, a hundred ten-thousands.
  • "Two people is 二个人." Before a measure word, two is 两: 两个人. 二 is for counting, 二十 and 第二.
  • "Every zero in a number is said." Say 零 once for any gap inside a number, and not at all at the end: 1,005 is 一千零五, and 1,500 is 一千五百.
  • "Age needs 是: 我是十六岁." Age takes no verb: 我十六岁.
  • "You can ask anyone 你几岁." 几 expects a small number, so 你几岁 is for children; Wiktionary notes it may be impolite to an adult. Use 你多大 with people your age.

The takeaway

Mandarin numbers are built from ten digits and four units: 十, 百, 千 and 万, plus 亿 for a hundred million. From 11 to 99 you just say the parts. A gap inside a number is said 零 once, 110 is 一百一十, and 150 can be 一百五. Above 9,999, group the digits in fours from the right and read each group with 万 or 亿 after it, so 23,373,283 becomes 两千三百三十七万三千二百八十三. Use 两 before measure words and 二 for counting, read phone numbers digit by digit, often with yāo for 1 on the mainland, and ask for them with 多少. Age needs no verb: 我十六岁, asked with 几岁 for a child and 多大 for people your age. With numbers in place, Lesson 12 builds dates and clock times, where the order goes from big to small.

Sources

  1. AllSet Learning. (n.d.). Structure of numbers; Big numbers in Chinese; Age with "sui"; Comparing "er" and "liang". Chinese Grammar Wiki. resources.allsetlearning.com
  2. Polley, C. (n.d.). Comparing "er" and "liang". In CHN 101: Beginning Mandarin. LibreTexts. human.libretexts.org
  3. Department of Household Registration, Ministry of the Interior, Taiwan. (2023). 112年全國姓名統計分析 [population of 23,373,283 as of 30 June 2023]. ris.gov.tw
  4. Wiktionary contributors. (2026). 幺 [definition: one, used on the mainland to reduce ambiguity]; 兩 [usage notes]; 幾歲; 多大; 多少 [usage notes]. Wiktionary. en.wiktionary.org
  5. NPR. (2008, August 8). Olympics open with spotlight on Chinese culture. nhpr.org
  6. Wikipedia contributors. (2026). Numbers in Chinese culture [background on 8 and 4, and regional variation]. Wikipedia. en.wikipedia.org
  7. 汉典 [Zdic]. (n.d.). 零; 万 [Character entries: stroke counts and stroke-order animations]. zdic.net
Key terms
万 (wàn)
Ten thousand, the key unit of large numbers. A million is 一百万, a hundred ten-thousands.
亿 (yì)
A hundred million, ten thousand times 万.
groups of four
Read large numbers by counting four digits from the right: 23,373,283 is 2337万3283.
零 (líng) in the middle
A gap inside a number is said 零 once, with no unit after it: 101 is 一百零一.
二 and 两
二 is the number itself (十二, 第二, 二月); 两 counts things before a measure word (两个人, 两点).
幺 (yāo)
A mainland way of saying 1 in phone numbers, ID numbers and similar strings, so that it cannot be confused with 七.
岁 (suì)
Years of age. Age needs no verb: 我十六岁.
几岁 / 多大 / 多少
How old (to a child) / how old (to peers and adults) / how many, how much, also used to ask for phone numbers.

Dates, Days and the Clock: Time Before the Verb

  • Say and write dates from big to small, year, month, day and weekday, and ask about dates and birthdays.
  • Tell the time with 点, 分, 半, 刻 and 差, and use 两 for two o'clock and 零 for single-digit minutes.
  • Place time words before the verb, and read and write 年, 号, 星, 期, 今, 明, 昨, 点, 分, 半, 现, 在, 时 and 候.

A date on a government notice

The State Council notice that published China's table of standard characters, which you met in Lesson 10, ends with its date: 2013年6月5日. Read left to right, that is 2013 year, 6 month, 5 day. An American writes the same date as June 5, 2013, and a British writer as 5 June 2013; Chinese writing starts with the biggest unit and works down. Add the weekday and it continues in the same direction. The notice was dated a Wednesday, so the full form would be 2013年6月5日星期三.

Big to small is the rule for the clock too, and for where time goes in a sentence. This lesson builds a date and a time step by step, the way you would fill in a form, and then puts them into sentences. Halfway through you will change one input, a time of 2:05 instead of 3:30, and see two small rules switch on.

Step 1: the year

A year is read digit by digit, followed by 年 (nián, year). The AllSet Chinese Grammar Wiki gives 2019 as èr líng yī jiǔ nián, and 1868 as yī bā liù bā nián. So 2013年 is èr líng yī sān nián, and this year, 2026年, is èr líng èr liù nián. Notice that the digits keep their counting forms: 二 for 2, and 一 as yī, because you are reading digits, not counting things.

Year words built on 年 follow the same pattern as days: 今年 (jīnnián, this year), 明年 (míngnián, next year) and 去年 (qùnián, last year), with the 去 of Lesson 3.

Step 2: the month

Months have no names, only numbers. Put the number before 月 (yuè, month, the moon of Lesson 8): 一月 is January, 六月 June, 十二月 December. Ask with 几月 (jǐ yuè, which month?). Be careful with the order: 六月 is June, but 六个月 (liù ge yuè) is six months, a length of time, with the measure word 个 between them.

Step 3: the day

The day of the month is a number followed by 日 (rì) in writing or 号 (hào) in speech; the AllSet wiki notes that 号 is common in spoken Mandarin while 日 is what you usually see written. So 6月5日 on paper is said liù yuè wǔ hào. The question is 几月几号? (Jǐ yuè jǐ hào?, what is the date?), and the commonest use is a birthday: 你的生日是几月几号? (Nǐ de shēngri shì jǐ yuè jǐ hào?, when is your birthday?).

Step 4: the day of the week

Weekdays are numbered too, starting from Monday: 星期一 (xīngqī yī) is Monday, 星期二 Tuesday, through 星期六, Saturday. Sunday breaks the pattern: 星期天 (xīngqī tiān), or the more formal 星期日 (xīngqī rì). The AllSet wiki lists two other words for "week" you will hear: 礼拜 (lǐbài), so 礼拜一 is also Monday, and 周 (zhōu), as in 周一. Taiwan's Ministry of Education dictionary gives 星期 as xīngqí, with a rising second syllable, where mainland recordings say xīngqī.

English星期Also heard
Monday星期一礼拜一, 周一
Wednesday星期三礼拜三, 周三
Saturday星期六礼拜六, 周六
Sunday星期天 or 星期日礼拜天, 周日

Ask with 星期几? (xīngqī jǐ?, which day of the week?): 今天星期几? 今天星期一。 Notice that no 是 is needed between today and the weekday, just as none is needed for age.

Key idea: a full date runs from biggest to smallest, year, month, day, weekday, and each part is a number plus a unit word: 2026年10月26日星期一.

Step 5: yesterday, today, tomorrow

前天昨天今天明天后天
qiántiān, the day before yesterdayzuótiān, yesterdayjīntiān, todaymíngtiān, tomorrowhòutiān, the day after tomorrow

You know three of the parts already: 天 (day) from Lesson 4, and 后 (after) from Lesson 10. 明 is bright, 日 and 月 together, which the mainland dictionary 汉典 classes as a meaning compound; tomorrow is the bright day that comes next. And 现在 (xiànzài) means now.

Step 6: the clock

Clock times also run big to small: hour, then minutes. The hour is a number plus 点 (diǎn, literally a dot or point), and minutes are a number plus 分 (fēn). The AllSet wiki's rules for times give the rest.

TimeChinesePinyinRule
3:00三点sān diǎnnumber + 点
3:30三点半sān diǎn bàn半 (bàn) is half past
3:15三点一刻 or 三点十五分sān diǎn yí kè刻 (kè) is a quarter hour, used only for :15 and :45
3:45三点三刻 or 三点四十五分sān diǎn sān kèthree quarters past
2:55差五分三点chà wǔ fēn sān diǎn差 (chà), short of: five minutes to three

To ask the time, say 现在几点? (Xiànzài jǐ diǎn?, what time is it now?). Add the part of the day in front when you need it: 上午 (shàngwǔ) for morning, 中午 (zhōngwǔ) for midday, 下午 (xiàwǔ) for afternoon and 晚上 (wǎnshang) for evening. So 3:30 p.m. is 下午三点半, big to small again.

The changed input: 2:05 instead of 3:30

Run the clock procedure on 2:05 p.m. and two rules switch on. First, two o'clock is 两点 (liǎng diǎn), not 二点: the AllSet wiki is explicit, and Lesson 11 explained that 两 counts things, here hours. Twelve o'clock stays 十二点, because 十二 is an ordinary number. Second, minutes under ten take 零 (líng) before them: 2:05 is 两点零五分, liǎng diǎn líng wǔ fēn, and in speech the 分 is often dropped. So 2:05 p.m. is 下午两点零五分, where 3:30 p.m. was simply 下午三点半.

Step 7: put time before the verb

Now use the time in a sentence. The AllSet wiki gives two correct positions for a time word: before the subject, or right after it. Either way, it comes before the verb.

  • 明天我去。 Míngtiān wǒ qù. Tomorrow I'm going.
  • 我明天去。 Wǒ míngtiān qù. I'm going tomorrow.
  • 我们星期六下午三点去。 Wǒmen xīngqī liù xiàwǔ sān diǎn qù. We're going at 3 p.m. on Saturday.

What you cannot do is put the time at the end, the English way: 我去明天 sounds wrong to a Mandarin speaker, and the wiki warns that it does not sound at all natural. When several time words stack up, keep them big to small and together: 星期六下午三点, never 三点星期六下午.

Key idea: time is a block that goes before the verb, ordered from biggest to smallest unit; English puts it at the end, Mandarin never does.

Characters to learn

CharacterTraditionalPinyinMeaningRadicalStrokes
年samenián (nian2)year干6
号號 (13 strokes)hào (hao4)day of the month (spoken); number口5
星samexīng (xing1)star日9
期sameqī (qi1); Taiwan qí in 星期period of time月12
今samejīn (jin1)now, this人4
明samemíng (ming2)bright; next日8
昨samezuó (zuo2)yesterday日9
点點 (17 strokes)diǎn (dian3)o'clock; dot灬 (火)9
分samefēn (fen1)minute; to divide刀4
半samebàn (ban4)half十5
现現 (11 strokes)xiàn (xian4)present, now王 (玉)8
在samezài (zai4)at, in; to be at土6
时時 (10 strokes)shí (shi2)time, hour日7
候samehòu (hou4); light hou in 时候 on the mainlandtime, season亻 (人)10

The sun radical 日 runs through this lesson: 星, 明, 昨 and 时 are all about time or light. Two useful words combine the new characters: 时候 (shíhou, time, moment), as in 什么时候 (shénme shíhou, when?), which Wiktionary gives as shíhòu in Taiwan's standard; and 时间 (shíjiān, time as an amount), as in 我没有时间 (I don't have time). And 在 will do much more work in Lesson 19, where it means to be at a place.

Dialogue: making plans for the weekend (written for this course)

SpeakerChinesePinyinEnglish
Maya今天几月几号?Jīntiān jǐ yuè jǐ hào?What's the date today?
王小文今天十月二十六号,星期一。Jīntiān shí yuè èrshíliù hào, xīngqī yī.It's October 26th, Monday.
Maya星期六是我的生日!Xīngqī liù shì wǒ de shēngri!Saturday is my birthday!
王小文真的吗?我们星期六下午一起去吃饭吧!Zhēn de ma? Wǒmen xīngqī liù xiàwǔ yìqǐ qù chī fàn ba!Really? Let's go out to eat together on Saturday afternoon!
Maya好!几点?Hǎo! Jǐ diǎn?Great! What time?
王小文两点半。现在几点?Liǎng diǎn bàn. Xiànzài jǐ diǎn?Half past two. What time is it now?
Maya现在三点零五分。我们四点上课!Xiànzài sān diǎn líng wǔ fēn. Wǒmen sì diǎn shàngkè!It's 3:05. We have class at four!

Find the time blocks: every one sits before its verb. Note 两点半 with 两, and 三点零五分 with 零. 吃饭 (chī fàn, to eat a meal) and 上课 (shàngkè, to go to class) come as characters in Lessons 18 and 17.

Listening: dates and times

  1. Play Wiktionary's recordings of 今天, 明天, 昨天 and 現在. Which two begin with the same tone? Answer: 明天 and 昨天 both begin with a rising second tone.
  2. Play 星期. Is the second syllable qī or qí? Answer: qī, the mainland reading; Taiwan's dictionary gives qí.
  3. Play 年, 號, 點, 分 (the first recording, fēn) and 半, and write the tone of each. Answers: 2, 4, 3, 1, 4.
  4. Play 時候, 時間 and 生日. Which has a light second syllable in the recording? Answer: 時候, shíhou, and 生日, shēngri; 時間 keeps a full first tone.
  5. Self-dictation: record yourself reading these, then play them back the next day and write down the dates and times: 2026年3月15日; 星期四; 下午两点零七分; 差十分八点; 十二点半. Answers: 15 March 2026; Thursday; 2:07 p.m.; 7:50; 12:30.

Speaking: your week aloud

Alone: record today's full date, your birthday as a full date, and the time you get up, go to school and go to bed, each in a sentence with the time before the verb: 我早上七点去学校。 Then say what day of the week it is today, tomorrow and the day after tomorrow.

With a partner: interview each other: 你的生日是几月几号? 你星期几有中文课? 你几点去学校? Write down the answers, then report one back as a sentence: 她的生日是五月三号。 Finally, one of you draws a clock face with a time and the other says it; include at least one :05 and one 2 o'clock time.

Character writing: fourteen characters

Write each character five times, saying it aloud. Stroke counts: 年 6, 号 5, 星 9, 期 12, 今 4, 明 8, 昨 9, 点 9, 分 4, 半 5, 现 8, 在 6, 时 7, 候 10. In 年, the long vertical is written last, after the horizontals it crosses. In 点, the four dots of the fire radical go last, left to right. In 明, write 日 narrow on the left, then 月.

Check animations on 汉典 (zdic.net) (shown for 期) and traditional forms on Taiwan's 國語小字典 (shown for 點). Then write today's date, your birthday and three times of day in characters.

Common misconceptions

  • "Dates go month, day, year, as in American English." Chinese runs year, month, day, weekday: 2026年10月26日星期一.
  • "Two o'clock is 二点." It is 两点, because 两 counts things. Twelve o'clock is 十二点.
  • "Time words can go at the end of the sentence." They go before the verb, either before or just after the subject: 我明天去, never 我去明天.
  • "Sunday is 星期七." Sunday is 星期天 or 星期日; only Monday to Saturday are numbered.
  • "六月 and 六个月 mean the same." 六月 is June; 六个月 is a length of six months.

What to carry forward

Dates and times in Mandarin run from the biggest unit to the smallest: year, read digit by digit with 年; month, a number with 月; day, a number with 日 in writing or 号 in speech; then the weekday, 星期一 to 星期六 and 星期天. Clock times are a number with 点, then minutes with 分, with 半 for half past, 刻 for quarters and 差 for minutes to the hour; two o'clock is 两点 and single-digit minutes take 零. Time phrases form one block, ordered big to small, and the block always goes before the verb. With 今天, 明天, 昨天 and 现在, you can now plan a week. Lesson 13 looks at the other calendar that shapes Chinese life, the lunar calendar, and the festivals it sets.

Sources

  1. AllSet Learning. (n.d.). Structure of dates; Structure of days of the week; Structure of times (basic); Structure of times (advanced); Time words and word order. Chinese Grammar Wiki. resources.allsetlearning.com
  2. State Council of the People's Republic of China. (2013, June 5). 国务院关于公布《通用规范汉字表》的通知 [date line of the notice]. gov.cn
  3. Ministry of Education, Taiwan. (2021). 國語辭典簡編本 [Concise Mandarin Chinese dictionary], entry 星期 (xīng qí) [search the site for 星期]. dict.concised.moe.edu.tw
  4. Wiktionary contributors. (2026). 今天; 明天; 昨天; 現在; 星期; 時候 [Mainland and Taiwan readings]; 生日 and other entries with Mandarin audio. Wiktionary. en.wiktionary.org
  5. 汉典 [Zdic]. (n.d.). 明 [structure: meaning compound]; 期 [stroke order]. zdic.net
  6. Hong Kong Observatory. (2025). Gregorian-Lunar calendar conversion table of 2026 [weekdays for 2026 dates]. hko.gov.hk
Key terms
年 月 日 / 号
Year, month, day. Dates run big to small: 2026年10月26日. 日 is written; 号 is usual in speech.
星期
Week. Weekdays are 星期一 (Monday) to 星期六 (Saturday), and Sunday is 星期天 or 星期日. Also 礼拜 and 周.
今天 / 明天 / 昨天
Today / tomorrow / yesterday; with 前天 and 后天 for the days before and after.
点 and 分
O'clock and minutes: 三点十分 is 3:10. Two o'clock is 两点, and minutes under ten take 零: 两点零五分.
半, 刻, 差
Half past (三点半), quarter hour (三点一刻), short of (差五分三点, five to three).
time before the verb
Time words go before the verb, either before or after the subject: 我明天去 or 明天我去, never 我去明天.
几月几号 / 星期几 / 几点
What date? / What day of the week? / What time? Each uses 几 where the number goes.
时候 / 时间
A point in time (什么时候, when?) / time as an amount (没有时间, no time).

The Lunar Calendar and the Festival Year

  • Explain how the lunar calendar works, with months that follow the moon, solar terms that follow the sun and leap months that keep them together.
  • Describe the main festivals of the lunar year with their dates in 2026, their customs and their greetings, and how mainland China, Taiwan, Hong Kong, Singapore and communities abroad mark them.
  • Read and write 春, 夏, 秋, 冬, 节, 新, 快, 乐, 红, 包, 农 and 历, and use 新年快乐, 春节快乐 and 恭喜发财.

The night of 16 February 2026

In the Hong Kong Observatory's conversion table for 2026, the line for Monday 16 February reads simply "29". It was the twenty-ninth and last day of the twelfth lunar month, the final night of the Year of the Snake. The next line, Tuesday 17 February, reads "1st Lunar Month": the first day of a new year that the Observatory labels Bing-wu, the year of the Horse. That night, in the words of UNESCO's description of the Spring Festival, "families dine together and stay up late to welcome the new year."

This lesson follows that one lunar year from its first night to its autumn festivals, using the real dates of 2026. Along the way you will see how the calendar works, why its New Year moves around between late January and February, and how the same festivals are kept in mainland China, Taiwan, Hong Kong, Singapore and New York.

A calendar that follows the moon and the sun

The traditional calendar is called 农历 (nónglì), literally "the farming calendar"; Wiktionary defines it as the traditional lunisolar calendar of East Asia. Lunisolar means it tracks both the moon and the sun. Each month begins at a new moon and lasts 29 or 30 days: in 2026 the first month ran from 17 February to 18 March, thirty days, and the second from 19 March to 16 April, twenty-nine. Twelve such months add up to about 354 days, some eleven days short of the solar year, so the lunar dates slide earlier against the seasons each year until the calendar corrects them.

The correction comes from the sun. The year is divided into the twenty-four solar terms (二十四节气, èrshísì jiéqì), which the Observatory explains as twenty-four equal steps of 15 degrees in the sun's yearly path. Twelve of them are major terms. The Observatory's rule is that a lunar month containing no major term becomes a leap month, taking the number of the month before it. It also gives the arithmetic: in 19 solar years there are 228 major terms but 235 lunar months, so seven months in every nineteen years are leap months.

You can see one in the Observatory's 2025 table, where "6th Lunar Month" appears twice: once on 25 June and again on 25 July. The year of the Horse has none. Its twelve months run in order from 17 February 2026 to the twelfth month, which begins on 8 January 2027.

UNESCO added the twenty-four solar terms to its Representative List of intangible cultural heritage in 2016. Its description calls them a traditional timeframe for production and daily routines, still of particular importance to farmers.

Remember: lunar months follow the moon, solar terms follow the sun, and leap months keep the two in step. That is why the lunar New Year falls on a different Western date every year.

Spring Festival: 17 February 2026

The New Year is called 春节 (Chūnjié, the Spring Festival). It always falls close to the solar term 立春, "spring commences", which in 2026 came on 4 February. Wikipedia's article on the festival gives the rule in Western terms: the New Year falls on the new moon that appears between 21 January and 20 February.

In December 2024 UNESCO inscribed the Spring Festival on its Representative List of the Intangible Cultural Heritage of Humanity. Its description covers the run-up and the days themselves. Beforehand, people clean their homes, stock provisions and prepare food. On New Year's Eve, 除夕 (chúxī), families eat together. At the New Year people wear new clothes, make offerings to heaven, earth and ancestors, and greet elders, relatives, friends and neighbours.

Three greetings carry most of the season.

  • 新年快乐! (Xīnnián kuàilè!), Happy New Year! 快乐 means happy, and the same pattern gives 生日快乐 (happy birthday).
  • 春节快乐! (Chūnjié kuàilè!), Happy Spring Festival!
  • 恭喜发财! (Gōngxǐ fācái!), which Wiktionary glosses as Happy New Year, with congratulations and best wishes for a prosperous year. Its Cantonese pronunciation, gung1 hei2 faat3 coi4, is the source of the English phrase Kung Hei Fat Choi, which Wiktionary records in Hong Kong and the Philippines.

Money is given in 红包 (hóngbāo), red envelopes. Wiktionary describes a 红包 as a monetary gift given during holidays or special occasions such as the Chinese New Year. Wikipedia's article adds that at the New Year they typically go to children, older people and lion dance performers, with the words 恭喜发财. Red, 红, is the colour of the season.

The year's animal, its 生肖 (shēngxiào), comes from a cycle of twelve: Rat, Ox, Tiger, Rabbit, Dragon, Snake, Horse, Goat, Monkey, Rooster, Dog and Pig. The Observatory's tables name 2025 the year of the Snake, 2026 the Horse, and 2027 the Goat, which begins on Saturday 6 February 2027. Your own animal follows the lunar year you were born in, not the Western one. Most people count from the New Year itself, though Wikipedia notes that some astrologers start the animal's year at 立春 instead. For someone born in January 2026, both give the same answer: the Snake, not the Horse.

The same New Year in five places

PlaceTime off for the 2026 New YearSource
Mainland ChinaNine days off, 15 to 23 February, from the 28th day of the twelfth month to the 7th day of the first. Two Saturdays, 14 and 28 February, became working days to make up for it.State Council notice of November 2025
TaiwanNine days off for government offices and schools, 14 to 22 February: five holidays from the eve of New Year's Eve to the third day, a substitute Friday because the first of them fell on a Sunday, and the weekendsHoliday table based on the Executive Yuan's 2026 office calendar
Hong KongThree general holidays: Lunar New Year's Day and the second and third days, 17 to 19 FebruaryGovHK's list of general holidays
SingaporeTwo public holidays, 17 and 18 FebruaryMinistry of Manpower
New York CityPublic schools have closed for Lunar New Year since 8 February 2016, in a system NBC News described as having 1.1 million studentsNBC News

The table shows the festival crossing borders and languages. In mainland China, swapping weekend days for a longer break has its own word, 调休 (tiáoxiū), and the notice uses it. In Singapore the New Year shares the official calendar with Hari Raya Puasa, Vesak Day, Deepavali and Christmas, a mix that Lesson 25 explains. In New York, NBC News reported, elected officials and community groups had campaigned for nearly a decade; before 2016, families who kept children home for the New Year saw it on their attendance record.

The Lantern Festival: 3 March 2026

Wikipedia's article on the New Year counts the festival season from New Year's Eve to the Lantern Festival on the fifteenth day of the first month, the first full moon of the year. Wiktionary defines 元宵 (yuánxiāo) as the night of that day, the Lantern Festival, and also as the sticky rice dumplings traditionally eaten then, which are also called 汤圆 (tāngyuán). In 2026 it fell on Tuesday 3 March. The festival's name in Chinese is 元宵节 (Yuánxiāojié).

Qingming: 5 April 2026

One festival is set by the sun, not the moon. The festival 清明 (Qīngmíng), "clear and bright", is a solar term, so its Western date barely moves: the Observatory's tables put it on 4 April in 2025 and on Sunday 5 April in 2026. Taiwan's official name for the holiday, 民族掃墓節, means National Tomb Sweeping Day, and it is the day families visit and tidy their ancestors' graves. Each government fitted it into the week its own way. Mainland China took 4 to 6 April off, Hong Kong gave the following Monday because the festival fell on a Sunday, and Taiwan joined it to Children's Day for a four-day break from 3 to 6 April. You know both characters: 清 from Lesson 9 and 明 from Lesson 12.

The Dragon Boat Festival: 19 June 2026

The fifth day of the fifth month, 端午节 (Duānwǔjié), was Friday 19 June in 2026: a holiday in Hong Kong and the first day of a three-day weekend in mainland China and in Taiwan. UNESCO inscribed the Dragon Boat Festival in 2009. Its description lists dragon boat races; feasts of rice dumplings, eggs and wine; and customs to ward off evil, such as hanging plants like moxa and calamus over doors. The dumplings are 粽子 (zòngzi), which Wiktionary describes as glutinous rice with different fillings, wrapped in bamboo or reed leaves. UNESCO also records that the hero honoured varies by region: the poet Qu Yuan in Hubei and Hunan, for example, and other local figures elsewhere.

The Mid-Autumn Festival: 25 September 2026

The fifteenth day of the eighth month, a full moon, is 中秋节 (Zhōngqiūjié), the Mid-Autumn Festival, literally "middle of autumn". In 2026 it fell on Friday 25 September. Wikipedia describes it as a harvest festival, also called the Moon Festival, kept with family gatherings, lanterns and 月饼 (yuèbǐng), mooncakes, which Wiktionary defines as a pastry traditionally eaten at this festival. Mainland China took 25 to 27 September off, and Hong Kong made the day after the festival a general holiday. In Taiwan the festival joined the Confucius Birthday holiday on Monday 28 September in a four-day break.

The calendar keeps going after the autumn moon. Hong Kong's 2026 list includes the Chung Yeung Festival, the ninth day of the ninth month, which fell on Sunday 18 October, so the holiday moved to Monday the 19th.

Characters to learn

CharacterTraditionalPinyinMeaningRadicalStrokes
春samechūn (chun1)spring日9
夏samexià (xia4)summer夊10
秋sameqiū (qiu1)autumn禾9
冬samedōng (dong1)winter冫5
节節 (13 strokes)jié (jie2)festival; joint, section艹 (traditional 竹)5
新samexīn (xin1)new斤13
快samekuài (kuai4)fast; happy (in 快乐)忄 (心)7
乐樂 (15 strokes)lè (le4)happy, joyful丿 (traditional 木)5
红紅 (9 strokes)hóng (hong2)red纟 (traditional 糸)6
包samebāo (bao1)bag, packet; to wrap勹5
农農 (13 strokes)nóng (nong2)agriculture, farming冖 (traditional 辰)6
历曆 (16 strokes) for calendar; 歷 (16 strokes) for historylì (li4)calendar; to experience厂4

The four seasons, 春夏秋冬, are often said together in that order. One new character is a merger of the kind you met in Lesson 10: 历 stands for 曆 in 农历 (農曆, the calendar) and for 歷 in 历史 (歷史, history), which you will meet in Lesson 17. And 节 has the bamboo radical in its traditional form 節. Wiktionary explains the character as bamboo plus a sound component, 即, standing for the node of a bamboo stem and by extension a segment or boundary. A festival, if it helps you remember, is a joint in the year.

Dialogue: a New Year video call (written for this course)

On the evening of 17 February, Maya calls her grandmother in Vancouver from Taipei.

SpeakerChinesePinyinEnglish
Maya奶奶,新年快乐!Nǎinai, xīnnián kuàilè!Grandma, Happy New Year!
Grandmother新年快乐!恭喜发财!Xīnnián kuàilè! Gōngxǐ fācái!Happy New Year! Wishing you prosperity!
Maya今年是马年。我很高兴!Jīnnián shì mǎ nián. Wǒ hěn gāoxìng!This year is the Year of the Horse. I'm so happy!
Grandmother台北冷吗?Táiběi lěng ma?Is it cold in Taipei?
Maya不太冷。Bú tài lěng.Not very.
Grandmother你有红包吗?Nǐ yǒu hóngbāo ma?Have you got any red envelopes?
Maya有!我有两个红包!Yǒu! Wǒ yǒu liǎng ge hóngbāo!Yes! I've got two!
Grandmother太好了!中秋节你回家吗?Tài hǎo le! Zhōngqiūjié nǐ huí jiā ma?Wonderful! Are you coming home for the Mid-Autumn Festival?

Three words arrive early: 奶奶 (nǎinai, grandmother on the father's side) and 有 (yǒu, to have), both from Lesson 14, and 回家 (huí jiā, to go home) from Lesson 18. Maya answers the 吗 question by repeating the verb, 有, the usual way to say yes that you met in Lesson 6. And 两个 uses 两, not 二, before a measure word, as in Lesson 11. Notice the tone change in 不太冷: 不 becomes bú before the fourth tone of 太.

Listening: words of the season

  1. Play Wiktionary's recordings of 春, 夏, 秋 and 冬, then say 春夏秋冬 in one breath. Which season has a falling tone? Answer: 夏, xià.
  2. Play 新年 and 快樂, then say 新年快乐 slowly and at speed. Pitch Perfect Pinyin's Unit 11 also plays xīnnián in its 1+2 row.
  3. Play 節, 紅 and 包, then build the words aloud: 春节, 中秋节, 红包. Answers to check yourself: Chūnjié, Zhōngqiūjié, hóngbāo.
  4. Look at the pronunciation table on the 恭喜發財 entry and compare the Mandarin and Cantonese lines. Which English spelling, often seen on New Year banners, comes from the Cantonese? Answer: Kung Hei Fat Choi.

Speaking: greetings for the year

Alone: record the three New Year greetings, then 生日快乐 and 中秋节快乐 (Happy Mid-Autumn Festival). Then record four sentences about the festival dates, with the time first: 今年的春节是二月十七号。 今年的中秋节是九月二十五号。

With a partner: one of you names a festival in English and the other gives its Chinese name, its lunar date and one custom in Chinese or English: 端午节,五月初五,粽子. Then act out the video call, changing the year and the place: next year is the Year of the Goat, 羊年 (yáng nián).

Character writing: twelve characters

Write each character five times, saying it aloud. Stroke counts: 春 9, 夏 10, 秋 9, 冬 5, 节 5, 新 13, 快 7, 乐 5, 红 6, 包 5, 农 6, 历 4. In 冬, the two dots at the bottom come last. In 快, the heart radical 忄 comes first; in mainland China's standard order, which 汉典 codes as 442, that means the left dot, the right dot, then the vertical. Taiwan's standard, as Wikipedia's article on stroke order notes, writes the vertical second. In 包, the outer hook 勹 comes before 巳 inside.

Check the animations on 汉典 (zdic.net) (shown for 节), and write the traditional forms 節, 樂, 紅, 農 and 曆 once each, checking them on Taiwan's 國語小字典 (shown for 節). Then write a New Year card: 新年快乐 at the top, a sentence about the year's animal, and your name.

Common misconceptions

  • "Chinese New Year is always on the same date." It follows the moon: 17 February in 2026 and 6 February in 2027, always on a new moon between 21 January and 20 February.
  • "The lunar calendar ignores the sun." It is lunisolar: the twenty-four solar terms follow the sun, and leap months keep the months in step with the seasons.
  • "Every festival is on a lunar date." Qingming is a solar term, so its Western date hardly moves: 4 April in 2025, 5 April in 2026.
  • "Your zodiac animal is set by the Western year you were born." It is set by the lunar year, which begins in late January or February.
  • "Kung Hei Fat Choi is Mandarin." It comes from the Cantonese reading of 恭喜发财; in Mandarin the greeting is gōngxǐ fācái.
  • "A festival holiday is the same everywhere." In 2026 the New Year gave nine days off in mainland China and Taiwan, three general holidays in Hong Kong and two public holidays in Singapore.

Summing up

The 农历 is a lunisolar calendar: months of 29 or 30 days begin at the new moon, twenty-four solar terms divide the sun's year, and a month without a major solar term becomes a leap month, seven times in nineteen years. Its year of 2026, the year of the Horse, began on 17 February, after the reunion dinner of 除夕 on the 16th, with greetings of 新年快乐 and 恭喜发财 and gifts of 红包. The Lantern Festival followed on 3 March, Qingming on 5 April, the Dragon Boat Festival on 19 June and the Mid-Autumn Festival on 25 September. Mainland China, Taiwan, Hong Kong, Singapore and New York's schools all mark the New Year, each with its own number of days off. Module 5 moves from the calendar to the people you celebrate with: your family, and the verb 有.

Sources

  1. Hong Kong Observatory. (n.d.). Gregorian-Lunar calendar conversion table of 2026 (Bing-wu, year of the Horse). hko.gov.hk
  2. Hong Kong Observatory. (n.d.). Gregorian-Lunar calendar conversion table of 2025 (Yi-si, year of the Snake) [the 6th lunar month appears twice]. hko.gov.hk
  3. Hong Kong Observatory. (n.d.). Gregorian-Lunar calendar conversion table of 2027 (Ding-wei, year of the Goat). hko.gov.hk
  4. Hong Kong Observatory. (n.d.). The 24 solar terms [leap months: 228 major terms and 235 lunar months in 19 years]. hko.gov.hk
  5. General Office of the State Council. (2025, November 4). 国务院办公厅关于2026年部分节假日安排的通知 [Notice on the arrangement of some holidays in 2026]. gov.cn
  6. UNESCO. (2024). Spring festival, social practices of the Chinese people in celebration of traditional new year [Representative List, 19.COM]. ich.unesco.org
  7. UNESCO. (2016). The Twenty-Four Solar Terms, knowledge in China of time and practices developed through observation of the sun's annual motion. ich.unesco.org
  8. UNESCO. (2009). Dragon Boat festival. ich.unesco.org
  9. GovHK. (2025). General holidays for 2026. gov.hk
  10. Ministry of Manpower, Singapore. (n.d.). Public holidays [2026 list]. mom.gov.sg
  11. Kaohsiung City Government. (2025). 115年休假日一覽表 [Holiday table for 2026, based on the Executive Yuan's office calendar]. kcg.gov.tw
  12. NBC News. (2016, February 1). New York City schools to celebrate Lunar New Year with day off for first time. nbcnews.com
  13. Wiktionary contributors. (2026). 農曆; 除夕; 紅包; 恭喜發財; 元宵; 粽子; 月餅; 節 [Definitions and glyph origin]; 新年 and other entries with Mandarin audio. Wiktionary. en.wiktionary.org
  14. Wiktionary contributors. (2026). Kung Hei Fat Choi [English phrase from Cantonese]. Wiktionary. en.wiktionary.org
  15. Wikipedia contributors. (2026). Chinese New Year [dates between 21 January and 20 February; red envelopes]. Wikipedia. en.wikipedia.org
  16. Wikipedia contributors. (2026). Chinese zodiac [the twelve-animal cycle and its two starting points]. Wikipedia. en.wikipedia.org
  17. Wikipedia contributors. (2026). Mid-Autumn Festival. Wikipedia. en.wikipedia.org
  18. Wikipedia contributors. (2026). Stroke order [Taiwan's standard: the vertical of 忄 second]. Wikipedia. en.wikipedia.org
Key terms
农历 (nónglì)
The traditional lunisolar calendar: months follow the moon, solar terms follow the sun, and leap months keep them in step.
二十四节气
The twenty-four solar terms, equal 15-degree steps of the sun's yearly path, such as 立春 (spring commences) and 清明 (clear and bright).
leap month
A lunar month with no major solar term, counted as a repeat of the month before it; seven occur in every nineteen years.
春节 (Chūnjié)
The Spring Festival, the lunar New Year: 17 February 2026, 6 February 2027. Its eve is 除夕.
新年快乐 / 恭喜发财
Happy New Year / wishing you prosperity. The Cantonese reading of 恭喜发财 gives Kung Hei Fat Choi.
红包 (hóngbāo)
A red envelope of money given as a gift at the New Year and on other special occasions.
端午节 / 中秋节
The Dragon Boat Festival (5th day of the 5th month), with races and 粽子; the Mid-Autumn Festival (15th of the 8th month), with the full moon and 月饼.
生肖 (shēngxiào)
The zodiac animal of a lunar year, from a cycle of twelve; 2026 is the Horse and 2027 the Goat.

Module 5: Family, Things and Money

Talking about your family with 有 and 的, counting things with measure words, and handling money and prices in mainland China, Taiwan, Hong Kong, Singapore and Malaysia.

我家有五口人: Family, 有 and 的

  • Use 有 and 没有 to say what you have and what there is, and fix the common error 不有.
  • Name the members of your family with the right words for older and younger and for your father's and mother's sides, including the regional pairs 外婆 and 姥姥.
  • Join nouns with 和, show possession with 的 and drop it where Mandarin speakers do, and say what people do with 工作 and 是.
  • Read and write 家, 有, 没, 爸, 哥, 姐, 弟, 妹, 的, 和, 爷, 奶, 工 and 作.

Three sentences that need fixing

A student writing about her family in Mandarin for the first time handed in these three sentences. Each has a different problem, and fixing them covers most of this lesson.

  1. 我不有姐姐。 She meant: I don't have an older sister.
  2. 我有一个哥哥和我有一个妹妹。 She meant: I have an older brother and I have a younger sister.
  3. 我妈妈的姐姐的女儿十七岁。 She meant: my mom's older sister's daughter is seventeen.

The first two are wrong. The third is grammatical but clumsy, the way "my mother's sister's daughter" is clumsy in English when the word "cousin" exists. This lesson takes them one at a time, and on the way you will learn to name everyone in your family, count them and say what they do.

Bug 1: 有 takes 没, never 不

The verb 有 (yǒu) means "to have": 我有一个哥哥 (Wǒ yǒu yí ge gēge), I have an older brother. Almost every Mandarin verb is made negative with 不, as in 不是 from Lesson 6. The verb 有 is the exception. The Chinese Grammar Wiki puts it plainly: unlike most verbs, 有 is negated with 没 (méi), so "don't have" is 没有 (méiyǒu).

WrongRightMeaning
我不有姐姐。我没有姐姐。 Wǒ méiyǒu jiějie.I don't have an older sister.
他不有工作。他没有工作。 Tā méiyǒu gōngzuò.He doesn't have a job.
我们今天不有课。我们今天没有课。 Wǒmen jīntiān méiyǒu kè.We don't have class today.

To ask, add 吗: 你有哥哥吗? (Nǐ yǒu gēge ma?) Do you have an older brother? As Lesson 6 showed, Mandarin has no all-purpose yes or no, so you answer with the verb itself: 有 for yes, 没有 for no. The same 有 also means "there is" or "there are", which is how 我家有五口人 works, and which Lesson 19 develops.

The point: 不 makes almost any verb negative, but never 有. For "don't have" and "there isn't", always reach for 没有.

Counting the family: 几口人

The usual question about family size is 你家有几口人? (Nǐ jiā yǒu jǐ kǒu rén?), "How many people are there in your family?" Here 口 (kǒu), "mouth", is a measure word, one of the counting words that Lesson 15 explains. Wiktionary lists it as the measure word for family members and populations, with the example 三口之家, "a family of three". That is also why 人口, "person mouths", means population, as you saw in Lesson 1. The answer counts everyone, including you:

我家有五口人:爸爸、妈妈、哥哥、妹妹和我。 (Wǒ jiā yǒu wǔ kǒu rén: bàba, māma, gēge, mèimei hé wǒ.) There are five people in my family: Dad, Mom, my older brother, my younger sister and me.

The general measure word 个 (ge) works too. TaiwanPlus's Legit Mando teaches the question as 你家有幾個人? (Nǐ jiā yǒu jǐ ge rén?), written in traditional characters. In the answer above, the small mark 、 between the names is the enumeration comma, which Chinese uses between the items of a list, with 和 before the last one. Wikipedia's example is 苹果、香蕉、西瓜和橙子, "apples, bananas, watermelons and oranges".

Families in mainland China have been getting smaller. The 2020 census counted an average of 2.62 people in each family household, down from 3.10 in 2010. The National Bureau of Statistics linked the change to people moving more often and to young couples setting up their own homes as housing improved. Taiwan's household register averaged 2.41 people per household at the end of March 2025. The two systems count households differently, so compare the figures loosely.

Family words: older or younger, father's side or mother's side

English has one word for brother and one for sister. Mandarin's everyday words also say who is older, and the words for grandparents say which side of the family they are on.

WordPinyinMeaning
爸爸bàbadad
妈妈 (媽媽)māmamom, from Lesson 2
哥哥gēgeolder brother
姐姐jiějieolder sister
弟弟dìdiyounger brother
妹妹mèimeiyounger sister
爷爷 (爺爺)yéyegrandfather: your father's father
奶奶nǎinaigrandmother: your father's mother
外公, or 姥爷 (姥爺)wàigōng, or lǎoyegrandfather: your mother's father
外婆, or 姥姥wàipó, or lǎolaograndmother: your mother's mother

To ask whether someone has brothers or sisters at all, use 兄弟姐妹 (xiōngdì jiěmèi), which Wiktionary glosses as brothers and sisters, siblings: 你有兄弟姐妹吗? When you talk about one of them, you choose the word by age: 哥哥 or 弟弟, 姐姐 or 妹妹. And 我没有兄弟姐妹 means "I have no brothers or sisters".

Listen to the doubled words and you will hear the second syllable go light, in the neutral tone: bàba, gēge, mèimei. Wiktionary's pronunciation tables also record a variant in Taiwan in which the second syllable rises instead, as in bǎbá, gěgé and měiméi. The neutral-tone reading is standard on both sides, and it is the one to learn.

外婆 or 姥姥? A textbook argument from 2018

Your mother's parents have two pairs of names, and in June 2018 the choice between them made news. BBC News Chinese reported that the Shanghai Education Publishing House had changed every 外婆 to 姥姥 in a story in its second-grade Chinese reader. The change set off what the BBC called a north-south argument on social media. Many people in Shanghai, where 外婆 is the more common word, objected. One comment quoted by the BBC asked why, if "the north says 姥姥 and the south says 外婆", the southern word should count as dialect. The publisher replied that the change was for reading lessons: 外, 婆 and 姥 were all on the second-grade character list, and 外 and 婆 had already appeared earlier in the book.

The BBC also asked Xiang Mengbing, a professor of Chinese at Peking University. He said 姥姥 is used mainly in Beijing, Hebei and the areas around them, and 外婆 mainly in many southern areas, but that both entered the standard language long ago. In his words, both are standard Mandarin and differ only in flavour, one southern and one from Beijing. So use whichever your family uses. The same article mentions other north-south arguments about food, including whether to eat 元宵 or 汤圆 at the Lantern Festival of Lesson 13.

Bug 2: 和 joins nouns, not sentences

The second sentence, 我有一个哥哥和我有一个妹妹, uses 和 (hé), "and", to join two whole sentences. The Chinese Grammar Wiki warns against exactly this: 和 is mainly used to link nouns, and learners should not use it to link verbs or whole sentences. The fix is to say 有 once and join the two nouns:

我有一个哥哥和一个妹妹。 (Wǒ yǒu yí ge gēge hé yí ge mèimei.) I have an older brother and a younger sister.

When you need to join two separate statements, Mandarin simply puts them side by side, often with 也 (yě, also) from Lesson 4: 我有一个哥哥,也有一个妹妹. An English "and" between two verbs, as in "I went home and ate", takes no 和 in Mandarin. One regional note: Wiktionary records that when 和 means "and", its standard reading in Taiwan is hàn, while hé is standard on the mainland and a variant in Taiwan. You will hear both, and both are written 和.

Bug 3: the 的 chain

The particle 的 (de) marks possession, like 's in English: 老师的名字 (lǎoshī de míngzi), the teacher's name. The third sentence, 我妈妈的姐姐的女儿十七岁, uses 的 correctly. Its problem is that Mandarin has a single word for that person. She is your 表姐 (biǎojiě), which Wiktionary defines as a female cousin older than you, the daughter of your mother's sibling or of your father's sister. If she is younger than you, she is your 表妹 (biǎomèi). The fixed sentence is 我表姐十七岁 (Wǒ biǎojiě shíqī suì).

Cousins show how exact Mandarin kin words are, and Wiktionary's definitions split them into two kinds. Children of your father's brothers are 堂 cousins, so 堂哥 (tánggē) is an older male cousin through your father's brother. All your other cousins are 表 cousins. The words carry information that the English word "cousin" leaves out.

Look again at 我表姐: the 的 has gone. The Chinese Grammar Wiki explains that Mandarin usually drops 的 between a pronoun and a close relationship, such as family, close friends or a boyfriend or girlfriend, and before an institution you belong to, such as your school or workplace. Its examples include 我家 (my home), 你哥哥 (your older brother), 她妈妈 (her mom) and 我们学校 (our school), and it notes that keeping 的 in these sounds less natural. With things, and with people who are not close to you, 的 stays: 我的名字, 老师的书 (lǎoshī de shū, the teacher's book).

Family words for people outside the family

Some kin words also work as polite forms of address. Wiktionary gives 叔叔 (shūshu) as your father's younger brother and also as a way to address a man around your father's age. It gives 阿姨 (āyí) as your mother's sister and also as "auntie" for any woman around your mother's age. A child can greet a parent's friend with 叔叔好 or 阿姨好, the same pattern as 老师好 in Lesson 5. Wiktionary also records 爷爷 as a term of address for an elderly man.

Jobs: 工作

The word 工作 (gōngzuò) is both a verb, to work, and a noun, a job. To ask about someone's job, say 你爸爸做什么工作? (Nǐ bàba zuò shénme gōngzuò?), "What work does your dad do?", with 做 (zuò, to do) from Lesson 18. Answer with 是 and a job word.

JobPinyinMeaning
老师 (老師)lǎoshīteacher
医生 (醫生)yīshēngdoctor
护士 (護士)hùshìnurse
工程师 (工程師)gōngchéngshīengineer
司机 (司機)sījīdriver
学生 (學生)xuéshengstudent

Then add a description with 很 from Lesson 7: 我妈妈是医生,她工作很忙。 (Wǒ māma shì yīshēng, tā gōngzuò hěn máng.) My mom is a doctor, and she is very busy at work. To say someone has no job, use the fix from Bug 1: 他没有工作.

Characters to learn

CharacterTraditionalPinyinMeaningRadicalStrokes
家samejiā (jia1)home, family宀10
有sameyǒu (you3)to have; there is月6
没沒 (7 strokes)méi (mei2)not (with 有)氵 (水)7
爸samebà (ba4)dad父8
哥samegē (ge1)older brother口10
姐samejiě (jie3)older sister女8
弟samedì (di4)younger brother弓7
妹samemèi (mei4)younger sister女8
的samede (de5)possessive particle, like 's白8
和samehé (he2); hàn in Taiwan for "and"and; with口8
爷爺 (13 strokes)yé (ye2)grandfather, in 爷爷父6
奶samenǎi (nai3)grandmother, in 奶奶; milk女5
工samegōng (gong1)work工3
作samezuò (zuo4)to do, make; work, in 工作亻 (人)7

Several of these are built the way Lesson 9 described, with one part for meaning and one for sound, and Wiktionary's notes on their origins show how far the clues go. The character 爸 is 父 (father) over 巴 (bā), and 奶 is 女 (woman) with 乃 (nǎi), an exact sound match. In 姐 (女 with 且) and 妹 (女 with 未, wèi), the sound clue only rhymes with today's reading. The character 哥 is 可 stacked on 可, and Wiktionary notes that its original meaning was "to sing", long before it meant older brother.

Two more carry old stories. The character 家 looks like a roof, 宀, over a pig, 豕; Wiktionary's note on its oldest forms says the lower part began as a sound component, a word for a boar, which was later written as 豕. And the 月 at the bottom of 有 is not the moon: Wiktionary explains it as a squeezed form of 肉, meat, under a hand.

Dialogue: a family photo (written for this course)

SpeakerChinesePinyinEnglish
王小文你家有几口人?Nǐ jiā yǒu jǐ kǒu rén?How many people are there in your family?
Maya我家有五口人:爸爸、妈妈、哥哥、妹妹和我。Wǒ jiā yǒu wǔ kǒu rén: bàba, māma, gēge, mèimei hé wǒ.Five: my dad, my mom, my older brother, my younger sister and me.
王小文你有姐姐吗?Nǐ yǒu jiějie ma?Do you have an older sister?
Maya没有。你呢?Méiyǒu. Nǐ ne?No. What about you?
王小文我有一个弟弟。我家有六口人:爷爷、奶奶、爸爸、妈妈、弟弟和我。Wǒ yǒu yí ge dìdi. Wǒ jiā yǒu liù kǒu rén: yéye, nǎinai, bàba, māma, dìdi hé wǒ.I have a younger brother. There are six of us: my grandpa, my grandma, my dad, my mom, my younger brother and me.
Maya你爸爸妈妈做什么工作?Nǐ bàba māma zuò shénme gōngzuò?What do your mom and dad do?
王小文我爸爸是司机,我妈妈是老师。他们工作都很忙。Wǒ bàba shì sījī, wǒ māma shì lǎoshī. Tāmen gōngzuò dōu hěn máng.My dad is a driver and my mom is a teacher. They're both very busy at work.
王小文她是谁?Tā shì shéi?Who's she?
Maya她是我妈妈的姐姐的女儿。Tā shì wǒ māma de jiějie de nǚ'ér.She's my mom's older sister's daughter.
王小文哦,是你表姐!Ò, shì nǐ biǎojiě!Oh, she's your cousin!
Maya对!她十七岁。Duì! Tā shíqī suì.Right! She's seventeen.

Find the three fixes from the start of the lesson: 没有 as the answer "no", 和 only before the last noun of each list, and 表姐 in place of the 的 chain. Two words arrive early: 做 (zuò, to do) from Lesson 18 and 谁 (shéi, who) from Lesson 20. Notice also 我爸爸 and 我妈妈 with no 的, and 一个 read yí ge, with the tone change of 一 from Lesson 4.

Listening: family words

  1. Play Wiktionary's recordings of 爸爸, 哥哥, 姐姐, 弟弟 and 妹妹. Write the tone of each first syllable and check that the second is light. Answers: bà 4, gē 1, jiě 3, dì 4, mèi 4.
  2. Play 爺爺, 奶奶 and 姥姥. Which begins with a rising tone? Answer: 爺爺, yéye. Then find the Taiwan variant yěyé in the pronunciation table on the 爺爺 page.
  3. Play 有 (the first recording, yǒu), 沒有 and 工作, then say aloud: 我有工作。 我没有工作。 他没有哥哥。
  4. Play 叔叔 and 阿姨, then greet two family friends: 叔叔好! 阿姨好! Which word has no neutral tone? Answer: 阿姨, āyí.
  5. Watch Legit Mando, episode 9 on TaiwanPlus, free and without an account. The phrase lesson starts at 0:11 and the writing segment at 5:55. Repeat the question 你家有幾個人? after the host each time you hear it, and in the writing segment compare 幾個 with the simplified 几个.

Speaking: describe a family photo

Alone: find a family photo, or sketch a family tree on paper, and record a description of at least six sentences: how many people there are (我家有四口人), who they are, one sentence with 没有, one list joined with 和, and two jobs with 是. If you prefer not to describe your own family, invent one; the grammar is the same.

With a partner: interview each other with 你家有几口人? 你有兄弟姐妹吗? and 你爸爸妈妈做什么工作? Then describe your partner's family back to them in three sentences, starting 你家有, and let them correct anything you got wrong.

Character writing: fourteen characters

Write each character five times, saying it aloud. Stroke counts: 家 10, 有 6, 没 7, 爸 8, 哥 10, 姐 8, 弟 7, 妹 8, 的 8, 和 8, 爷 6, 奶 5, 工 3, 作 7. In 有, 汉典's order begins with the horizontal and then the long slanting stroke, coded 132511. In 的, write 白 first; the dot inside 勺 is the very last stroke. In 和, write 禾 before 口. In 奶, the right side 乃 takes only two strokes. In 哥, write the upper 可 first.

Check the animations on 汉典 (zdic.net) (shown for 爷), and write the traditional forms 沒 and 爺 once each, checking them on Taiwan's 國語小字典 (shown for 爺). Then write the three fixed sentences from the start of the lesson in characters.

Common misconceptions

  • "有 is made negative with 不, like other verbs." It takes 没: 没有. 不有 is always wrong.
  • "和 works wherever English uses and." It joins nouns. Between verbs or whole sentences, Mandarin uses no 和.
  • "我的妈妈 is wrong." It is not wrong, but with family and other close relationships Mandarin usually drops 的: 我妈妈, 我家.
  • "哥哥 means brother." It means older brother. A younger brother is 弟弟, and brothers and sisters in general are 兄弟姐妹.
  • "外婆 is dialect and 姥姥 is the standard word, or the other way round." Both are standard Mandarin, with a southern and a Beijing flavour.
  • "Family words are only for relatives." 叔叔, 阿姨 and 爷爷 are also polite ways to address adults who are not related to you.

The short version

The verb 有 means to have and there is, and its negative is 没有, never 不有. Families are counted with 口: 你家有几口人? 我家有五口人. Everyday kin words say who is older, 哥哥 and 弟弟, 姐姐 and 妹妹, and which side of the family: 爷爷 and 奶奶 on your father's side, 外公 and 外婆 or 姥爷 and 姥姥 on your mother's. Cousins split into 堂 cousins, through your father's brothers, and 表 cousins, everyone else. The particle 的 marks possession but usually drops with family and institutions: 我妈妈, 我们学校. The word 和 joins nouns only. And 工作 means work, as a verb and as a noun, with job words after 是. Lesson 15 turns to the measure words that 口 and 个 belong to.

Sources

  1. AllSet Learning. (n.d.). Expressing possession with "you" [including negating 有 with 没]. Chinese Grammar Wiki. resources.allsetlearning.com
  2. AllSet Learning. (n.d.). Expressing close possession without "de". Chinese Grammar Wiki. resources.allsetlearning.com
  3. AllSet Learning. (n.d.). Expressing "and" with "he". Chinese Grammar Wiki. resources.allsetlearning.com
  4. BBC News 中文. (2018, June 22). 出版社改教材引發「外婆」與「姥姥」的南北之爭 [A publisher's textbook change sets off a north-south argument over 外婆 and 姥姥]. bbc.com
  5. National Bureau of Statistics of China. (2021, May 11). 第七次全国人口普查公报(第二号)[Communiqué of the seventh national population census, no. 2]. stats.gov.cn
  6. National Bureau of Statistics of China. (2021, May 11). 第七次全国人口普查主要数据情况 [Main data of the seventh national population census]. stats.gov.cn
  7. Department of Household Registration, Ministry of the Interior. (2025). 人口統計季刊 [Demographic quarterly], spring 2025. ris.gov.tw
  8. Wiktionary contributors. (2026). 口 [as a measure word]; 兄弟姐妹; 表姐; 表妹; 堂哥; 叔叔; 阿姨; 爺爺; 外婆; 姥姥; 工作; 和 [readings]; glyph origins of 爸, 奶, 姐, 妹, 哥, 家 and 有; entries with Mandarin audio. Wiktionary. en.wiktionary.org
  9. Wikipedia contributors. (2026). Chinese punctuation [the enumeration comma]. Wikipedia. en.wikipedia.org
  10. TaiwanPlus. (n.d.). Legit Mando, episode 9: How many people do you have in your family? Public Television Service. taiwanplus.com
  11. 汉典 [Zdic]. (n.d.). 有 [stroke order 132511]; 爷. zdic.net
Key terms
有 / 没有
To have; there is or there are. The negative is always 没有, never 不有: 我没有姐姐.
口 (kǒu)
The measure word for members of a household: 你家有几口人? 我家有五口人. The general 个 also works.
的 (de)
Marks possession, like 's: 老师的名字. Usually dropped with close family and institutions: 我妈妈, 我们学校.
和 (hé)
And, between nouns only: 我有一个哥哥和一个妹妹. In Taiwan the standard reading for 'and' is hàn.
哥哥 / 姐姐 / 弟弟 / 妹妹
Older brother / older sister / younger brother / younger sister. Brothers and sisters in general are 兄弟姐妹.
爷爷 / 奶奶
Your father's father and mother. 爷爷 is also a polite way to address an elderly man.
外公, 外婆 / 姥爷, 姥姥
Your mother's father and mother: the first pair with a southern flavour, the second with a Beijing one. Both are standard Mandarin.
堂 and 表 cousins
堂: children of your father's brothers, as in 堂哥. 表: all other cousins, as in 表姐 and 表妹.
叔叔 / 阿姨
Father's younger brother / mother's sister; also polite forms of address for adults of your parents' generation.
工作 (gōngzuò)
To work; a job. 你爸爸做什么工作? 他是老师.

Measure Words: 个 and the Specific Ones

  • Count things with number, measure word and noun, using 两 and the tone changes of 一 correctly.
  • Compare the common measure words 个, 本, 张, 条, 只, 双, 件, 杯, 位, 口 and 辆, and choose the right one for an everyday noun, or fall back on 个.
  • Use measure words after 这, 那, 哪 and 几, and use 这些, 那些 and 一些.
  • Read and write 个, 本, 张, 只, 条, 杯, 件, 位, 这, 那, 些, 狗 and 猫.

A sheet of paper, a glass of water

English already has measure words, but only for some nouns. You cannot say "a furniture" or "three waters". You say a piece of furniture, two sheets of paper, three glasses of water. The Chinese Grammar Wiki uses exactly these English examples to explain Mandarin, where the same thing happens with nearly every noun. To count books you cannot say 三书. You need a measure word between the number and the noun: 三本书 (sān běn shū), three books.

This lesson compares the measure words you will need most, from 个, which goes with almost anything, to specific ones such as 本 for books, 张 for flat things and 条 for long, thin ones. It also covers the other words that call for a measure word: 这 (this), 那 (that), 哪 (which) and 几 (how many).

The pattern: number, measure word, noun

Linguists call these words classifiers, and the Chinese name is 量词 (liàngcí). Wikipedia's article on Chinese classifiers sums up the rule: when a noun comes after a number, or after a word such as this or that, a classifier normally has to go in front of it. When a noun stands alone, with no number or demonstrative, it needs none, so 我有书 (I have books) is fine.

ChinesePinyinEnglish
一个人yí ge rénone person
两本书liǎng běn shūtwo books
三张票sān zhāng piàothree tickets
四只猫sì zhī māofour cats
五杯水wǔ bēi shuǐfive glasses of water

Two rules from earlier lessons apply. Before a measure word, two is 两, not 二, as Lesson 11 showed: 两个人, never 二个人. And 一 changes its tone before the measure word, as in Lesson 4: it becomes yí before a fourth tone (一个 yí ge, 一件 yí jiàn) and yì before the other tones (一本 yì běn, 一张 yì zhāng). A few nouns are measure words themselves. Wiktionary lists 年 as the classifier for years, so two years is simply 两年. Months are different: six months is 六个月, as Lesson 12 showed.

What matters here: in Mandarin a number almost never sits directly in front of a noun. Something stands between them, and if you cannot remember the right measure word, 个 will usually get your meaning across.

Eleven measure words compared

Wikipedia reports that ordinary dictionaries list 120 to 150 classifiers, but that the linguist Mary Erbaugh has argued that about two dozen core classifiers account for most of the classifiers people actually use. The table below covers eleven of the most useful. The nouns in it come with pinyin; many of their characters appear later in the course.

Measure wordWhat it countsExamples
个 (個) gePeople and a great many other things; the general measure word一个人 yí ge rén, a person; 五个星期 wǔ ge xīngqī, five weeks
口 kǒuMembers of a household五口人 wǔ kǒu rén, five people (in a family)
位 wèiPeople, politely一位老师 yí wèi lǎoshī, a teacher
本 běnBooks and other bound volumes三本书 sān běn shū, three books
张 (張) zhāngFlat things一张纸 yì zhāng zhǐ, a sheet of paper; 一张床 yì zhāng chuáng, a bed; 两张票 liǎng zhāng piào, two tickets
条 (條) tiáoLong, thin things, and some animals一条路 yì tiáo lù, a road; 一条河 yì tiáo hé, a river; 一条鱼 yì tiáo yú, a fish; 一条裤子 yì tiáo kùzi, a pair of trousers
只 (隻) zhīMost animals and birds; one of a pair一只猫 yì zhī māo, a cat; 一只鸟 yì zhī niǎo, a bird; 一只鞋 yì zhī xié, one shoe
双 (雙) shuāngPairs一双鞋 yì shuāng xié, a pair of shoes
件 jiànClothes, pieces of luggage, matters一件衣服 yí jiàn yīfu, an item of clothing; 一件事 yí jiàn shì, a matter
杯 bēiCups and glasses of a drink一杯水 yì bēi shuǐ, a glass of water; 一杯茶 yì bēi chá, a cup of tea
辆 (輛) liàngWheeled vehicles一辆车 yí liàng chē, a car

Read down the second column and you can see the logic: shape for 张 and 条, number for 只 and 双, a container for 杯. The logic has limits, though. Trousers take 条 in Mandarin but are a "pair" in English, and Wiktionary lists two Mandarin measure words for dogs, 只 and 条. Wikipedia notes that for cars some people say 部, others 台 and others 辆, while Cantonese uses 架. Choice can also change the meaning: a person is 一个人 normally, 口 when you count a household and 位 when you are being polite.

Why 只 holds one bird

The traditional form of the measure word 只 is 隻, and Wiktionary's note on its origin is easy to remember. The character is a short-tailed bird, 隹, above a hand, 又: to hold one bird is 隻, and to hold two birds is 雙, a pair. So 隻 counts animals and one of a pair, such as one shoe or one hand, and 雙 counts the pair.

Simplification merged this character with another. Simplified 只 stands for 隻 (zhī), the measure word, and also for 只 (zhǐ), which Wiktionary defines as only, just or merely. Taiwan and Hong Kong write the two differently: 兩隻狗 is two dogs, but 我只有一本書 is "I only have one book". Notice the tones, too: the measure word is zhī, first tone, and "only" is zhǐ, third tone.

个: the safe default

The Chinese Grammar Wiki calls 个 the most commonly used measure word and says it can be used "in a pinch" for any noun when you cannot think of a more precise one; you may not sound as polished, but you will be understood. For many nouns, it adds, 个 is the only correct measure word: 一个人, 一个朋友 (a friend), 一个星期 (a week).

Native speakers lean on it too. Wikipedia's article describes research showing that adults and children use 个 when they do not know the right classifier, and even when they do but are speaking quickly or informally. Most speakers, asked directly, can name the correct classifier and say it is required, yet still use 个 in conversation without noticing. Linguists call this classifier neutralization, 量词个化 in Chinese. In everyday speech 个 ends up far more frequent than any specialized measure word.

The tone of 个 deserves a note. Dictionaries give it as gè, fourth tone, which is why 一个 is yí ge. As a measure word, though, it is usually light, ge, and Wiktionary records that light reading as a very common variant for classifiers. The Chinese Grammar Wiki writes it as a neutral tone after 这 and 那 for the same reason.

这, 那 and 哪 need measure words too

A number is not the only word that calls for a measure word. The Chinese Grammar Wiki explains that 这 (zhè, this) and 那 (nà, that) also need one before a noun, and that the same holds for 哪 (nǎ, which): 这本书 (this book), 那个人 (that person), 哪只猫? (which cat?). When this or that and a number come together, Wikipedia gives the order as demonstrative, number, measure word, noun, the same as English "these three cats": 这三只猫 (zhè sān zhī māo).

In speech you will also hear zhèi, nèi and něi before measure words. Wiktionary lists zhèige and nèige as readings of 这个 and 那个 alongside zhège and nàge, and něige alongside nǎge for 哪个. Both pronunciations are correct; learn to recognize the ei versions, and use whichever your teacher or recording uses.

For more than one, 些 (xiē) replaces the number and the measure word. These are 这些 (zhèxiē), those are 那些 (nàxiē), and some is 一些, written yīxiē but, as the Chinese Grammar Wiki notes, pronounced yìxiē because of the tone change of 一: 这些书 (these books), 那些人 (those people), 一些水 (some water). To ask how many, put 几 where the number goes and keep the measure word: 你有几只猫? (Nǐ yǒu jǐ zhī māo?) How many cats do you have? The Chinese Grammar Wiki uses 几 for numbers expected to be small and 多少 for larger ones, which Lesson 16 uses for prices.

Characters to learn

CharacterTraditionalPinyinMeaningRadicalStrokes
个個 (10 strokes)gè (ge4), usually light: gegeneral measure word人3
本sameběn (ben3)measure word for books; root, origin木5
张張 (11 strokes)zhāng (zhang1)measure word for flat things; a common surname弓7
只隻 (10 strokes) for the measure word; 只 for "only"zhī (zhi1); zhǐ (zhi3) for "only"measure word for animals and one of a pair; only口5
条條 (11 strokes)tiáo (tiao2)measure word for long, thin things木7
杯samebēi (bei1)cup, glass; a cup of木8
件samejiàn (jian4)measure word for clothes, luggage and matters亻 (人)6
位samewèi (wei4)polite measure word for people; position亻 (人)7
这這 (11 strokes)zhè (zhe4); zhèi in speechthis辶 (辵)7
那samenà (na4); nèi in speechthat阝 (邑)6 (7 in Taiwan's count)
些samexiē (xie1)some; a few (in 这些, 那些, 一些)二 (止 in mainland dictionaries)8
狗samegǒu (gou3)dog犭 (犬)8
猫貓 (16 strokes)māo (mao1)cat犭 (traditional 豸)11

Wiktionary's notes on origins give some useful clues. The character 本 is a tree, 木, with an extra stroke marking its roots, which is why it also means root or origin. In 狗, the dog radical 犭 gives the meaning and 句 gives the sound, and in 猫 the sound comes from 苗 (miáo), close to māo. The traditional 貓 uses a different animal radical, 豸, from the simplified 猫. The character 位 is a person, 亻, with 立 (to stand), and 杯 is wood, 木, with the sound component 不.

Dialogue: at Maya's house (written for this course)

SpeakerChinesePinyinEnglish
王小文你家有狗吗?Nǐ jiā yǒu gǒu ma?Do you have a dog?
Maya有。我家有两只狗和一只猫。Yǒu. Wǒ jiā yǒu liǎng zhī gǒu hé yì zhī māo.Yes. We have two dogs and a cat.
王小文那只猫叫什么名字?Nà zhī māo jiào shénme míngzi?What's that cat called?
Maya叫大王!Jiào Dàwáng!He's called Big King!
王小文这些书都是你的吗?Zhèxiē shū dōu shì nǐ de ma?Are all these books yours?
Maya这三本书是我的,那本书是我哥哥的。Zhè sān běn shū shì wǒ de, nà běn shū shì wǒ gēge de.These three books are mine; that book is my brother's.
王小文那张桌子真大!Nà zhāng zhuōzi zhēn dà!That table is really big!
Maya你要一杯水吗?Nǐ yào yì bēi shuǐ ma?Would you like a glass of water?
王小文好,谢谢!Hǎo, xièxie!Yes, thanks!

Count the measure words: 只 for the animals, 本 for books, 张 for the table, 杯 for the water. Notice 这三本书, with the order this, three, measure word, book; and 我的 and 我哥哥的 used on their own to mean "mine" and "my brother's". Two words arrive early: 要 (yào, to want) from Lesson 16 and 桌子 (zhuōzi, table) from Lesson 19.

Listening: measure words aloud

  1. Play Wiktionary's recordings of 個, 這個 and 那個. Is 個 a full fourth tone in 這個, or light? Answer: light, zhège and nàge. Then read the pronunciation tables on those pages and find the alternative readings zhèige and nèige.
  2. Play 本, 張, 隻, 條, 杯, 件 and 位, and write each tone. Answers: běn 3, zhāng 1, zhī 1, tiáo 2, bēi 1, jiàn 4, wèi 4. Then say each with 一 in front, changing its tone: yì běn, yì zhāng, yì zhī, yì tiáo, yì bēi, yí jiàn, yí wèi.
  3. Play 狗 and 貓 (the first Mandarin recording on each page), then say 两只狗 and 三只猫. Which animal has a third tone? Answer: the dog, gǒu.
  4. Play 一些 and 這些. What tone does 一 have in the recording of 一些? Answer: fourth, yìxiē, because 些 is a first tone.
  5. Self-dictation: record yourself reading 一张票, 两本书, 三杯茶, 四只鸟, 五条路 and 六件衣服, then play the recording back the next day and write the phrases in characters and pinyin.

Speaking: what is on your desk

Alone: look at your desk, bag or room and record at least eight phrases with a number, a measure word and a noun, using 个 whenever you do not know the specific word: 三本书, 两张纸, 一杯水, 一个手机 (yí ge shǒujī, a phone). Then record three sentences with 这 or 那: 这本书是我的。

With a partner: play a guessing game. One of you hides some objects and the other asks questions with 几 and a measure word: 你有几本书? 你有几支笔? (zhī bǐ, pens). Answer with full phrases: 我有两本书. Swap roles, and score a point for every correct measure word other than 个.

Character writing: thirteen characters

Write each character five times, saying it aloud. Stroke counts: 个 3, 本 5, 张 7, 只 5, 条 7, 杯 8, 件 6, 位 7, 这 7, 那 6, 些 8, 狗 8, 猫 11. In 本, the short horizontal across the foot of the tree is the last stroke. In 这, write 文 first and the walking radical 辶 last; Wikipedia's summary of stroke-order rules gives this as "bottom enclosures last", as in 道 and 建. In 狗 and 猫, the three strokes of 犭 come first. In 那, the right-hand 阝 is two strokes in the mainland count and three in Taiwan's, as Lesson 8 explained.

Check the animations on 汉典 (zdic.net) (shown for 这), and write the traditional forms 個, 張, 隻, 條, 這 and 貓 once each, checking them on Taiwan's 國語小字典 (shown for 隻). Then write five phrases about your own room with five different measure words.

Common misconceptions

  • "A number can go straight in front of a noun." Almost never: 三本书, not 三书. A few nouns, such as 年, are measure words themselves: 两年.
  • "这 and 那 work like English this and that." They also need a measure word: 这本书, 那个人.
  • "个 is only for people." It is the general measure word, the only correct one for many nouns and a workable fallback for most others.
  • "Each noun has exactly one measure word." Many have more than one: dogs take 只 or 条, cars 辆, 部 or 台, and people 个, 口 or 位, depending on what you mean.
  • "只 always means only." In simplified Chinese it is also the measure word for animals, which traditional writing spells 隻.
  • "Two of something is 二个." Before a measure word, two is 两: 两个, 两本, 两只.

Where this leaves us

Mandarin counts nouns with a measure word between the number and the noun: 三本书, 两张票, 一杯水, with 两 for two and the tone change of 一. Each measure word fits a kind of thing: 本 for books, 张 for flat things, 条 for long, thin things, 只 for animals and one of a pair, 双 for pairs, 件 for clothes and matters, 杯 for cups, 位 for people politely, 口 for a household and 辆 for vehicles. When unsure, use 个, which native speakers also use far more than any other. The words 这, 那, 哪 and 几 take measure words too, and 些 makes 这些, 那些 and 一些. Lesson 16 puts numbers and measure words to work with money.

Sources

  1. AllSet Learning. (n.d.). Measure words for counting; Measure word "ge"; Measure words in quantity questions. Chinese Grammar Wiki. resources.allsetlearning.com
  2. AllSet Learning. (n.d.). Measure words with "this" and "that". Chinese Grammar Wiki. resources.allsetlearning.com
  3. AllSet Learning. (n.d.). Expressing "some" with "yixie". Chinese Grammar Wiki. resources.allsetlearning.com
  4. Wikipedia contributors. (2026). Chinese classifier [usage; neutralization; variation in usage; number of classifiers]. Wikipedia. en.wikipedia.org
  5. Wiktionary contributors. (2026). 個; 隻 [glyph origin]; 只; 條; 張; 本; 件; 位; 年; 狗; 貓; 書; 車; 鞋; 路; 河; 魚; 這個; 那個; 哪個; 一些 [classifiers, readings and Mandarin audio]. Wiktionary. en.wiktionary.org
  6. Wikipedia contributors. (2026). Stroke order [basic rules: bottom enclosures last]. Wikipedia. en.wikipedia.org
  7. 汉典 [Zdic]. (n.d.). 这; 本 [stroke order]. zdic.net
Key terms
measure word (量词 liàngcí)
A word between a number or demonstrative and a noun: 三本书, 这个人. Linguists call it a classifier.
个 (ge)
The general measure word, the only correct one for many nouns and a fallback for most others; usually light in tone.
本 / 张 / 条
Books / flat things such as paper, beds and tickets / long, thin things such as roads, rivers and trousers.
只 (隻) / 双 (雙)
Most animals, and one of a pair / a pair: 一只猫, 一只鞋, 一双鞋.
件 / 杯 / 辆
Clothes and matters / cups and glasses of a drink / wheeled vehicles.
位 / 口
People, politely: 一位老师 / members of a household: 五口人.
这 / 那 / 哪 + measure word
This, that, which: 这本书, 那个人, 哪只猫. Often zhèi, nèi and něi in speech.
这些 / 那些 / 一些
These / those / some. 些 replaces both the number and the measure word: 这些书.
两 before measure words
Two is 两, not 二, before a measure word: 两个人, 两本书.
classifier neutralization (量词个化)
Using 个 in place of a specific measure word, which native speakers often do in quick, informal speech.

多少钱? Money, Prices and Shopping

  • Read prices written with 元, 角 and 分 and say them the everyday way with 块 and 毛, including the short forms of speech.
  • Ask about prices and bargain with 多少钱, 太贵了 and 便宜点吧, understand discounts written with 折, and use 要, 买, 卖 and 给.
  • Name the currencies of mainland China, Taiwan, Hong Kong, Singapore and Malaysia, and describe how many people in mainland China now pay.
  • Read and write 钱, 块, 毛, 元, 买, 卖, 贵, 便, 宜, 要, 衣, 服, 机, 给 and 打.

One price tag, three readings

A price tag at a market stall in Beijing says ¥35.50. Here are three ways to read it aloud, and all of them are correct.

ChinesePinyinWhen you hear it
三十五元五角sānshíwǔ yuán wǔ jiǎoThe written, formal reading, as on a receipt or in an announcement
三十五块五毛sānshíwǔ kuài wǔ máoThe everyday spoken reading
三十五块五sānshíwǔ kuài wǔThe everyday short form, with the last unit left off

The problem for a learner is that the tag shows none of these words. Mandarin has two sets of names for the same units of money, one mainly for writing and one for speech, and speakers often drop the last unit. This lesson works out how to read any price, then uses the answer to ask, bargain, pay and understand a sale sign.

Two sets of names for the same money

Mainland China's currency is the 人民币 (rénmínbì), "the people's currency". Its main unit is the 元 (yuán), and Wikipedia's article on the renminbi lists 块 (kuài) as its everyday name. One yuan is 10 角 (jiǎo), called 毛 (máo) in speech, and 100 分 (fēn), although fen coins are now rarely used. The banknotes in common use run from ¥1 to ¥100.

ValueWrittenSpoken
¥1元 yuán块 kuài
¥0.10角 jiǎo毛 máo
¥0.01分 fēn分 fēn

The Chinese Grammar Wiki's page on counting money gives the spoken pattern as number, 块, number, 毛: 两块五毛 (liǎng kuài wǔ máo) is ¥2.50, and 三块八毛六 (sān kuài bā máo liù) is ¥3.86, with the 分 left unsaid. Three details follow from its examples.

  • Two kuai is 两块. 块 is counted like any measure word, so ¥2.50 is 两块五, not 二块五.
  • The last unit can drop. When the smaller amount is a number of tenths, you can just say the number: ¥3.80 is 三块八.
  • A final 2 is 二. When the last digit is a two, it is said 二, so ¥2.20 is 两块二.

The wiki compares 块 and 元 to "bucks" and "dollars" in American English, or "quid" and "pounds" in British English, while noting that 块 fits more situations than "bucks" does. You will hear 块 almost everywhere people talk, and see 元 on receipts, notices and price lists.

Bottom line: write 元 and 角, say 块 and 毛, and drop the last unit whenever the amount is still clear.

Five places, five currencies

PlaceCurrencyUnits and everyday words
Mainland China人民币 rénmínbì (renminbi)元, spoken 块; 角, spoken 毛; 分
Taiwan新台币 Xīntáibì (traditional 新臺幣, the New Taiwan dollar)元 or 塊 in Mandarin, with 毛 for a tenth; coins in common use are NT$1, 5, 10 and 50
Hong Kong港元 Gǎngyuán, also 港币 Gǎngbì (the Hong Kong dollar)元; 毫 for ten cents and 仙 for a cent
Singapore新加坡元 Xīnjiāpō Yuán (the Singapore dollar)元; 100 cents to the dollar
Malaysia令吉 lìngjí (the ringgit, written RM)100 sen to the ringgit

The pattern of Mandarin money talk is the same in every one of these places: a number, a unit word, and 多少钱 to ask. What changes is the currency and some local words. Wikipedia gives the Taiwanese Hokkien nickname for the New Taiwan dollar as 箍 (kho͘), and Hong Kong's ten-cent unit is 毫, so expect local words when you listen.

Asking and bargaining

To ask a price, name the thing and add 多少钱 (duōshao qián), "how much money?". The Chinese Grammar Wiki's examples include 这杯咖啡多少钱? (Zhè bēi kāfēi duōshao qián?), "How much is this cup of coffee?", and 这件衣服多少钱? (Zhè jiàn yīfu duōshao qián?), "How much is this item of clothing?". Notice the measure words from Lesson 15. Wiktionary records 多少 as duōshao on the mainland and duōshǎo, with a full third tone, in Taiwan.

Then react. The wiki gives 太 + adjective + 了 for "too", noting that it often sounds like a complaint: 太贵了! (Tài guì le!), "That's too expensive!". To ask for a lower price, put 一点, often shortened to 点, after the adjective. The wiki's own example is 老板,便宜点吧 (Lǎobǎn, piányi diǎn ba), "Boss, a little cheaper, please". Wiktionary defines 老板 (lǎobǎn) as a shop owner or boss and also as a polite way to address an adult, which is why it is the word for calling a stallholder. The same pattern gives a phrase worth knowing in any shop: 请说慢一点 (Qǐng shuō màn yìdiǎn), "Please speak a little more slowly".

One trap: 一点 goes after the adjective, never before it. 便宜一点 is "a bit cheaper"; 一点便宜 is wrong. And 太便宜了 means "it's so cheap!", which is a strange thing to tell a seller you are bargaining with.

Buying and selling: 要, 买, 卖 and 给

Four verbs do most of the work in a shop.

  • 要 (yào), to want. Wiktionary's examples include 你要番茄酱吗? (Nǐ yào fānqiéjiàng ma?), "Do you want ketchup?". With a verb after it, the Chinese Grammar Wiki notes, 要 means "want to": 我要买衣服, I want to buy clothes. 我要这个 is "I'll take this one".
  • 买 (mǎi), to buy, third tone.
  • 卖 (mài), to sell, fourth tone. The two words differ only in tone, so say them carefully: 我买 is "I buy", 我卖 is "I sell".
  • 给 (gěi), to give. The person comes first, then the thing: 给你两百块 (gěi nǐ liǎng bǎi kuài), "here's two hundred for you"; 请给我一杯水 (qǐng gěi wǒ yì bēi shuǐ), "please give me a glass of water".

The traditional characters tell a story about the first pair. Wiktionary explains that 買 is a net, 网, over a cowrie shell, 貝, and that 賣 was originally 出, "to go out", over 買. A handy way to remember it: selling sends a purchase out. The simplified 买 and 卖 keep the shape of that relationship, 卖 being 买 with 十 on top.

Discounts: why 八折 is twenty percent off

A sale sign says 打折 (dǎzhé), which Taiwan's Ministry of Education dictionary defines as lowering the selling price of goods. The number of the discount works the opposite way from English. A teacher's lesson plan published by Asia Society makes the point directly: "20% off" in English is 八折 in Chinese, because the number counts the tenths of the price that you still pay. So 打八折 means you pay 80 percent, 打九折 means you pay 90 percent, and 打八五折 means 85 percent. Half price is 对折 (duìzhé), which Wiktionary glosses as half-price, a 50 percent discount.

A 200-yuan jacket at 八折 costs 160 yuan. Students who read 八折 as 80 percent off expect to pay 40 yuan, and the shop will disappoint them.

Paying with a phone

In mainland China most people can pay without cash. The China Internet Network Information Center reported that by June 2025 the country had 1.022 billion online payment users, 91.0 percent of everyone online. The phone is 手机 (shǒujī), literally "hand machine", which takes the measure word 部 in one of Wiktionary's examples, 一部新手机, though 个 is common too. The verb 打 (dǎ), to hit, turns up in money talk in 打折 and in everyday life in 打电话 (dǎ diànhuà), to make a phone call.

Characters to learn

CharacterTraditionalPinyinMeaningRadicalStrokes
钱錢 (16 strokes)qián (qian2)money钅 (金)10
块塊 (13 strokes)kuài (kuai4)lump, piece; yuan, in speech土7
毛samemáo (mao2)hair, fur; a tenth of a yuan, in speech毛4
元sameyuán (yuan2)yuan, the main unit of money儿 (二 in mainland dictionaries)4
买買 (12 strokes)mǎi (mai3)to buy乙 (traditional 貝)6
卖賣 (15 strokes)mài (mai4)to sell十 (traditional 貝)8
贵貴 (12 strokes)guì (gui4)expensive; honourable, as in 您贵姓贝 (貝)9
便samepián (pian2) in 便宜; biàn (bian4) elsewherecheap, in 便宜; convenient亻 (人)9
宜sameyí (yi2); light in 便宜suitable; cheap, in 便宜宀8
要sameyào (yao4)to want; will覀 (襾)9
衣sameyī (yi1)clothing衣6
服samefú (fu2); light in 衣服 on the mainlandclothes; to serve月8
机機 (16 strokes)jī (ji1)machine, as in 手机木6
给給 (12 strokes)gěi (gei3)to give; for纟 (糸)9
打samedǎ (da3)to hit; to make (a call); as in 打折扌 (手)5

The cowrie shell links several of these. Wikipedia's article on shell money explains that cowrie shells, or copies of them, were used as money in China starting over three thousand years ago, and that so many characters about money and trade contain 貝 that it is known as the radical for money. You can see it in 贵 (expensive) and in traditional 買 and 賣; the simplified 买 and 卖 lost it. Other money characters use metal instead: Wiktionary analyses 錢 as 金, metal or gold, with the sound component 戔.

Two more notes. The word 衣服 is yīfu on the mainland, with a light second syllable, and yīfú in Taiwan, according to Wiktionary, which gives the same kind of split for 便宜: piányi on the mainland and piányí in Taiwan. And 便 has a second reading, biàn, meaning convenient, which you will meet in other words; in 便宜 it is always pián.

Dialogue: at a market stall (written for this course)

SpeakerChinesePinyinEnglish
Maya老板,这件衣服多少钱?Lǎobǎn, zhè jiàn yīfu duōshao qián?Excuse me, how much is this top?
老板一百二十块。Yìbǎi èrshí kuài.A hundred and twenty kuai.
Maya太贵了!便宜点吧。Tài guì le! Piányi diǎn ba.That's too expensive! A bit cheaper, please.
老板一百块,好吗?Yìbǎi kuài, hǎo ma?A hundred, OK?
Maya我买两件,一百五十块,好吗?Wǒ mǎi liǎng jiàn, yìbǎi wǔshí kuài, hǎo ma?I'll buy two for a hundred and fifty, OK?
老板一百六十块。Yìbǎi liùshí kuài.A hundred and sixty.
Maya好!给你两百块。Hǎo! Gěi nǐ liǎng bǎi kuài.Deal! Here's two hundred.
老板这是四十块。谢谢!Zhè shì sìshí kuài. Xièxie!Here's forty back. Thank you!
Maya不客气。再见!Bú kèqi. Zàijiàn!You're welcome. Bye!

Check the arithmetic and the grammar together: 件 counts the tops, 两件 uses 两, and every price uses 块 because this is speech. The 一 of 一百 is yì before the third tone of 百, and 不客气 starts with bú before the fourth tone of 客, both from Lesson 4.

Listening: prices and shopping words

  1. Play Wiktionary's recordings of 買 and 賣 several times, then have someone play one at random while you say whether it is buy or sell. Answer key: mǎi, third tone, is buy; mài, falling, is sell.
  2. Play 錢, 塊, 毛 and 元, and write each tone. Answers: qián 2, kuài 4, máo 2, yuán 2.
  3. Play 多少錢, 貴 and 便宜, then say 多少钱? 太贵了! 便宜点吧! as one exchange. The 多少錢 entry gives the reading duōshǎo qián; listen for the full third tone on 少, then compare the mainland reading duōshao on the 多少 page.
  4. Play 老闆, 衣服 and 手機. Is the second syllable of 衣服 light or full in the recording? Answer: light, yīfu, the mainland standard.
  5. Watch Legit Mando, season 2, episode 3: How much does it cost? on TaiwanPlus, free and without an account, about six and a half minutes long. In the skit a shopper bargains with a shopkeeper. Write down every price you hear as a number, and listen for whether 多少 sounds like duōshao or duōshǎo.

Speaking: a market role-play

Alone: collect five prices from a receipt, a menu or an online shop, convert them to yuan if you like, and record each one twice: the written reading with 元 and 角, then the spoken one with 块 and the short form where it applies. Then record yourself asking 这个多少钱? and reacting with 太贵了! and 便宜点吧.

With a partner: one of you is the 老板 with five items and price tags; the other has 200 kuai to spend. Bargain for at least two items, agree a price, pay with 给你, and give change. Then swap roles and add a sale sign: 打八折 or 打九折, worked out correctly.

Character writing: fifteen characters

Write each character five times, saying it aloud. Stroke counts: 钱 10, 块 7, 毛 4, 元 4, 买 6, 卖 8, 贵 9, 便 9, 宜 8, 要 9, 衣 6, 服 8, 机 6, 给 9, 打 5. In 钱, the metal radical 钅 takes five strokes before the right side. In 毛, the short slanting stroke on top comes first and the long final stroke bends and hooks up to the right. In 卖, write 十 first, then everything of 买 below it. In 要, the top part takes six strokes before 女.

Check the animations on 汉典 (zdic.net) (shown for 卖), and write the traditional forms 錢, 塊, 買, 賣, 貴, 機 and 給 once each, checking them on Taiwan's 國語小字典 (shown for 賣). Then write three price tags in characters, the written way: 二十五元, 八元五角, 一百元.

Common misconceptions

  • "块 is slang you should avoid." It is the normal spoken word for the main unit; 元 is the written and formal one.
  • "¥2.50 is 二块五." It is 两块五: 块 counts like a measure word, so two is 两.
  • "八折 means 80 percent off." It means you pay 80 percent, which is 20 percent off.
  • "买 and 卖 are the same word." They differ in tone, mǎi and mài, and mean the opposite: buy and sell.
  • "Every Chinese-speaking place uses the yuan." Mainland China uses the renminbi, Taiwan the New Taiwan dollar, Hong Kong the Hong Kong dollar, Singapore the Singapore dollar and Malaysia the ringgit, called 令吉 in Chinese.
  • "一点 goes before the adjective, like English 'a bit'." It goes after: 便宜一点, 慢一点.

What you now know

Mainland prices are written with 元, 角 and 分 and spoken with 块 and 毛: ¥35.50 is 三十五元五角 on paper and 三十五块五 in speech, ¥2.50 is 两块五, and a final two is 二, as in 两块二. You ask 这个多少钱?, complain with 太贵了, bargain with 便宜点吧, and pay with 给你. You know that 买 and 卖 differ only in tone, that 打八折 means paying 80 percent, and that Taiwan, Hong Kong, Singapore and Malaysia each have their own currency and money words. Most people in mainland China can pay by phone, and the cowrie shell inside 贵 and traditional 買 and 賣 is a reminder of the oldest Chinese money. Module 6 takes Mandarin to school.

Sources

  1. AllSet Learning. (n.d.). Counting money [多少钱; number + 块 + number + 毛; 两块五; 两块二]. Chinese Grammar Wiki. resources.allsetlearning.com
  2. AllSet Learning. (n.d.). Expressing "too" with "tai"; Comparing "youdian" and "yidian" [便宜点吧]; Wanting to do something with "yao". Chinese Grammar Wiki. resources.allsetlearning.com
  3. Wikipedia contributors. (2026). Renminbi; New Taiwan dollar; Hong Kong dollar; Singapore dollar; Malaysian ringgit [units, nicknames and denominations]. Wikipedia. en.wikipedia.org
  4. Wikipedia contributors. (2026). Shell money [cowries and the radical 貝 in ancient China]. Wikipedia. en.wikipedia.org
  5. Theodorou, S. (2013). Making advertisements for Walmart in China [Lesson plan; discounts with 折]. Asia Society. asiasociety.org
  6. Ministry of Education, Taiwan. (2021). 重編國語辭典修訂本 [Revised Mandarin Chinese dictionary], entry 打折 [search the site for 打折]. dict.revised.moe.edu.tw
  7. China Internet Network Information Center. (2025). 第56次中国互联网络发展状况统计报告 [The 56th statistical report on China's internet development] [online payment users, June 2025]. cnnic.net.cn
  8. Wiktionary contributors. (2026). 買; 賣 [glyph origins]; 錢; 塊; 多少; 便宜; 衣服 [mainland and Taiwan readings]; 老闆; 要; 給; 對折; 令吉; 打電話; and entries with Mandarin audio. Wiktionary. en.wiktionary.org
  9. TaiwanPlus. (n.d.). Legit Mando, season 2, episode 3: How much does it cost? Public Television Service. taiwanplus.com
Key terms
元 / 块
The main unit of money: 元 (yuán) in writing, 块 (kuài) in speech. ¥3 is 三元 on paper and 三块 aloud.
角 / 毛
A tenth of a yuan: 角 (jiǎo) in writing, 毛 (máo) in speech. ¥0.50 is 五毛.
分 (fēn)
A hundredth of a yuan, now rarely used as a coin.
多少钱?
How much? Name the thing first: 这件衣服多少钱?
太贵了 / 便宜点吧
That's too expensive / a bit cheaper, please. 一点 or 点 goes after the adjective.
打折 / 八折
To discount / paying 80 percent of the price, which is 20 percent off. Half price is 对折.
买 / 卖
To buy (mǎi, third tone) / to sell (mài, fourth tone).
要 / 给
To want: 我要这个 / to give, person before thing: 给你两百块.
人民币, 新台币, 港元, 新加坡元, 令吉
The currencies of mainland China, Taiwan, Hong Kong, Singapore and Malaysia.
手机 (shǒujī)
Mobile phone, literally 'hand machine'. By June 2025, 1.022 billion people in mainland China used online payment.

Module 6: School and Daily Life

School subjects and three school systems compared, a day described in time-place-verb order, and where things are with 在, 有 and 是.

School Life in Mandarin: Subjects, Schedules and Three School Systems

  • Name school subjects and talk about classes, timetables and tests with 学校, 上课, 下课 and 考试.
  • Compare school life in mainland China, Taiwan and Singapore: the stages of school, the big exams, the school day and the place of Chinese.
  • Say what you like with 喜欢 and what you know how to do with 会, as in 我会写汉字.
  • Read and write 校, 课, 考, 试, 数, 汉, 语, 史, 体, 育, 喜, 欢, 会 and 写.

Thirteen million test takers

In late May 2025, China's Ministry of Education announced that 13.35 million people had registered for that year's 高考 (gāokǎo), the national college entrance examination, which began on 7 June. Wiktionary defines 高考 as a higher education entrance examination, especially China's national one. For many students in mainland China, the last year of high school, 高三 (gāosān), is organized around it.

The gaokao is the most famous feature of school in a Chinese-speaking place, but it is only one. This lesson compares school life in mainland China, Taiwan and Singapore: how the years are organized, which exams matter, what the school day looks like and how Chinese is taught. On the way you will learn to name your subjects, read a timetable, say what you like and say what you know how to do.

School words

WordPinyinMeaning
学校 (學校)xuéxiàoschool
上课 (上課)shàngkèto go to class; class starts
下课 (下課)xiàkèto finish class; class is over
考试 (考試)kǎoshìtest, exam; to take a test
小学, 初中, 高中, 大学xiǎoxué, chūzhōng, gāozhōng, dàxuéprimary school, junior high, senior high, university
高一, 高二, 高三gāoyī, gāo'èr, gāosānfirst, second and third year of senior high

The 上 and 下 of 上课 and 下课 are the "up" and "down" of Lesson 9, used here for the start and the end of a class. Wiktionary equates 高一 with tenth grade in North America and 高三 with twelfth grade, so an American junior is in 高二. To count classes, use the measure words Wiktionary gives for 课: 节 for a class period, as in 两节数学课 (two periods of math), and 门 (mén) for a course or subject, as in 六门课 (six subjects).

Subjects

SubjectPinyinMeaning
语文 (語文)yǔwénChinese language and literature, the school subject on the mainland
数学 (數學)shùxuémathematics
英语 (英語), 英文Yīngyǔ, YīngwénEnglish
历史 (歷史)lìshǐhistory
地理dìlǐgeography
物理wùlǐphysics
化学 (化學)huàxuéchemistry
生物shēngwùbiology
体育 (體育)tǐyùphysical education
音乐 (音樂)yīnyuèmusic
美术 (美術)měishùart

The Chinese subject itself has three names. Wiktionary defines 语文 as Chinese language and literature as a school subject; Taiwan's curriculum calls it 國語文 (guóyǔwén), as Lesson 1 noted; and Wiktionary's table of regional words lists 华文 (huáwén) alongside 华语 in Singapore and Malaysia. Notice two old friends in the list: the 历 of 历史 is the merged character from Lesson 13, and 乐 in 音乐 is the 乐 of 快乐, read yuè here.

Three school systems compared

Mainland ChinaTaiwanSingapore
StagesSix years of primary school and three of junior middle school, the nine compulsory years, then three years of senior high or vocational schoolCompulsory through junior high since 1968; basic education extended to twelve years in 2014Primary school ends with the Primary School Leaving Examination (PSLE); the GCE O Level and A Level examinations come later
Big exams中考 (zhōngkǎo) to enter senior high; 高考 for universityNational exams control entry to senior high school and to universityPSLE, then O Levels and A Levels
Language of teachingMandarinMandarinEnglish, with a Mother Tongue language studied as a subject
Chinese as a subject语文國語文华文, as the Mother Tongue of Chinese students

The Singapore column needs a word of explanation. Wikipedia's article on language education in Singapore describes an English-based bilingual system. Subjects are taught in English, while each student's official Mother Tongue is taught as a second language: Mandarin for Chinese students, Malay for Malay students and Tamil for many Indian students. Mother Tongue is a compulsory subject at the PSLE, O Level and A Level. In 2010 a minister's remarks raised fears that its weight in the PSLE would be cut. Prime Minister Lee Hsien Loong then held a press conference, speaking in English, Malay and Mandarin, and said directly: "we are not reducing the weight of Mother Tongue languages at PSLE."

So what? A student in Singapore studies Chinese as one subject among many, with its own lessons and exams, while a student in Beijing or Taipei studies every subject in Mandarin. The same words, 上课 and 考试, describe very different school days.

The school day

Official rules and students' own accounts give a picture of the day in each place.

  • Mainland China. A 2021 notice from the Ministry of Education asked for 10 hours of sleep for primary pupils, 9 for junior middle school students and 8 for senior high students. It said secondary schools should generally not start morning classes before 8:00, that schools must not require students to arrive early for organized activities, and that schools should give students a midday rest where conditions allow. One routine is long-standing. Wikipedia reports that in 1963 the government began requiring schoolchildren aged 6 to 17 to do eye exercises at school, a self-massage of points around the eyes, though it adds that their effectiveness is in question because nearsightedness among Chinese children has risen over the same period.
  • Taiwan. Wikipedia notes that students through high school clean their own classrooms and school grounds. In a submission on children's rights published on a Taiwan government website, students wrote that they have seven to nine class periods a day plus early "morning self-study", and objected that some schools make them stay in their seats, heads down, during the noon rest. In 2022 the Ministry of Education responded to a proposal made on the government's online policy platform: from August that year, senior high students could arrive at about 8 a.m. on four days a week, and school assemblies were cut from two a week to one, Taiwan News reported.
  • Singapore. The day runs in English, with Mother Tongue lessons in the timetable like any other subject.

喜欢 and 会

Two verbs let you talk about school. The first is 喜欢 (xǐhuan), which Wiktionary defines as to like or be fond of. It takes a noun or a verb phrase: 我喜欢数学 (I like math), 我喜欢写汉字 (I like writing characters). Negate it with 不: 我不喜欢考试. To ask about someone's favourite, put 什么 where the answer goes, a pattern Lesson 20 explains fully: 你喜欢什么课? (Nǐ xǐhuan shénme kè?), "Which classes do you like?" Wiktionary records xǐhuan with a light second syllable on the mainland and xǐhuān in Taiwan.

The second is 会 (huì). The Chinese Grammar Wiki explains that 会 expresses an ability that has been learned, a skill, in the pattern subject + 会 + verb + object: 我会写汉字 (I can write Chinese characters), 他会说中文 (he can speak Chinese). The negative is 不会, which the wiki suggests translating as "don't know how to": 我不会写这个字, I don't know how to write this character. Use 会 for languages, sports and skills such as cooking and driving; Lesson 20 compares it with 能 and 可以.

Characters to learn

CharacterTraditionalPinyinMeaningRadicalStrokes
校samexiào (xiao4)school木10
课課 (15 strokes)kè (ke4)class, lesson讠 (言)10
考samekǎo (kao3)to test, to take an exam耂 (老)6
试試 (13 strokes)shì (shi4)to try; test讠 (言)8
数數 (15 strokes)shù (shu4)number, as in 数学; shǔ, to count攵 (攴)13
汉漢 (14 strokes)hàn (han4)Han, Chinese, as in 汉语 and 汉字氵 (水)5
语語 (14 strokes)yǔ (yu3)language讠 (言)9
史sameshǐ (shi3)history, as in 历史口5
体體 (23 strokes)tǐ (ti3)body, as in 体育亻 (traditional 骨)7
育sameyù (yu4)to raise, to educate月 (肉)8 (7 in Taiwan's count)
喜samexǐ (xi3)to like; happy口12
欢歡 (22 strokes)huān (huan1); light in 喜欢 on the mainlandjoyful欠6
会會 (13 strokes)huì (hui4)can, know how to; will; meeting人 (traditional 曰)6
写寫 (15 strokes)xiě (xie3)to write冖 (traditional 宀)5

Look at the left side of 课, 试 and 语: the speech radical 讠, two strokes, simplified from 言, seven strokes. It marks words to do with speaking and language, and the traditional counts in the table show how many strokes the simplified form saves. The character 体 is a person, 亻, with 本 from Lesson 15; its traditional form 體, with the bone radical 骨, has 23 strokes, more than any other form taught in this course. You already know 汉 from 汉语 and 汉字, and 语 from 汉语 in Lesson 1.

Dialogue: comparing timetables (written for this course)

SpeakerChinesePinyinEnglish
王小文你今天有什么课?Nǐ jīntiān yǒu shénme kè?What classes do you have today?
Maya上午有数学、历史和英语,下午有体育。Shàngwǔ yǒu shùxué, lìshǐ hé Yīngyǔ, xiàwǔ yǒu tǐyù.Math, history and English this morning, and PE this afternoon.
王小文你喜欢什么课?Nǐ xǐhuan shénme kè?Which classes do you like?
Maya我喜欢体育和历史。我不喜欢考试!Wǒ xǐhuan tǐyù hé lìshǐ. Wǒ bù xǐhuan kǎoshì!I like PE and history. I don't like tests!
王小文明天有中文考试!Míngtiān yǒu Zhōngwén kǎoshì!There's a Chinese test tomorrow!
Maya真的吗?我会说中文,可是不太会写汉字。Zhēn de ma? Wǒ huì shuō Zhōngwén, kěshì bú tài huì xiě Hànzì.Really? I can speak Chinese, but I'm not very good at writing characters.
王小文你会写"学校"吗?Nǐ huì xiě "xuéxiào" ma?Can you write the word for school?
Maya会!Huì!Yes!
王小文下课我们一起写汉字吧!Xiàkè wǒmen yìqǐ xiě Hànzì ba!Let's practise characters together after class!

Maya answers 会 with the verb alone, the yes of Lesson 6. Two words arrive early: 上午 (shàngwǔ, morning) and 下午 (xiàwǔ, afternoon), from Lesson 18; 可是 (kěshì) means but. The phrase 不太会 means "can't do very well", with 太 from Lesson 7 and the tone change of 不 before the fourth tone of 太.

Listening: school words

  1. Play Wiktionary's recordings of 學校, 上課, 下課 and 考試. Which two words share their second syllable? Answer: 上課 and 下課, both ending in kè.
  2. Play 數學, 歷史, 體育, 英語, 地理 and 物理, and write the tones of each pair of syllables. Answers: 4 2; 4 3; 3 4; 1 3; 4 3; 4 3.
  3. Play 喜歡, 會 (the first recording, huì) and 寫, then say 我喜欢写汉字 and 我会写汉字 and explain the difference in English. Answer: I like writing characters; I know how to write characters.
  4. Play 高考 and 漢語. In 高考, does the third tone of 考 come at the end of a phrase, where it is pronounced in full? Answer: yes, gāokǎo ends on a full third tone.
  5. Watch Legit Mando, episode 3: I like, love on TaiwanPlus, free and without an account. The phrase lesson starts at 0:11 and the writing segment at 5:06. Repeat each sentence with 喜歡 after the host, and listen for whether its second syllable is light or full.

Speaking: your timetable

Alone: write your own weekly timetable in Chinese, with the days from Lesson 12 across the top and your subjects in the boxes, then record a description of two days: 星期一上午有数学和历史,下午有体育。 Add which subjects you like and one skill you have: 我会说一点中文。

With a partner: interview each other: 你今天有什么课? 你喜欢什么课? 你会写多少汉字? Then compare your partner's school day with one of the three systems in this lesson, in English or in Chinese.

Character writing: fourteen characters

Write each character five times, saying it aloud. Stroke counts: 校 10, 课 10, 考 6, 试 8, 数 13, 汉 5, 语 9, 史 5, 体 7, 育 8, 喜 12, 欢 6, 会 6, 写 5. The speech radical 讠 is two strokes: a dot, then a horizontal that turns down and flicks up. In 史, write 口 first, then the long slanting stroke and the final sweep to the right. In 喜, work strictly from top to bottom: 士, 口, the short strokes in the middle, then the lower 口. In 写, the top is 冖, two strokes, not 宀.

Check the animations on 汉典 (zdic.net) (shown for 语), and write the traditional forms 課, 語, 漢, 會 and 寫 once each, checking them on Taiwan's 國語小字典 (shown for 語). Then write the names of your three favourite subjects in characters.

Common misconceptions

  • "上课 means 'up class'." It means to go to class or that class starts; 下课 means class is over.
  • "Every Chinese-speaking student studies in Chinese." In Singapore, subjects are taught in English and Chinese is studied as a Mother Tongue subject.
  • "会 and 喜欢 can swap." 我会写汉字 says you know how to write characters; 我喜欢写汉字 says you enjoy it.
  • "The Chinese subject has one name everywhere." It is 语文 on the mainland, 國語文 in Taiwan and 华文 in Singapore and Malaysia.
  • "高一 is first grade." It is the first year of senior high school, tenth grade in North American terms.
  • "School eye exercises have been shown to prevent nearsightedness." Wikipedia notes that their effectiveness is in question, since nearsightedness among Chinese children has risen while the exercises continued.

Recap

School vocabulary is shared across the Chinese-speaking world: 学校, 上课 and 下课, 考试, subjects such as 数学, 历史 and 体育, and the senior high years 高一 to 高三. The systems differ. Mainland China has nine compulsory years and two big exams, 中考 and the 高考, for which 13.35 million people registered in 2025; official rules set eight hours of sleep for senior high students and no morning classes before about 8:00 in secondary schools. Taiwan extended basic education to twelve years in 2014, and its students clean their classrooms and in 2022 won a later start on most days. Singapore teaches in English and requires a Mother Tongue, so Chinese there is 华文, one subject among many. To talk about it all, use 喜欢 for what you like and 会 for what you know how to do. Lesson 18 follows a whole day, from getting up to going to bed.

Sources

  1. Ministry of Education of the People's Republic of China. (2025, May 29). 2025年全国高考报名人数1335万人 [13.35 million registered for the 2025 national college entrance exam] [reprinted from 人民日报]. moe.gov.cn
  2. General Office of the Ministry of Education. (2021). 教育部办公厅关于进一步加强中小学生睡眠管理工作的通知 [Notice on further strengthening sleep management for primary and secondary students] (教基厅函〔2021〕11号). moe.gov.cn
  3. Wikipedia contributors. (2026). Education in China; Education in Taiwan; Language education in Singapore. Wikipedia. en.wikipedia.org
  4. Wikipedia contributors. (2026). Eye exercises [China, since 1963]. Wikipedia. en.wikipedia.org
  5. Taiwan News. (2022, March 8). MOE announces school hour change for Taiwan senior high school students. taiwannews.com.tw
  6. Opinions from the Children: How we've been encroached on our rights at school [Submission on children's rights in education]. (n.d.). Social and Family Affairs Administration, Taiwan. crc.sfaa.gov.tw
  7. Prime Minister's Office, Singapore. (2010, May 11). Remarks by PM Lee Hsien Loong at the press conference on Mother Tongue language. pmo.gov.sg
  8. AllSet Learning. (n.d.). Expressing a learned skill with "hui". Chinese Grammar Wiki. resources.allsetlearning.com
  9. Wiktionary contributors. (2026). 高考; 中考; 高一; 高三; 語文; 華文 [regional synonyms]; 課 [measure words]; 喜歡; 會; and school-subject entries with Mandarin audio. Wiktionary. en.wiktionary.org
  10. TaiwanPlus. (2021). Legit Mando, episode 3: I like, love. Public Television Service. taiwanplus.com
Key terms
学校 (xuéxiào)
School. 小学, 初中, 高中 and 大学 are primary school, junior high, senior high and university.
上课 / 下课
To go to class, or class starts / class is over.
考试 (kǎoshì)
A test or exam; to take one.
高一 / 高二 / 高三
The three years of senior high school, grades 10 to 12 in North American terms.
高考 / 中考
China's national college entrance exam, taken by 13.35 million registrants in 2025 / the senior high school entrance exam.
语文 / 國語文 / 华文
The Chinese school subject: on the mainland, in Taiwan, and in Singapore and Malaysia.
节 / 门
Measure words for 课: a class period (两节课) / a course or subject (六门课).
喜欢 (xǐhuan)
To like, with a noun or a verb: 我喜欢数学, 我喜欢写汉字. Negative 不喜欢.
会 (huì)
Can, know how to, for learned skills: 我会写汉字. Negative 不会, don't know how to.
Mother Tongue (Singapore)
The compulsory second-language subject, Chinese, Malay or Tamil, in a system that teaches other subjects in English.

A Day in Mandarin: Routines and Time-Place-Verb Order

  • Build sentences in the order subject, time, place, verb, object, as in 我每天早上七点在家吃早饭.
  • Describe a daily routine with the times of day, 每天, and the verbs 起床, 吃饭, 回家, 看, 做 and 睡觉.
  • Put events in order with 先 and 然后, and with 以前 and 以后 after a verb or time.
  • Read and write 早, 午, 晚, 床, 吃, 饭, 回, 睡, 觉, 每, 来, 看, 做, 以 and 视.

One sentence, built slot by slot

Here is the sentence this lesson builds: 我每天早上七点在家吃早饭。 (Wǒ měitiān zǎoshang qī diǎn zài jiā chī zǎofàn.) "I eat breakfast at home at seven every morning." Compare the order of the two languages.

WhoWhenWhereDoes whatTo what
我每天早上七点在家吃早饭
Iat seven every morningat homeeatbreakfast

English says it in another order: I / eat / breakfast / at home / at seven every morning. It puts the place and the time at the end, smallest unit first. Mandarin puts them before the verb, time before place, and the time runs from big to small, as Lesson 12 showed. Once you know the slots, you can describe a whole day by filling them in again and again. This lesson does exactly that, one step at a time.

Step 1: who, and Step 2: when

The subject comes first, and the time comes right after it, or sometimes before it: the Chinese Grammar Wiki gives both 我明天有空 and 明天我有空 for "I'm free tomorrow". What the time cannot do is follow the verb. For times of day, use these words.

WordPinyinMeaning
早上zǎoshangearly morning
上午shàngwǔmorning, before noon
中午zhōngwǔnoon, midday
下午xiàwǔafternoon
晚上wǎnshangevening, night

The 午 in three of these is noon: 上午 is above, or before, noon and 下午 below, or after, it, the same 上 and 下 as in 上课 and 下课. Put the time of day before the clock time, big to small: 早上七点 (7 a.m.), 下午三点半 (3:30 p.m.), 晚上十点 (10 p.m.).

For things you do every day, add 每天 (měitiān). The Chinese Grammar Wiki explains that 每 normally takes a measure word, as in 每个星期 (every week), but that 天 and 年 are measure words already, so every day is just 每天 and every year 每年. It also notes that sentences with 每 usually add 都 (dōu, all) before the verb: 我每天都六点起床, "I get up at six every day."

Step 3: where

To say where an action happens, put 在 (zài) and the place before the verb. The Chinese Grammar Wiki gives the pattern as subject + 在 + place + verb + object and points out that this is one of the places where Chinese word order differs most from English. Its examples include 我周末想在家睡觉 (Wǒ zhōumò xiǎng zài jiā shuìjiào), "On the weekend I want to sleep at home", and a piece of advice, 不要在床上吃东西, "Don't eat in bed."

Notice the order in the first one: time 周末 (the weekend), then place 在家, then the verb. That is the full pattern. Lesson 19 looks at 在 on its own as a verb and at words such as 上 (on) and 里 (in).

Step 4: does what, and Step 5: to what

PhrasePinyinMeaning
起床qǐchuángto get up (literally rise from bed)
吃早饭, 吃午饭, 吃晚饭chī zǎofàn, chī wǔfàn, chī wǎnfànto eat breakfast, lunch, dinner
去学校qù xuéxiàoto go to school
回家huí jiāto go home
做作业zuò zuòyèto do homework
看书, 看电视kàn shū, kàn diànshìto read, to watch TV
睡觉shuìjiàoto sleep, to go to bed

Two of these come in two parts that belong together. 吃饭 (chīfàn) is "eat a meal": 饭 is cooked rice and, by extension, a meal, so breakfast, lunch and dinner are 早饭, 午饭 and 晚饭. And 睡觉 is "sleep", with 觉 read jiào; the same character is read jué in other words, so it is worth learning as a pair.

The upshot: every sentence about your day fills the same slots in the same order. Who, when, where, does what, to what: 我 / 晚上十点 / 在家 / 看 / 书.

Linking the steps: 先, 然后, 以前 and 以后

A day is a sequence, and Mandarin has compact ways to show it.

  • Actions in a row. Two verb phrases can simply follow each other, the first often saying where you go and the second what you do there. The Chinese Grammar Wiki's example is 我们去咖啡店喝咖啡吧, "Let's go to a café for coffee." In the same way, 我去学校上课 is "I go to school for class".
  • 先 and 然后. The wiki describes 先 (xiān), first, followed by 再 (zài) or 然后 (ránhòu), then, as the way to say "first ..., then ...": 我先做作业,然后吃晚饭, "I do my homework first and then have dinner". Its own example is 先洗手再吃, "wash your hands first, then eat".
  • 以前 and 以后. These mean before and after, and they come after the time or the event, not before it as in English. The wiki's examples are 十点以前 (before ten) and 10点以后 (after ten). With a verb or event it is the same: 吃饭以后 (after eating), 睡觉以前 (before going to bed), 晚饭以后 (after dinner).

来 and 去

Two more verbs complete the routine. 去 (qù), from Lesson 3, is to go, away from where you are; 来 (lái) is to come, toward where the speaker is. So a friend phoning from home asks 你来我家吗?, "Are you coming to my place?", and you answer 我去你家, "I'll go to your place", each verb pointing from the speaker's position. Both take the place directly after them, with no word for "to": 来学校, 去中国.

A day in numbers

China's National Bureau of Statistics measures how people spend their day by asking them to keep a diary in 15-minute steps, for one weekday and one weekend day. Its third national time-use survey, carried out from 11 to 31 May 2024, published results by age group. For young people aged 6 to 17 who studied on the diary days, which was almost all of them, study and training took an average of 8 hours 12 minutes a day, counting weekends. Free-time activities took 2 hours 19 minutes, and those who used the internet spent 2 hours 15 minutes on it. Across all ages, sleep and rest averaged 9 hours 46 minutes a day. A survey diary is a description of a day in time-place-verb order, kept in 15-minute slots, which is the skill this lesson teaches.

Characters to learn

CharacterTraditionalPinyinMeaningRadicalStrokes
早samezǎo (zao3)early; morning日6
午samewǔ (wu3)noon十4
晚samewǎn (wan3)evening; late日11
床samechuáng (chuang2)bed广7
吃samechī (chi1)to eat口6
饭飯 (12 strokes)fàn (fan4)cooked rice; meal饣 (食)7
回samehuí (hui2)to return囗6
睡sameshuì (shui4)to sleep目13 (14 in Taiwan's count)
觉覺 (20 strokes)jiào (jiao4) in 睡觉; jué elsewheresleep, in 睡觉; to feel见 (見)9
每sameměi (mei3)every, each母 (毋)7
来來 (8 strokes)lái (lai2)to come木 (traditional 人)7
看samekàn (kan4)to look, watch, read目9
做samezuò (zuo4)to do, make亻 (人)11
以sameyǐ (yi3)by means of; in 以前 and 以后人4 (5 in Taiwan's count)
视視 (12 strokes)shì (shi4)to look at, as in 电视见 (見)8

Wiktionary's notes on origins make several of these easy to remember. The character 看 is a hand, 手, over an eye, 目: shading your eyes to look into the distance. The character 來 began as a picture of wheat, with an ear, leaves and roots, and was borrowed for its sound to write "come". The character 睡 has the eye radical 目 with 垂 as its sound component, and 晚 has the sun radical 日 with 免 for its sound. In 饭 and the traditional 飯, the food radical 饣 (食) tells you it is something to eat.

Dialogue: a school project on daily life (written for this course)

SpeakerChinesePinyinEnglish
Maya你每天几点起床?Nǐ měitiān jǐ diǎn qǐchuáng?What time do you get up every day?
王小文我每天早上六点半起床。Wǒ měitiān zǎoshang liù diǎn bàn qǐchuáng.I get up at six thirty every morning.
Maya你在哪儿吃早饭?Nǐ zài nǎr chī zǎofàn?Where do you have breakfast?
王小文我在家吃早饭,然后七点二十去学校。Wǒ zài jiā chī zǎofàn, ránhòu qī diǎn èrshí qù xuéxiào.I have breakfast at home, then go to school at seven twenty.
Maya你几点回家?Nǐ jǐ diǎn huí jiā?What time do you get home?
王小文下午五点。我先做作业,然后吃晚饭。Xiàwǔ wǔ diǎn. Wǒ xiān zuò zuòyè, ránhòu chī wǎnfàn.Five in the afternoon. First I do my homework, then I have dinner.
Maya晚饭以后你看电视吗?Wǎnfàn yǐhòu nǐ kàn diànshì ma?Do you watch TV after dinner?
王小文不看。我看书。我每天晚上十一点睡觉。Bú kàn. Wǒ kàn shū. Wǒ měitiān wǎnshang shíyī diǎn shuìjiào.No, I read. I go to bed at eleven every night.
Maya十一点?太晚了!Shíyī diǎn? Tài wǎn le!Eleven? That's too late!

Check every statement against the five slots: 我 / 每天早上六点半 / 起床 has no place, and 我 / 在家 / 吃 / 早饭 has no time, but nothing is ever out of order. The question 你在哪儿吃早饭? puts 哪儿 (nǎr, where) in the place slot, exactly where the answer 在家 goes; Lesson 20 explains why. Maya's last line uses 太...了 from Lesson 16.

Listening: a day in words

  1. Play Wiktionary's recordings of 上午, 中午, 下午 and 晚上. Which one ends with a light syllable? Answer: 晚上, wǎnshang.
  2. Play 起床, 吃飯 and 睡覺, then put them in the order of a day and say each with a time: 早上七点起床, 中午十二点吃饭, 晚上十点睡觉.
  3. Play 早飯, 午飯 and 晚飯. All three begin with a third tone; in which does the third tone change because another third tone follows? Answer: none, because 飯 is fourth tone; the first syllables are half third tones.
  4. Play 然後, 以前 and 以後, then say: 我先吃早饭,然后去学校。 吃饭以后,我做作业。
  5. Play 看, 做, 來, 電視 and 作業, and write the tones. Answers: kàn 4; zuò 4; lái 2; diànshì 4 4; zuòyè 4 4.

Speaking: your day aloud

Alone: keep a diary of one school day the way the statistics bureau does, noting what you are doing every hour. Then record your day in at least eight sentences, each with a time and as many with a place as possible: 我早上七点起床。 我七点半在家吃早饭。 Use 先 and 然后 once, and 以后 once.

With a partner: interview each other with 你每天几点起床? 你在哪儿吃午饭? 你晚饭以后做什么? Write your partner's answers as a timeline, then read it back to them in Chinese, changing 我 to 你.

Character writing: fifteen characters

Write each character five times, saying it aloud. Stroke counts: 早 6, 午 4, 晚 11, 床 7, 吃 6, 饭 7, 回 6, 睡 13, 觉 9, 每 7, 来 7, 看 9, 做 11, 以 4, 视 8. In 回, as Lesson 8 showed, write the outer frame without its bottom, then the whole inner box, then close the outer frame. In 看, the flattened hand comes first, with its slanting stroke, then the eye. In 来, the long horizontal comes first, then the two short strokes, then the cross of 木. Taiwan's dictionary counts 以 as five strokes and 睡 as fourteen, so its stroke-order animations differ from the mainland's for those two.

Check the animations on 汉典 (zdic.net) (shown for 看), and write the traditional forms 飯, 覺, 來 and 視 once each, checking them on Taiwan's 國語小字典 (shown for 以). Then write five sentences about your day in characters, one for each time of day.

Common misconceptions

  • "The place goes at the end, as in English." It goes before the verb with 在: 我在家吃饭, never 我吃饭在家.
  • "Time words can come after the verb." They come before it, after or before the subject: 我七点起床 or 七点我起床.
  • "Every day is 每个天." 天 is already a measure word, so it is 每天; the same goes for 每年.
  • "After dinner is 以后晚饭." 以后 follows the event: 晚饭以后, 吃饭以后.
  • "觉 is always jiào." It is jiào in 睡觉 and jué in other words.
  • "来 and 去 are interchangeable." 来 points toward the speaker and 去 away: 你来我家, 我去你家.

Putting it together

A Mandarin sentence about your day fills five slots in a fixed order: who, when, where, does what, to what, as in 我每天早上七点在家吃早饭. Times of day, 早上, 上午, 中午, 下午 and 晚上, come before clock times, and 每天 needs no measure word because 天 is one; 都 often follows. The place goes before the verb with 在. The verbs of a routine are 起床, 吃饭, 去学校, 回家, 做作业, 看书 and 睡觉, and 先 ... 然后, 以前 and 以后 put them in sequence, with 以前 and 以后 after the event. China's 2024 time-use diaries, kept in 15-minute slots, found that young people who studied spent about eight hours a day at it. Lesson 19 turns from when things happen to where things are.

Sources

  1. AllSet Learning. (n.d.). Indicating location with "zai" before verbs. Chinese Grammar Wiki. resources.allsetlearning.com
  2. AllSet Learning. (n.d.). Sequencing events in time [actions in a row; 以前 and 以后; time words and word order]. Chinese Grammar Wiki. resources.allsetlearning.com
  3. AllSet Learning. (n.d.). Sequencing with "xian" and "zai" [with 然后]. Chinese Grammar Wiki. resources.allsetlearning.com
  4. AllSet Learning. (n.d.). Expressing "every" with "mei". Chinese Grammar Wiki. resources.allsetlearning.com
  5. National Bureau of Statistics of China. (2024, October 31). 第三次全国时间利用调查公报(第一号)[Third national time-use survey, communiqué no. 1: method]. stats.gov.cn
  6. National Bureau of Statistics of China. (2024, October 31). 第三次全国时间利用调查公报(第二号)[Communiqué no. 2: time use of all residents]. stats.gov.cn
  7. National Bureau of Statistics of China. (2024, October 31). 第三次全国时间利用调查公报(第三号)[Communiqué no. 3: time use by sex, urban and rural, and age group]. stats.gov.cn
  8. Wiktionary contributors. (2026). 看; 來; 睡; 晚 [glyph origins]; 睡覺; 上午; 晚上; 然後; 以前; 以後; and other entries with Mandarin audio. Wiktionary. en.wiktionary.org
  9. 汉典 [Zdic]. (n.d.). 看; 回 [stroke order]. zdic.net
Key terms
time-place-verb order
Subject, time, 在 + place, verb, object: 我每天早上七点在家吃早饭.
早上 / 上午 / 中午 / 下午 / 晚上
Early morning / morning / noon / afternoon / evening. They come before the clock time: 下午三点.
每天 (měitiān)
Every day. 每 usually needs a measure word, but 天 is one already; 都 often follows: 我每天都六点起床.
在 + place
Where something happens, placed before the verb: 在家吃饭, 在学校上课.
起床 / 睡觉
To get up / to go to bed, to sleep. 觉 is jiào in 睡觉.
吃饭
To eat a meal. 早饭, 午饭, 晚饭 are breakfast, lunch and dinner.
先 A,然后 B
First A, then B: 我先做作业,然后吃晚饭. 先 A 再 B works too.
以前 / 以后
Before / after, placed after the time or event: 十点以前, 吃饭以后.
来 / 去
To come, toward the speaker / to go, away from the speaker: 你来我家, 我去你家.
看 / 做
To look, watch, read: 看书, 看电视 / to do, make: 做作业.

Where Things Are: 在, 有 and 是 with Location Words

  • Say where people and things are with 在 and location words such as 上, 里, 旁边 and 左边, without adding 是.
  • Say what is in a place with 有, and tell it apart from 是, which names what fills a place.
  • Use 这儿, 那儿, 哪儿 and 这里, 那里, 哪里, knowing where each is more usual, and say where you live with 住在.
  • Read and write 里, 外, 前, 边, 左, 右, 桌, 椅, 旁, 儿, 住, 洗 and 间.

Four sentences about a desk

A student was asked to describe a photo of a desk with a book on it. She wrote these four sentences.

  1. 书是在桌子上。 She meant: The book is on the desk.
  2. 书在桌子。 She meant the same.
  3. 有一本书在桌子上。 She meant: There is a book on the desk.
  4. 桌子上是一本书。 She meant the same as the third.

The first three are wrong, and the fourth is correct Chinese but says something slightly different from what she meant. English uses one verb, "to be", for all of these ideas. Mandarin splits the work among three verbs, 在, 有 and 是, and adds small location words that English does not need. This lesson fixes the four sentences one at a time.

Bug 1: 在 needs no 是

The verb 在 (zài) means to be at or to be in a place. The Chinese Grammar Wiki gives the pattern as subject + 在 + place and warns that, although English uses "to be", it is tempting but wrong to add 是: 在 is the only verb needed. Its examples include 我在上海 (I'm in Shanghai), 老板在外面 (the boss is outside) and 他不在学校 (he's not at school). So the first sentence becomes 书在桌子上.

Why this matters: English "is" does three jobs that Mandarin gives to three different verbs. 是 says what something is, 在 says where it is, and 有 says what there is somewhere. Most errors in this lesson come from reaching for 是 when one of the others is needed.

Bug 2: the location word

The second sentence, 书在桌子, is missing a word. The Chinese Grammar Wiki describes a "sandwich": 在, then the place, then a location word such as 上 (on), 下 (under), 里 (in) or 旁边 (beside), as in 在桌子上, on the desk. Big places such as countries and cities need no location word: 在中国, 在上海. The same pattern works for occasions: 在课上 is in class.

The wiki calls these words "nouns of locality", 方位词 (fāngwèicí), and gives their one- and two-character forms.

Short formLonger formsMeaning
上 shàng上面, 上边 (shàngmiàn, shàngbian)on, above, top
下 xià下面, 下边under, below, bottom
里 lǐ里面, 里边in, inside
外 wài外面, 外边outside
前 qián前面, 前边in front
后 hòu后面, 后边behind, at the back
左边 (zuǒbian)left
右边 (yòubian)right
旁边 (pángbiān)beside, next to

The short forms attach directly to a noun: 桌子上, 书包里 (in the schoolbag). The longer forms can also stand alone: 他在外面, he is outside; 洗手间在左边, the restroom is on the left. In the forms with 边, the 边 is often light, as the wiki's pinyin shows.

Bug 3: with 有, the place comes first

The third sentence copies English word order. To say what there is somewhere, the Chinese Grammar Wiki gives the pattern place + 有 + object: literally, the place "has" the thing. Its examples include 我家有很多小狗 (there are a lot of puppies in my home) and 你家有牛奶吗? (is there milk at your place?). So "There is a book on the desk" is 桌子上有一本书. The negative is 没有, as in Lesson 14: 桌子上没有书.

Compare the two patterns. With 在, the sentence is about the thing and tells you where it is: 书在桌子上. With 有, the sentence is about the place and tells you what is there: 桌子上有一本书.

Bug 4: 是 says what fills the place

The fourth sentence, 桌子上是一本书, is good Chinese. The Chinese Grammar Wiki explains that in the pattern place + 是 + noun, the thing after 是 is the only thing worth mentioning in that place. Its example is 袋子里是我的午饭, translated as "the only thing in the bag is my lunch". So 桌子上是一本书 answers the question "What's that on the desk?": it is a book. If the student simply wanted to say that a book is there, among whatever else, the right verb is 有.

SentenceWhat it does
书在桌子上。Says where the book is.
桌子上有一本书。Says that there is a book on the desk.
桌子上是一本书。Says what the thing on the desk is: a book.

Here, there and where: 儿 or 里?

Mandarin has two sets of words for here, there and where.

With 儿With 里
here这儿 zhèr这里 zhèli
there那儿 nàr那里 nàli
where?哪儿 nǎr哪里 nǎlǐ

The 儿 forms add an r sound to the end of the syllable, a feature called erhua. Wikipedia's article explains that standard Mandarin uses some erhua, as in 哪儿, and that colloquial speech in northern China uses much more. Many speakers from southern China avoid it and say 哪里 instead, and erhua is extremely rare among Mandarin speakers in Taiwan and Singapore. Both sets are correct everywhere; choose the 儿 forms if you are learning with a northern teacher and the 里 forms for Taiwan or Singapore, and understand both. When 哪里 is read with two full third tones, nǎlǐ, the third-tone change of Lesson 4 makes the first syllable rise; Wiktionary also records a reading with a light 里, nǎli.

Living somewhere: 住在

Most verbs put 在 + place before the verb, as Lesson 18 showed. The Chinese Grammar Wiki notes a few exceptions, verbs of location such as 住 (zhù, to live), 放 (to put), 坐 (to sit) and 站 (to stand), which take 在 + place after them: 你住在上海吗? (Do you live in Shanghai?). So "I live in Beijing" is 我住在北京, and "Where do you live?" is 你住在哪儿? TaiwanPlus's Legit Mando teaches the question as 你住哪裡?, without 在.

Addresses follow the big-to-small rule you already know from dates. Wikipedia's article on addresses notes that Chinese and Taiwanese addresses written in characters run from the largest area to the smallest, followed by the name of the person; written in the Latin alphabet, they follow the Western order. The address at the foot of Taiwan's Ministry of Education dictionary website, 臺北市大安區和平東路一段179號, runs city (市), district (區), road (路) and section (段), then the number (號).

Where is the restroom?

The question every traveller needs is 请问,洗手间在哪儿? or, in Taiwan, 請問,洗手間在哪裡? Wiktionary defines 洗手间 (xǐshǒujiān), literally "wash-hands room", as a bathroom, restroom or toilet; 厕所 (cèsuǒ) is a plainer word for a toilet. The answer uses everything in this lesson: 在那儿 (over there), 在左边 (on the left), 在教室旁边 (next to the classroom).

Characters to learn

CharacterTraditionalPinyinMeaningRadicalStrokes
里裡 (13 strokes) or 裏 for "inside"; 里 for a village or a unit of distancelǐ (li3)in, inside里7
外samewài (wai4)outside夕5
前sameqián (qian2)front; before刂 (刀)9
边邊 (19 strokes)biān (bian1); often lightside, edge辶 (辵)5
左samezuǒ (zuo3)left工5
右sameyòu (you4)right口5
桌samezhuō (zhuo1)table, desk木10
椅sameyǐ (yi3)chair木12
旁samepáng (pang2)side, beside方10
儿兒 (8 strokes)ér (er2); an r sound in 这儿, 哪儿child; the r ending儿2
住samezhù (zhu4)to live, to stay亻 (人)7
洗samexǐ (xi3)to wash氵 (水)9
间間 (12 strokes)jiān (jian1)room; between门 (門)7

Two of these are mergers of the kind Lesson 10 described. Simplified 里 stands for 裡 or 裏, inside, and for 里, a village or a traditional unit of distance; Wiktionary explains 裡 as the clothes radical 衤 with 里 for the sound, the lining of a garment. And Wiktionary's notes on origins explain two pairs you have now met: 左 began as a picture of a left hand, and the 又 at the top of 右 was originally a right hand, with 口 added later to tell the characters apart. The traditional 兒 is a picture of an infant, with the soft spot on top of the head drawn open.

Dialogue: at 王小文's home (written for this course)

SpeakerChinesePinyinEnglish
Maya请问,洗手间在哪儿?Qǐngwèn, xǐshǒujiān zài nǎr?Excuse me, where's the bathroom?
王小文在我房间旁边。Zài wǒ fángjiān pángbiān.Next to my room.
Maya你的房间里有什么?Nǐ de fángjiān li yǒu shénme?What's in your room?
王小文有一张床、一张桌子和两把椅子。Yǒu yì zhāng chuáng, yì zhāng zhuōzi hé liǎng bǎ yǐzi.There's a bed, a desk and two chairs.
Maya桌子上是什么?Zhuōzi shang shì shénme?What's that on the desk?
王小文是我的中文书。Shì wǒ de Zhōngwén shū.It's my Chinese book.
Maya你的猫在哪儿?Nǐ de māo zài nǎr?Where's your cat?
王小文在椅子下面。Zài yǐzi xiàmiàn.Under the chair.

Sort the sentences by verb. 在 tells where the bathroom and the cat are; 有 lists what is in the room; 是 identifies the thing on the desk. The measure word 把 (bǎ) for chairs comes from Wiktionary's entry for 椅子, which lists 把 and 张; 房间 (fángjiān) is a room.

Listening: where words

  1. Play Wiktionary's recordings of 這兒, 那兒 and 哪兒, then 這裡, 那裡 and 哪裡. Can you hear the r in the first three? Which recording in the second set begins with a rising tone? Answer: 哪裡, read nǎlǐ with the third-tone change.
  2. Play 旁邊 and 上面, then say 在桌子旁边 and 在桌子上面.
  3. Play 桌子, 椅子, 房間 and 廁所, and write the tones of the first syllables. Answers: zhuō 1, yǐ 3, fáng 2, cè 4.
  4. Watch Legit Mando, episode 8: Where do you live? on TaiwanPlus, free and without an account. The phrase lesson starts at 0:11, a short story at 2:30 and the writing segment, 住哪裡, at 4:54. Repeat 你住哪裡? after the host, and note that it uses 哪裡, not 哪兒.
  5. Watch Legit Mando, season 2, episode 6: Where is the bathroom?, about five minutes long, and write down the question in characters as the hosts teach it.

Speaking: describe your room

Alone: stand in your room, or look at a photo of one, and record at least eight sentences: three with 有 (我的房间里有一张床), three with 在 and a location word (书在桌子上), and two with 是 answering "what's that?" (椅子上是我的书包). Then say where you live with 住在.

With a partner: one of you describes a room using only Chinese while the other draws it on paper, then compare the drawing with the real room or photo. Swap roles, and use 左边, 右边, 前面 and 后面 at least once each.

Character writing: thirteen characters

Write each character five times, saying it aloud. Stroke counts: 里 7, 外 5, 前 9, 边 5, 左 5, 右 5, 桌 10, 椅 12, 旁 10, 儿 2, 住 7, 洗 9, 间 7. In 左 and 右, 汉典's order begins with the horizontal and then the long slanting stroke, and Wikipedia's article on stroke order notes that Taiwan's standard also writes the horizontal first in both. In 边, write 力 first and the walking radical 辶 last, the "bottom enclosures last" rule from Lesson 15. In 间, write the door 门 first, then 日 inside it. In 里, the bottom horizontal is the last stroke.

Check the animations on 汉典 (zdic.net) (shown for 边), and write the traditional forms 裡, 邊, 兒 and 間 once each, checking them on Taiwan's 國語小字典 (shown for 邊). Then draw a plan of your room on paper and label six things and their positions in characters.

Common misconceptions

  • "'The book is on the desk' needs 是." 在 is the verb: 书在桌子上, never 书是在桌子上.
  • "在桌子 means on the desk." Objects need a location word: 在桌子上. Only big places such as countries and cities go without: 在北京.
  • "'There is a book on the desk' is 有一本书在桌子上." The place comes first: 桌子上有一本书.
  • "桌子上是一本书 and 桌子上有一本书 mean the same." 是 names what is there, as the only thing worth mentioning; 有 simply says that a book is there.
  • "哪儿 is the only correct word for where." 哪里 is standard too, and it is the usual form in Taiwan and Singapore.
  • "住 works like other verbs: 我在北京住." With 住 the usual order is 我住在北京.

Pulling it together

Mandarin gives "to be" three jobs and three verbs. The verb 在 says where something is, with no 是: 书在桌子上. The verb 有 says what there is in a place, with the place first: 桌子上有一本书, negated as 没有. And 是 names what fills a place: 桌子上是一本书, the book and nothing else worth mentioning. Objects need a location word after them, 上, 下, 里, 外, 前, 后 or the forms with 面 and 边 such as 旁边, 左边 and 右边, while countries and cities do not. Here, there and where are 这儿, 那儿, 哪儿 in the north and 这里, 那里, 哪里 everywhere, especially in Taiwan and Singapore. The verb 住 takes 在 after it, 我住在北京, and addresses run from the biggest area to the smallest. Module 7 turns to questions: how to ask where, who, what and why without changing the word order.

Sources

  1. AllSet Learning. (n.d.). Expressing existence in a place with "zai"; Expressing location with "zai... shang / xia / li". Chinese Grammar Wiki. resources.allsetlearning.com
  2. AllSet Learning. (n.d.). Expressing existence with "you". Chinese Grammar Wiki. resources.allsetlearning.com
  3. AllSet Learning. (n.d.). Alternative existential sentences [place + 是 + noun]. Chinese Grammar Wiki. resources.allsetlearning.com
  4. AllSet Learning. (n.d.). Special cases of "zai" following verbs [住在]. Chinese Grammar Wiki. resources.allsetlearning.com
  5. Wikipedia contributors. (2026). Erhua [regional use]; Address [East Asian address order]. Wikipedia. en.wikipedia.org
  6. Wiktionary contributors. (2026). 洗手間; 廁所; 椅子 [measure words]; 裡; 左; 右; 兒 [glyph origins]; 這兒; 哪裡; and other entries with Mandarin audio. Wiktionary. en.wiktionary.org
  7. Wikipedia contributors. (2026). Stroke order [Taiwan's standard: 左 and 右 with the horizontal first]. Wikipedia. en.wikipedia.org
  8. TaiwanPlus. (n.d.). Legit Mando, episode 8: Where do you live?; season 2, episode 6: Where is the bathroom? Public Television Service. taiwanplus.com
  9. Ministry of Education, Taiwan. (2021). 國語辭典簡編本 [Concise Mandarin Chinese dictionary] [site footer: Taipei campus address]. dict.concised.moe.edu.tw
Key terms
在 (zài)
To be at or in a place, with no 是: 书在桌子上. Negative 不在.
place + 有 + thing
There is or there are: 桌子上有一本书. Negative 没有.
place + 是 + thing
Names what fills a place, the only thing worth mentioning: 袋子里是我的午饭.
方位词 (fāngwèicí)
Location words after a noun: 上, 下, 里, 外, 前, 后, and forms with 面 and 边 such as 旁边.
左边 / 右边 / 旁边
On the left / on the right / beside, next to.
这儿, 那儿, 哪儿 / 这里, 那里, 哪里
Here, there, where: the 儿 forms are northern; the 里 forms are standard everywhere and usual in Taiwan and Singapore.
erhua (儿化)
Adding an r sound to a syllable, as in 哪儿 nǎr; common in northern China, extremely rare in Taiwan and Singapore.
住在 + place
To live in a place: 我住在北京. 住, 放, 坐 and 站 take 在 after the verb.
洗手间 / 厕所
Restroom, literally 'wash-hands room' / toilet.
big-to-small addresses
Chinese and Taiwanese addresses written in characters run from the largest area to the smallest: city, district, road, number.

Module 7: Questions and 了

Asking questions with question words, A-not-A, 还是 and 吧, choosing between 会, 能 and 可以, and the particle 了 for completed actions and changed situations, with 过 for experience.

Question Words Stay Where the Answer Goes

  • Ask questions with 谁, 什么, 哪, 哪儿, 几, 多少, 怎么, 怎么样, 为什么 and 什么时候, putting each where the answer goes and leaving out 吗.
  • Ask yes-no questions in the A-not-A form, offer choices with 还是 and state options with 或者, and make suggestions with 吧.
  • Choose between 会, 能 and 可以, and between 知道 and 认识, and ask what words mean and how characters are written.
  • Read and write 谁, 为, 怎, 样, 还, 吧, 知, 道, 意, 思 and 能.

One question, one word too many

A student who had learned 吗 in Lesson 6 wanted to ask a friend where she was going, and said 你去哪儿吗? The friend understood, but the sentence is wrong, and the reason is the most useful rule in this lesson. The Chinese Grammar Wiki puts it plainly: you do not normally add 吗 to a sentence that is already a question. 哪儿 (nǎr, where) already makes 你去哪儿 a question, so 吗 has nothing to do. The correct question is simply 你去哪儿?

English questions move their question word to the front: "Where are you going?" Mandarin questions do not move anything. This lesson shows how that works for every question word, then adds the other ways Mandarin asks questions: the A-not-A form, 还是 for choices and 吧 for suggestions.

The rule: put the question word where the answer goes

The Chinese Grammar Wiki explains that word order is the same in Chinese for questions and statements: you simply put the question word in the place of the thing you want to ask about. Its example is 我是小李 (I am Xiao Li), which becomes 你是谁? (Nǐ shì shéi?), "Who are you?", literally "you are who?". Read each question below with its answer and you will see that only one slot changes.

Question wordQuestionAnswer
谁 shéi, who他是谁?他是我哥哥。
什么 shénme, what你喝什么?我喝茶。
哪 nǎ + measure word, which你要哪本书?我要这本书。
哪儿 nǎr or 哪里 nǎlǐ, where你去哪儿?我去学校。
什么时候 shénme shíhou, when你什么时候回家?我五点回家。
几 jǐ or 多少 duōshao, how many你有几本书?我有三本书。
怎么 zěnme, how你怎么去学校?我坐车去学校。
怎么样 zěnmeyàng, how is it中国菜怎么样?很好吃。
为什么 wèishénme, why你为什么学中文?因为我喜欢中文。

Notice where 什么时候 sits: in the time slot, before the verb, exactly where the answer 五点 goes, as Lesson 18 taught. 哪儿 sits in the place slot of 你在哪儿吃饭? for the same reason. The Chinese Grammar Wiki adds that in speech people normally say shéi, not shuí, for 谁; Wiktionary marks shuí as literary but notes that it is colloquial in Singapore. The answer to 为什么 usually begins with 因为 (yīnwèi), because, and 坐车 (zuò chē) means to go by car or bus, which Lesson 24 explains.

Worth holding on to: a Mandarin question is its answer with a hole in it. Say the answer you expect, replace the unknown part with a question word, and stop. Do not move anything, and do not add 吗.

Three more question words in use

  • 怎么 + verb asks how to do something. The Chinese Grammar Wiki gives the pattern subject + 怎么 + verb + object: 你们怎么学中文?, "How do you study Chinese?". The same pattern gives the classroom question 这个字怎么写?, "How do you write this character?".
  • 怎么样 asks how something is or what someone thinks: 你最近怎么样? (How have you been recently?), one of the wiki's examples. At the end of a suggestion it means "how about it?": 我们星期六去,怎么样?
  • 几 and 多少 both ask how many. As Lesson 15 explained, 几 is for numbers you expect to be small and takes a measure word; 多少 is for larger numbers and prices, as in 多少钱 from Lesson 16.

Yes-no questions without 吗: A-not-A

Mandarin can also ask a yes-no question by saying the verb twice, positive then negative. The Chinese Grammar Wiki calls this the affirmative-negative question and notes that it feels much more natural in Chinese than its English equivalent, "Are you going or not?". Its examples include 是不是? (Is it or not?) and 他们来不来? (Are they coming?). The 不 in the middle is usually light.

  • 你去不去? (Nǐ qù bu qù?) Are you going?
  • 你喜不喜欢中文? Do you like Chinese? With a two-character verb, the wiki notes, it is more common to repeat only the first character, though 你喜欢不喜欢中文? is also correct.
  • 你有没有弟弟? (Nǐ yǒu méiyǒu dìdi?) Do you have a younger brother? With 有 the negative is 没有, as in Lesson 14.

An A-not-A question is already a question, so it takes no 吗: the wiki's own warning example is 这是不是书吗?, "Is this is a book?". Answer it the way you answer a 吗 question, by repeating the verb: 去 or 不去, 有 or 没有.

Or: 还是 in questions, 或者 in statements

English "or" has two Mandarin equivalents. The Chinese Grammar Wiki explains that 还是 (háishi) is normally used when asking a question and 或者 (huòzhě) mostly in statements. So "Do you drink tea or coffee?" is 你喝茶还是喝咖啡?, one of the wiki's examples, and the question needs no 吗 because 还是 already asks. "We'll go on Saturday or Sunday" is a statement: 我们星期六或者星期天去.

吧: suggestions and softer sentences

The particle 吧 (ba) at the end of a sentence turns a command into a suggestion. The Chinese Grammar Wiki notes that with 我们 it means "let's": 我们走吧, let's go. It also softens other statements, making them gentler and more polite, as in its example 再等一等吧, "wait a little longer". Unlike 吗, 吧 does not turn a statement into a yes-no question; it invites agreement.

Can: 会, 能 and 可以

English "can" has three Mandarin partners. The Chinese Grammar Wiki gives a useful first guide, while warning that real usage overlaps: 会 means "know how to", for learned skills, as in Lesson 17; 能 (néng) means "to be able to"; and 可以 (kěyǐ) means "to have permission to".

  • 我会说中文。 I can speak Chinese: I have learned how.
  • 我今天不能去。 I can't go today: something prevents me.
  • 我可以坐这儿吗? May I sit here? Asking permission.

Knowing and meaning: 知道, 认识 and 意思

English "know" also splits. Wiktionary defines 知道 (zhīdào) as to know something or be aware of it, and 认识 (rènshi), from Lesson 6, as to know a person or recognize something. So 我知道他的名字 is "I know his name", and 我认识他 is "I know him". The classroom answer you will need most is 我不知道, "I don't know".

Wiktionary defines 意思 (yìsi) as meaning. Together with 怎么 it gives the questions every learner needs:

  • 这是什么意思? What does this mean?
  • 这个字怎么写? How do you write this character?
  • 这个字怎么念? (zěnme niàn) How do you read this character?
  • 请再说一遍。 (Qǐng zài shuō yí biàn.) Please say that again.

Characters to learn

CharacterTraditionalPinyinMeaningRadicalStrokes
谁誰 (15 strokes)shéi (shei2); also shuíwho讠 (言)10
为為 (9 strokes)wèi (wei4) in 为什么for; because of丶 (traditional 火)4
怎samezěn (zen3)how, in 怎么心9
样樣 (15 strokes)yàng (yang4)kind; way, appearance木10
还還 (17 strokes)hái (hai2)still, also; in 还是辶 (辵)7
吧sameba (ba5)suggestion particle口7
知samezhī (zhi1)to know矢8
道samedào (dao4); light in 知道 on the mainlandroad, way; to say辶 (辵)12 (13 in Taiwan's count)
意sameyì (yi4)meaning, idea心13
思samesī (si1); light in 意思to think心9
能samenéng (neng2)can, be able to月 (肉)10

Wiktionary's notes on origins hold some surprises. The character 能 began as a picture of a bear: the two 匕 on the right are its paws, and 月 is its face with an open mouth. The oldest form of 知 combined an adult, a mouth and a child, knowledge passed down by speaking, before one part changed into 矢. And 谁 is the speech radical with 隹 for its sound. Three characters share the heart radical 心, the old seat of thinking: 怎, 意 and 思.

Dialogue: making weekend plans (written for this course)

SpeakerChinesePinyinEnglish
王小文这个周末你做什么?Zhège zhōumò nǐ zuò shénme?What are you doing this weekend?
Maya我还不知道。你呢?Wǒ hái bù zhīdào. Nǐ ne?I don't know yet. What about you?
王小文我们去看电影吧!Wǒmen qù kàn diànyǐng ba!Let's go and see a movie!
Maya好啊!什么时候?星期六还是星期天?Hǎo a! Shénme shíhou? Xīngqīliù háishi xīngqītiān?Great! When? Saturday or Sunday?
王小文星期六下午,怎么样?Xīngqīliù xiàwǔ, zěnmeyàng?Saturday afternoon, how about that?
Maya可以。我们在哪儿见?Kěyǐ. Wǒmen zài nǎr jiàn?OK. Where shall we meet?
王小文在学校门口。Zài xuéxiào ménkǒu.At the school gate.
Maya还有谁去?Hái yǒu shéi qù?Who else is going?
王小文我弟弟。你认识他吗?Wǒ dìdi. Nǐ rènshi tā ma?My younger brother. Do you know him?
Maya认识!他会说英语,对不对?Rènshi! Tā huì shuō Yīngyǔ, duì bu duì?Yes! He speaks English, doesn't he?

Count the question types: 什么, 什么时候, 哪儿 and 谁 sit in their answer slots; 还是 offers a choice; 怎么样 asks for agreement; 认识他吗 uses 吗; and 对不对 is an A-not-A tag, like "right?". New words: 周末 (zhōumò, weekend), 电影 (diànyǐng, movie) and 门口 (ménkǒu, entrance), built from 门 and 口. Notice 还 twice, once as "still" in 还不知道 and once as "also" in 还有谁.

Listening: question words

  1. Play Wiktionary's recordings of 為什麼, 怎麼 and 怎麼樣, and write the tone of each full syllable. Answers: wèi 4, shén 2; zěn 3; zěn 3, yàng 4, with 麼 light in all three.
  2. Play 還是 and 或者, then make one question with 还是 and one statement with 或者 about drinks.
  3. Play 知道, 意思, 能 and 可以. In 可以, two third tones meet: which syllable changes? Answer: the first, so kěyǐ is said with a rising 可.
  4. Watch Legit Mando, episode 7: What's fun in ...? on TaiwanPlus, free and without an account. The phrase lesson starts at 0:11 and the writing segment at 5:28. The question it teaches, 哪裡好玩?, puts 哪裡 in the subject slot: "where is fun?". Repeat it, then ask the same about your own town with 哪儿.

Speaking: twenty questions

Alone: write ten questions you could ask a new classmate, using at least eight different question words and one A-not-A question, then record yourself asking them and answering them about yourself. Check each for an unwanted 吗.

With a partner: play twenty questions. One of you thinks of a famous person, place or thing; the other may ask up to twenty yes-no questions in Chinese, with 吗 or A-not-A, before guessing with 是不是: 他是不是美国人? 他会不会唱歌? (chànggē, sing). Then swap.

Character writing: eleven characters

Write each character five times, saying it aloud. Stroke counts: 谁 10, 为 4, 怎 9, 样 10, 还 7, 吧 7, 知 8, 道 12, 意 13, 思 9, 能 10. In 为, the first stroke is a dot at the top left and the last is a dot inside. In 还 and 道, the walking radical 辶 goes last, the bottom-enclosure rule from Lesson 15. In 意, write 音 (立 over 日) and then 心. In 能, write the left side, 厶 over 月, before the two 匕 on the right.

Check the animations on 汉典 (zdic.net) (shown for 能), and write the traditional forms 誰, 為, 樣 and 還 once each, checking them on Taiwan's 國語小字典 (shown for 還). Then write five questions in characters, each with a different question word.

Common misconceptions

  • "Every question ends in 吗." Only yes-no questions take 吗. Questions with a question word, an A-not-A pair or 还是 do not.
  • "Question words go first, as in English." They stay where the answer goes: 你去哪儿?, not 哪儿你去?
  • "或者 and 还是 are interchangeable." 还是 is normally for questions and 或者 for statements.
  • "知道 and 认识 both mean know, so either will do." 知道 is knowing a fact; 认识 is knowing a person.
  • "会, 能 and 可以 all mean can, so pick any." Start with know how, be able, and be allowed, and expect some overlap.
  • "吧 makes a question." It makes a suggestion or softens a statement: 我们走吧, let's go.

Looking back

Mandarin questions keep statement word order. Put the question word where the answer will go, 谁, 什么, 哪 with a measure word, 哪儿, 什么时候, 几 or 多少, 怎么, 怎么样 or 为什么, and add no 吗. Yes-no questions use 吗 or the A-not-A form, 去不去 and 有没有, with answers that repeat the verb. In questions "or" is 还是, and in statements it is 或者. The particle 吧 turns a command into a suggestion. For "can", start from 会 (know how), 能 (be able) and 可以 (be allowed); for "know", use 知道 for facts and 认识 for people. And when you are stuck, ask 这是什么意思? or 这个字怎么写? Lesson 21 takes on the particle that worries learners most: 了.

Sources

  1. AllSet Learning. (n.d.). Placement of question words. Chinese Grammar Wiki. resources.allsetlearning.com
  2. AllSet Learning. (n.d.). Yes-no questions with "ma" [no 吗 on sentences that are already questions]; Affirmative-negative question. Chinese Grammar Wiki. resources.allsetlearning.com
  3. AllSet Learning. (n.d.). Comparing "haishi" and "huozhe". Chinese Grammar Wiki. resources.allsetlearning.com
  4. AllSet Learning. (n.d.). Suggestions with "ba"; Softening speech with "ba". Chinese Grammar Wiki. resources.allsetlearning.com
  5. AllSet Learning. (n.d.). How to do something with "zenme"; Asking how something is with "zenmeyang". Chinese Grammar Wiki. resources.allsetlearning.com
  6. AllSet Learning. (n.d.). Comparing "hui," "neng," "keyi". Chinese Grammar Wiki. resources.allsetlearning.com
  7. Wiktionary contributors. (2026). 誰 [readings]; 知道; 認識; 意思 [definitions]; 能; 知 [glyph origins]; and entries with Mandarin audio. Wiktionary. en.wiktionary.org
  8. TaiwanPlus. (n.d.). Legit Mando, episode 7: What's fun in ...? Public Television Service. taiwanplus.com
Key terms
question words in place
A question keeps statement order, with the question word where the answer goes: 你去哪儿? 我去学校。
谁 / 什么 / 哪
Who (shéi) / what / which, with a measure word: 哪本书.
哪儿, 哪里 / 什么时候
Where / when; each sits in its slot before the verb: 你什么时候回家?
怎么 / 怎么样 / 为什么
How (to do): 这个字怎么写? / how is it, how about it / why.
A-not-A question
A yes-no question made of positive and negative verbs, with no 吗: 你去不去? 你有没有弟弟?
还是 / 或者
Or: 还是 in questions (茶还是咖啡?), 或者 in statements.
吧 (ba)
Turns a command into a suggestion or softens a statement: 我们走吧, let's go.
会 / 能 / 可以
Can: know how to / be able to / be allowed to, with some overlap.
知道 / 认识
To know a fact / to know a person.
意思 (yìsi)
Meaning: 这是什么意思? What does this mean?

了: Completed Actions and Changed Situations

  • Use 了 after a verb for a completed action, especially with a time or a number and measure word, and at the end of a sentence for a new situation.
  • Test the claim that 了 is a past tense against sentences about the past without 了, the future with 了, and negatives with 没.
  • Use 已经 ... 了, 不 ... 了 for 'not any more', verb + 完 for finishing, and 过 for experience, and make each one negative correctly.
  • Read and write 了, 已, 经, 完, 过, 雨 and 就.

The claim: 了 is the past tense

Many learners first meet 了 (le) as "the Mandarin past tense", the equivalent of English -ed. Wikipedia's article on Chinese grammar notes that the particle "is sometimes considered to be a past tense marker". The idea is attractive, because so many sentences about the past contain it. The Chinese Grammar Wiki's examples include 我买了三本书, "I bought three books", and 她上个月去了北京, "she went to Beijing last month".

This lesson puts the claim on trial. Four kinds of sentences are the evidence: if 了 were a past tense, each would behave differently. After the evidence comes a verdict that fits all of it, and then the patterns you can use today.

Evidence 1: the past without 了

Wikipedia states that Chinese does not have grammatical markers of tense: the time of an action is shown by time words such as yesterday and now, or left to the context. Plenty of sentences about the past contain no 了. The Chinese Grammar Wiki's example 以前,我不会说中文, "Before, I couldn't speak Chinese", describes a past situation with no 了 in it. The wiki also explains that 了 is not used with habitual or continuous actions, so a sentence such as 我以前每天走路去学校, "I used to walk to school every day", needs none either. Here 走路 (zǒulù) means to walk.

Evidence 2: the future with 了

The same wiki notes that 了 can appear in sentences about the future as well as the past, because what matters is whether the action has been completed, whatever the time frame. Wikipedia agrees that 了 can be used with future events in the right context. So 明天我下了课就去找你 means "Tomorrow, once I've finished class, I'll come and find you": the class will be over before the finding begins. The 就 (jiù) in that sentence means "then". The Chinese Grammar Wiki describes this as the first use of 就 to learn: one part of the sentence sets up a situation, and the part with 就 says what follows from it.

Evidence 3: no 了 after 没

To say something did not happen, Mandarin puts 没 or 没有 before the verb, as Lesson 14 showed for 有. The Chinese Grammar Wiki warns that 了 is not normally used with 没有, because 了 marks completed actions and 没有 marks actions that did not happen. It calls 我没有做了 "a very common mistake for beginner learners" and corrects it to 我没有做, "I didn't do it". A real past tense would show up in negative sentences too.

Evidence 4: 了 for something true right now

The Chinese Grammar Wiki gives examples of 了 at the end of a sentence where nothing is in the past at all. For example, 下雨了 (xià yǔ le) means "It's raining": it wasn't raining before, and now it is. Similarly, 我饿了 (wǒ è le) means "I'm hungry" right now, and 宝宝会说话了 means "The baby can talk now". In each, 了 marks a change, a new situation that was not true before. Wikipedia calls this sentence-final 了 a marker of change of state. With an age, 我十六岁了 means "I'm sixteen now", a new fact since your birthday.

The verdict: completion and change, not tense

The evidence settles the dispute. The Chinese Grammar Wiki calls 了 a marker of aspect, which is not the same as tense: tense is about when an action happens, while this aspect is about whether the action is complete within a time frame. Textbooks usually separate two main uses.

Verb 了, often called 了1Sentence 了, often called 了2
PositionRight after the verbAt the end of the sentence
MeaningThe action is completeThe situation has changed; something is now the case
Example我买了三本书。 I bought three books.下雨了。 It's raining now.

The core of it: do not ask "is this in the past?". Ask "is this action complete?" or "is this a new situation?". If the answer to either is yes, 了 is likely to belong; if the sentence describes a habit or a past state, or is negated with 没, it is likely not to.

Honesty requires one more piece of evidence. The Chinese Grammar Wiki calls the use of 了 "the million-dollar question that confounds all learners of Chinese", and says it is learned through many individual patterns, not a few simple rules. The patterns below are the most useful first ones.

Verb 了 with an object: say when or how many

When the verb has an object, the Chinese Grammar Wiki notes that 了 sits comfortably right after the verb if the time is specified or the object has a number and measure word.

  • With a time: 我今天吃了早饭。 I ate breakfast today.
  • With a number and measure word: 我喝了两杯咖啡。 I drank two cups of coffee. 老师问了五个问题。 The teacher asked five questions.
  • Otherwise 了 can follow the object: 上个月我去台湾了。 I went to Taiwan last month.
  • A string of completed actions needs only one 了: 我们上周去北京开会了。 We went to Beijing for a meeting last week.

Four more patterns with 了 and 过

  • 已经 ... 了, already. The Chinese Grammar Wiki calls 已经 (yǐjīng) ... 了 the basic pattern for "already" and notes that the 了 is easy to forget but makes the sentence more natural: 他们已经走了, "they've already left".
  • 不 ... 了, not any more. 不 before the verb and 了 at the end mark a change of plan or a stop: 我不想吃了, "I don't want to eat any more"; 我不去看电影了, "I've decided not to go to the movie", both from the wiki.
  • Verb + 完, finished. 完 (wán) after a verb says the action is finished, and the wiki's page on result complements notes that 了 nearly always appears with them: 我做完作业了, "I've finished my homework"; 你看完了吗?, "Have you finished reading it?".
  • 过, have ever. 过 (guo) after a verb says that something has been done at least once, without saying when; it is about experience. The wiki's answer to the question "do I use 过 to make past tense?" is that it is especially for past experiences. 我去过中国 is "I've been to China". The negative uses 没, with 过 kept: 我没学过这个词, "I've never studied this word".

Everyday questions sometimes use both: 你吃过了吗? (Nǐ chī guo le ma?), "Have you eaten?". The Chinese Grammar Wiki notes that verb + 过 + 了 is common with daily routines such as eating, brushing teeth and showering: 她吃过了, "she has eaten already".

Characters to learn

CharacterTraditionalPinyinMeaningRadicalStrokes
了samele (le5); liǎo in some wordscompletion and change particle亅 (乙 in mainland dictionaries)2
已sameyǐ (yi3)already, in 已经己3
经經 (13 strokes)jīng (jing1); light in 已经to pass through; classic纟 (糸)8
完samewán (wan2)to finish; complete宀7
过過 (13 strokes)guò (guo4); guo, light, after a verbto pass; experience marker辶 (辵)6
雨sameyǔ (yu3)rain雨8
就samejiù (jiu4)then; right away尢12

Wiktionary explains 雨 as a picture of a cloud with drops of rain falling from it, the top horizontal added later, and you can still see the four drops. It also warns not to confuse 已 with two look-alikes: 己 (jǐ, self), which stays open at the top left, and 巳 (sì), which closes completely. The 完 of "finished" contains 元 from Lesson 16 under a roof.

Dialogue: after the weekend (written for this course)

SpeakerChinesePinyinEnglish
王小文你吃过饭了吗?Nǐ chī guo fàn le ma?Have you eaten?
Maya吃过了。我今天吃了两个包子。Chī guo le. Wǒ jīntiān chī le liǎng ge bāozi.Yes. I had two steamed buns today.
王小文星期六你们看电影了吗?Xīngqīliù nǐmen kàn diànyǐng le ma?Did you see the movie on Saturday?
Maya没看。下雨了,我们没去。Méi kàn. Xià yǔ le, wǒmen méi qù.No. It started raining, so we didn't go.
王小文那你做什么了?Nà nǐ zuò shénme le?So what did you do?
Maya我在家看了三本书!Wǒ zài jiā kàn le sān běn shū!I read three books at home!
王小文三本?你已经看完了?Sān běn? Nǐ yǐjīng kàn wán le?Three? You've already finished them?
Maya对。现在我不想看书了!Duì. Xiànzài wǒ bù xiǎng kàn shū le!Yes. Now I don't want to read any more!
王小文你吃过饺子吗?Nǐ chī guo jiǎozi ma?Have you ever eaten dumplings?
Maya没吃过。Méi chī guo.Never.
王小文明天我下了课就带你去吃!Míngtiān wǒ xià le kè jiù dài nǐ qù chī!Tomorrow, after class, I'll take you!

Label every 了 in the dialogue as completion or change, and notice the negatives without it: 没看, 没去, 没吃过. The phrase 看了三本书 has its number and measure word; 下雨了 is a new situation; 不想看书了 is "not any more"; and 下了课就 is a completion in the future. New words: 包子 (bāozi, steamed bun), 饺子 (jiǎozi, dumpling, from Lesson 22) and 带 (dài, to take someone along).

Listening: completion and change

  1. Play Wiktionary's recordings of 了: the page has a recording of le and others of liǎo. Which one is the particle? Answer: le, short and light.
  2. Play 已經, 完 and 過, then say: 我已经吃完了。 我去过北京。
  3. Play 下雨 and 就, then say 下雨了! as if looking out of a window, and 下了课就回家 as a plan.
  4. Watch Legit Mando, episode 5: Have you eaten? on TaiwanPlus, free and without an account, about six minutes long. The phrase lesson starts at 0:11 and the writing segment at 4:41. Listen for 吃過了嗎? and identify the 過 and the 了.
  5. Self-dictation: record these, then write them down the next day and label each 了 as completion or change: 我买了一本书。 天冷了。 我不去了。 他已经回家了。

Speaking: what changed this year

Alone: record six sentences about how things have changed since last year, using sentence 了: 我十六岁了。 我会写一百个汉字了。 我不喜欢那个电视节目了。 Then record three things you did last weekend with verb 了 and a number: 我看了两个电影。

With a partner: ask each other five "have you ever" questions with 过, such as 你去过中国吗? and 你吃过饺子吗?, and answer with 去过 or 没去过. Then report to a third person: 她去过台北,没去过北京。

Character writing: seven characters

Write each character five times, saying it aloud. Stroke counts: 了 2, 已 3, 经 8, 完 7, 过 6, 雨 8, 就 12. In 了, the first stroke turns at the top and the second is the long vertical hook. In 已, leave a gap at the top left; compare 己 and 巳 as you write. In 过, write 寸 first and the walking radical 辶 last. In 雨, the four dots inside come last. In 就, write 京 on the left before 尤 on the right.

Check the animations on 汉典 (zdic.net) (shown for 已), and write the traditional forms 經 and 過 once each, checking them on Taiwan's 國語小字典 (shown for 過). Then write three sentences about today in characters, each with a different 了.

Common misconceptions

  • "了 is the past tense." It marks completion or a change of situation. Sentences about the past can lack it, and sentences about the future can have it.
  • "The negative of 我去了 is 我没去了." 了 is not normally used with 没: 我没去.
  • "Every verb about the past needs 了." Habits and past states take none, and a string of actions usually needs only one.
  • "下雨了 means it rained." It usually means it is raining now, when it was not before.
  • "过 is another past tense." It marks experience, having done something at least once: 我去过中国.
  • "已经 is enough by itself." The natural pattern is 已经 ... 了: 他们已经走了.

The takeaway

The claim that 了 is a past tense fails four tests: the past often goes without 了, the future can have it, negatives with 没 drop it, and sentence-final 了 often describes something true right now. Mandarin has no tense; 了 marks aspect. Verb 了 says an action is complete, most naturally with a time or a number and measure word: 我喝了两杯咖啡. Sentence 了 says a situation has changed: 下雨了, 我十六岁了, and with 不, 我不去了. Add 已经 ... 了 for already, verb + 完 for finished, and 过 for experience, negated as 没 ... 过. Module 8 puts the grammar of the last twenty lessons to work in restaurants and on public transport.

Sources

  1. Wikipedia contributors. (2026). Chinese grammar [aspects: no grammatical tense; perfective 了; change-of-state 了; 过]. Wikipedia. en.wikipedia.org
  2. AllSet Learning. (n.d.). Expressing completion with "le" [aspect not tense; time or quantity; completion in the future]. Chinese Grammar Wiki. resources.allsetlearning.com
  3. AllSet Learning. (n.d.). Expressing a change with "le"; Expressing "not anymore" with "le". Chinese Grammar Wiki. resources.allsetlearning.com
  4. AllSet Learning. (n.d.). Negation of past actions with "meiyou" [go easy on the 了]. Chinese Grammar Wiki. resources.allsetlearning.com
  5. AllSet Learning. (n.d.). Expressing experiences with "guo"; Using "guo" with "le". Chinese Grammar Wiki. resources.allsetlearning.com
  6. AllSet Learning. (n.d.). Expressing "already" with "yijing"; Expressing "then" with "jiu"; Result complement. Chinese Grammar Wiki. resources.allsetlearning.com
  7. AllSet Learning. (n.d.). Learner FAQ [how do I use 了; is 过 the past tense]; Sequencing events in time [以前]. Chinese Grammar Wiki. resources.allsetlearning.com
  8. Wiktionary contributors. (2026). 了; 已 [usage note on look-alikes]; 雨 [glyph origin]; 已經; 過; 下雨; and entries with Mandarin audio. Wiktionary. en.wiktionary.org
  9. TaiwanPlus. (2021). Legit Mando, episode 5: Have you eaten? Public Television Service. taiwanplus.com
Key terms
aspect
Whether an action is complete or a situation has changed, as opposed to tense, when it happens. Mandarin marks aspect, not tense.
verb 了 (了1)
After the verb: the action is complete. Most natural with a time or a number and measure word: 我买了三本书.
sentence 了 (了2)
At the end of a sentence: a new situation. 下雨了, it's raining now; 我十六岁了, I'm sixteen now.
没 without 了
For actions that did not happen: 我没去, never 我没去了.
不 ... 了
Not any more, or a change of plan: 我不想吃了; 我不去了.
已经 ... 了
Already: 他们已经走了.
verb + 完
Finished doing: 我做完作业了.
过 (guo)
Experience, having done something at least once: 我去过中国. Negative 没 ... 过: 我没去过.
就 (jiù)
Then, introducing what follows from a situation: 下了课就去.
雨 (yǔ)
Rain, a picture of drops falling from a cloud; 下雨 is to rain.

Module 8: Eating and Getting Around

Ordering food and drink in mainland China, Taiwan and Singapore, regional food and table customs, and getting around by public transport with directions and 从 ... 到.

Ordering Food: Noodle Shop, Breakfast Shop and Hawker Centre

  • Order food and drink with 我要, 我想 and 来, using the measure words 碗, 杯 and 份, and ask for the bill.
  • Ask for food without chilli, and say whether you are eating in or taking away with the words used in mainland China, Taiwan and Singapore.
  • Name common dishes, drinks and meats, including noodles, rice, dumplings, tea, beef, chicken and fish.
  • Read and write 菜, 面, 米, 茶, 喝, 想, 碗, 饺, 肉, 鸡, 鱼 and 牛.

Three meals in three cities

On a winter trip, Maya eats lunch in a noodle shop in Beijing, breakfast the next week in a breakfast shop in Taipei, and dinner at a hawker centre in Singapore. The food is different each time, and so are some of the words: the menu, the way you say "for here" or "to go", even the script on the wall. The core of ordering, though, is the same in all three, and it uses the grammar you already have. This lesson follows her through the three meals.

Lunch in Beijing: a bowl of noodles

Maya and 王小文 go into a small noodle shop near the school. On the wall is the 菜单 (càidān), the menu. Wiktionary defines 菜 as a vegetable and also as a dish or course, so 菜单 is the list of dishes, and 点菜 (diǎncài), to choose dishes, is to order.

They choose 炸酱面 (zhájiàngmiàn). Wiktionary describes it as thick wheat noodles topped with ground pork stir-fried with salty fermented soybean paste, and Wikipedia's article cites a dictionary of Chinese culture that lists it, with dumplings, among the dishes identified with Beijing. To order, they could say any of these:

  • 我要两碗炸酱面。 I want two bowls of zhajiang noodles. 要 is direct and clear.
  • 我想吃炸酱面。 I'd like zhajiang noodles. The Chinese Grammar Wiki describes 想 (xiǎng) as "would like to", a more tactful way to say what you want, and notes that 要 can sound a bit more demanding.
  • 来两碗炸酱面。 Two bowls of zhajiang noodles, please. Wiktionary notes that 来 can stand for many verbs, its meaning depending on the context; in a restaurant it means "bring us" or "we'll have".

Notice the measure word 碗 (wǎn), bowl, between the number and the food, as Lesson 15 taught. To drink, 喝 (hē): 你喝什么? 我喝茶. If you do not want chilli, add 不要辣 (bú yào là), "no chilli". When you have finished, call 服务员 (fúwùyuán), which Wiktionary glosses as a server or waiter, and ask to pay: 买单 (mǎidān), which Wiktionary defines as to pay the restaurant bill. If you want leftovers to take home, ask for 打包 (dǎbāo), which Wiktionary explains as putting food in a takeaway box, a word that began in Mandarin. To eat in is 堂食 (tángshí), a word you will see on signs.

Breakfast in Taipei: 蛋饼 and 豆浆

A week later Maya is in Taipei, where the signs are in traditional characters. She goes into a 早餐店 (zǎocāndiàn), a breakfast shop, and orders a Taiwanese favourite: 蛋餅 (dànbǐng), which Wikipedia describes as a Taiwanese breakfast dish, an egg pancake or rolled egg crepe, sold mainly at breakfast shops, restaurants and night market stalls. With it she drinks 豆漿 (dòujiāng), soy milk.

Her order uses another measure word, 份 (fèn), which Wiktionary lists as the measure word for servings: 老闆,一份蛋餅,一杯豆漿。 The owner answers with a question: 內用還是外帶? (Nèiyòng háishi wàidài?) Wiktionary labels 內用 as chiefly Taiwanese for "to eat in, for here", and defines 外帶 as to take away. Maya answers 內用, and sits down to eat.

Dinner in Singapore: chicken rice at a hawker centre

In Singapore the Chinese signs are in simplified characters again. Maya goes to a hawker centre, 小贩中心 (xiǎofàn zhōngxīn) in Chinese, which Wikipedia describes as an often open-air food court with many stalls selling affordable meals. She lines up for 海南鸡饭 (Hǎinán jīfàn), Hainanese chicken rice. Wikipedia describes it as poached or roasted chicken with seasoned rice and chilli sauce, created by immigrants from Hainan in southern China and now commonly associated with Singaporean cuisine, available in most food courts and hawker centres.

She orders 一份鸡饭, then decides to take it back to her hotel: 打包. The word has travelled. Wiktionary records that Malay borrowed it from Cantonese 打包 (daa3 baau1) as tapau, a colloquial word for taking food away, so you may hear "tapau" at the same stall.

The language of ordering

You want toSayNotes
Order我要... / 我想吃... / 来...想 is the most tactful; 来 is casual
Say how much一碗面, 一杯茶, 一份鸡饭Bowl, cup, serving
Ask what there is有没有饺子?A-not-A from Lesson 20
Refuse something不要辣。 不要葱 (cōng, spring onion)。不要 + the thing
Eat in or take away堂食 / 打包 (mainland); 內用 / 外帶 (Taiwan); 打包 or tapau (Singapore, Malaysia)Each place has its own sign words
Pay买单! or 多少钱?Lesson 16 for prices

Key idea: ordering food is a number, a measure word and a dish, with 要, 想 or 来 in front. The words around it, for here or to go, waiter or boss, change from city to city, but that core works everywhere Mandarin is spoken.

Foods and meats

Some basic distinctions help you read a menu.

  • 米 and 饭. Wiktionary defines 米 (mǐ) as hulled, uncooked rice and 饭 (fàn) as cooked grain, particularly cooked rice, and also a meal: you buy 米 and eat 饭. 米饭 (mǐfàn) is plain cooked rice.
  • 面. Noodles, often in a bowl: 牛肉面 (niúròumiàn), beef noodles.
  • 饺子. Dumplings (jiǎozi), from Lesson 21.
  • The meats. Animal plus 肉 (ròu, meat): 牛肉 (niúròu) is beef and 鸡肉 (jīròu) chicken; fish is simply 鱼 (yú). Wiktionary notes that 肉 on its own can specifically mean pork.
  • Drinks. 茶 (chá), tea; 水 (shuǐ), water; 豆浆, soy milk.

Characters to learn

CharacterTraditionalPinyinMeaningRadicalStrokes
菜samecài (cai4)dish; vegetable艹 (艸)11 (12 in Taiwan's count)
面麵 (20 strokes) for noodles; 面 for facemiàn (mian4)noodles; face, surface面9
米samemǐ (mi3)uncooked rice; metre米6
茶samechá (cha2)tea艹 (艸)9 (10 in Taiwan's count)
喝samehē (he1)to drink口12
想samexiǎng (xiang3)would like to; to think; to miss心13
碗samewǎn (wan3)bowl石13
饺餃 (14 strokes)jiǎo (jiao3)dumpling, in 饺子饣 (食)9
肉sameròu (rou4)meat肉6
鸡雞 (18 strokes)jī (ji1)chicken鸟 (traditional 隹)7
鱼魚 (11 strokes)yú (yu2)fish鱼 (魚)8
牛sameniú (niu2)cow, ox; beef, in 牛肉牛4

Several of these began as pictures, according to Wiktionary's notes on their origins: 米 is hulled grains of rice, 魚 a fish, 牛 a bull's head with two horns and two ears, and 肉 the ribs or a slice of meat. That last one explains a puzzle from Lesson 14: 肉 is squeezed into the shape 月 when it sits beside another part, which is why so many body words have 月 in them. Others combine meaning and sound: 想 is 心, heart or mind, with 相 for the sound, and 碗 is 石, stone, with 宛 for the sound. And 面 is a merger of the kind you met in Lesson 10: simplified 面 stands for both 面 (face) and 麵 (noodles), which is why noodle shops in Taipei write 麵.

Dialogue: at the noodle shop (written for this course)

SpeakerChinesePinyinEnglish
服务员你好!几位?Nǐ hǎo! Jǐ wèi?Hello! How many of you?
Maya两位。Liǎng wèi.Two.
服务员你们吃什么?Nǐmen chī shénme?What would you like to eat?
王小文来一碗炸酱面。Lái yì wǎn zhájiàngmiàn.A bowl of zhajiang noodles.
Maya我不想吃面,我想吃饺子。有没有饺子?Wǒ bù xiǎng chī miàn, wǒ xiǎng chī jiǎozi. Yǒu méiyǒu jiǎozi?I don't feel like noodles; I'd like dumplings. Do you have dumplings?
服务员有。你要猪肉饺子还是牛肉饺子?Yǒu. Nǐ yào zhūròu jiǎozi háishi niúròu jiǎozi?Yes. Pork dumplings or beef dumplings?
Maya牛肉饺子,不要辣。Niúròu jiǎozi, bú yào là.Beef dumplings, not spicy.
服务员喝什么?Hē shénme?Anything to drink?
王小文两杯茶。Liǎng bēi chá.Two cups of tea.
王小文服务员,买单!Fúwùyuán, mǎidān!Excuse me, the bill please!
服务员一共六十块。Yígòng liùshí kuài.Sixty kuai altogether.

Find the polite measure word 位 for people from Lesson 15, the A-not-A question 有没有, 还是 for a choice, and 不要 for "no". New words: 猪肉 (zhūròu, pork), 辣 (là, spicy, Lesson 23) and 一共 (yígòng, altogether).

Listening: food words

  1. Play Wiktionary's recordings of 菜, 麵, 米 and 茶 (the Mandarin recording on each page). Write the tones. Answers: cài 4, miàn 4, mǐ 3, chá 2.
  2. Play 牛, 肉, 雞 and 魚, then say 牛肉, 鸡肉 and 鱼, and order each with a measure word: 一份牛肉, 一份鸡肉, 一条鱼.
  3. Play 喝, 想 and 碗, then say: 我想喝茶。 来一碗面。
  4. Play 餃子, 服務員 and 菜單. How many syllables does 服務員 have, and which is the falling tone? Answer: three, fú wù yuán, with wù falling.
  5. Watch Legit Mando, episode 4: I like to eat on TaiwanPlus, free and without an account. The phrase lesson starts at 0:10 and the writing segment at 4:35. Repeat 喜歡吃 and 最愛吃 after the hosts (最愛, zuì ài, love most), then say what you like to eat most.

Speaking: order a meal

Alone: choose one of the three meals in this lesson and record yourself ordering it from start to finish: greeting, the order with numbers and measure words, a drink, eating in or taking away in the local words, and paying. Then record the same order for the other two cities, changing only the words that change.

With a partner: one of you is the server with a menu of six dishes and two drinks, written on paper in characters with prices; the other orders for two people, asks one question with 有没有, refuses one ingredient with 不要, and pays. Swap roles and change cities.

Character writing: twelve characters

Write each character five times, saying it aloud. Stroke counts: 菜 11, 面 9, 米 6, 茶 9, 喝 12, 想 13, 碗 13, 饺 9, 肉 6, 鸡 7, 鱼 8, 牛 4. In 米, write the two short strokes at the top, left then right, then the horizontal, the vertical and the two sweeping strokes. In 肉, the outer frame comes first, then the two 人-like pairs inside. In 牛, the short slanting stroke at the top comes first. Taiwan's dictionary counts 菜 and 茶 one stroke higher because its grass radical 艸 has four strokes.

Check the animations on 汉典 (zdic.net) (shown for 鸡), and write the traditional forms 麵, 餃, 雞 and 魚 once each, checking them on Taiwan's 國語小字典 (shown for 麵). Then write a short menu of five dishes in characters, with a measure word and price for each.

Common misconceptions

  • "我要 is rude." It is normal and clear. 我想 is more tactful, and 来 is casual.
  • "米 and 饭 both mean rice, so they are interchangeable." 米 is uncooked rice; 饭 is cooked rice and also a meal.
  • "面 only means face." In simplified characters it also stands for noodles, written 麵 in traditional.
  • "Takeaway is called the same everywhere." Mainland signs say 打包, Taiwan says 外帶, and in Malaysia and Singapore you may hear tapau.
  • "Beef is 牛 on a menu." The meat is 牛肉; 牛 alone is the animal.
  • "You can order without a measure word: 一面." A bowl of noodles is 一碗面; a cup of tea is 一杯茶.

What to remember

Ordering in Mandarin is a number, a measure word and a dish after 要, 想 or 来: 来一碗炸酱面, 我想吃饺子, 两杯茶, 一份鸡饭. Say 不要 for what you do not want, 有没有 to ask what there is, and 买单 to pay. Some words are local: in Taiwan you eat 內用 or take 外帶, on the mainland you see 堂食 and 打包, and in Singapore and Malaysia 打包 may be tapau. The food tells its own story: 炸酱面 identified with Beijing, 蛋饼 and 豆浆 in Taipei's breakfast shops, and Hainanese chicken rice, brought by immigrants from Hainan and now associated with Singapore. Lesson 23 compares the cuisines and the customs around the table.

Sources

  1. AllSet Learning. (n.d.). Expressing "would like to" with "xiang"; Wanting to do something with "yao" [要 and 想 compared]. Chinese Grammar Wiki. resources.allsetlearning.com
  2. Wiktionary contributors. (2026). 菜; 菜單; 點菜; 服務員; 買單; 打包; 堂食; 內用 [chiefly Taiwan]; 外帶; 份; 米; 飯; 肉; 來; 炸醬麵; 豆漿 [definitions]. Wiktionary. en.wiktionary.org
  3. Wiktionary contributors. (2026). tapau [Malay, borrowed from Cantonese 打包]. Wiktionary. en.wiktionary.org
  4. Wiktionary contributors. (2026). 米; 魚; 牛; 肉; 想; 碗 [glyph origins]. Wiktionary. en.wiktionary.org
  5. Wikipedia contributors. (2026). Zhajiangmian [dishes identified with Beijing]. Wikipedia. en.wikipedia.org
  6. Wikipedia contributors. (2026). Danbing [Taiwanese breakfast dish]. Wikipedia. en.wikipedia.org
  7. Wikipedia contributors. (2026). Hainanese chicken rice; Hawker centre. Wikipedia. en.wikipedia.org
  8. TaiwanPlus. (2021). Legit Mando, episode 4: I like to eat. Public Television Service. taiwanplus.com
Key terms
我要 / 我想 / 来
Ways to order: I want / I'd like, more tactful / bring us, casual: 来一碗面.
碗 / 杯 / 份
Measure words for food: a bowl / a cup or glass / a serving: 一碗面, 一杯茶, 一份鸡饭.
菜 / 菜单 / 点菜
Dish or vegetable / menu / to order dishes.
米 / 饭
Uncooked rice / cooked rice, and a meal.
牛肉 / 鸡肉 / 鱼
Beef / chicken / fish. 肉 alone can mean pork.
不要 + food
No ...: 不要辣, no chilli.
堂食 / 打包
Mainland words for eating in / taking away; 打包 also means packing up leftovers.
內用 / 外帶
Taiwan's words for eating in (for here) and taking away.
服务员 / 买单
Server, waiter / to pay the bill.
hawker centre
An open-air hall of food stalls in Singapore, where Hainanese chicken rice is widely sold.

Regional Food and Table Customs

  • Describe tastes with 辣, 甜, 酸 and 咸, and compare the wheat-growing north with the rice-growing south and the four great regional cuisines.
  • Follow basic table customs: using chopsticks, serving others, toasting with 干杯 and sharing tea.
  • Describe Taiwan's night markets, Hong Kong's dim sum, Singapore's hawker culture and Chinese food in Peru and the United States.
  • Read and write 辣, 甜, 酸, 咸, 南, 北, 汤, 筷 and 用.

Sweet or salty?

The BBC News Chinese article from Lesson 14, about 外婆 and 姥姥, listed other north-south arguments that run online in China. One is whether 豆腐脑 (dòufunǎo), a soft tofu pudding, should be eaten 甜 (tián, sweet) or 咸 (xián, salty). Another is whether the Lantern Festival dumplings of Lesson 13 are 元宵 or 汤圆. People across the Chinese-speaking world love to compare food, and this lesson compares it too. It covers tastes, the north and the south, the great regional cuisines, the customs at the table and Chinese food far from China.

Taste words

WordPinyinMeaning
辣làspicy, hot
甜tiánsweet
酸suānsour
咸 (鹹)xiánsalty
苦kǔbitter

They work like any adjective: 这个菜很辣 (this dish is very spicy), 太甜了 (too sweet), 不太酸 (not very sour). Four of them make a common idiom, 酸甜苦辣 (suān tián kǔ là), which Wiktionary glosses both as all kinds of flavours and as the joys and sorrows of life.

North and south: wheat and rice

The words 北 (běi, north) and 南 (nán, south) give 北方 (běifāng) and 南方 (nánfāng), the north and the south of China, and their people, 北方人 and 南方人. Farming has long divided them. In a study published in Science in 2014, the psychologist Thomas Talhelm and colleagues compared people from the wheat-growing north and the rice-growing south. They tested 1,162 Han Chinese participants at six sites and reported that people from rice-growing areas thought in more interdependent and holistic ways, even when they compared neighbouring counties on either side of the rice-wheat border. Their explanation is that rice farming required more cooperation over labour and irrigation than wheat farming did.

A follow-up in 2018 went into coffee shops. The team counted 8,964 people in cafés in six cities and found people in the north more likely to be sitting alone. Then they pushed two chairs together in Starbucks branches so that the chairs partly blocked the aisle. People in the north were more likely to move a chair out of the way, while people in the south more often squeezed through. These are averages from one research team's studies, not rules about any individual, but they show how a farming history can still be traced in daily life.

Four great traditions

Wikipedia's article on Chinese cuisine lists four great traditions, extended to eight with the cuisines of Anhui, Fujian, Hunan and Zhejiang.

TraditionWhere it comes fromWhat Wikipedia says about it
鲁菜 Lǔcài, ShandongShandong, a northern coastal provinceDerived from the native cooking style of Shandong
川菜 Chuāncài, SichuanSichuan and neighbouring ChongqingFiery, bold tastes from garlic, chillies and Sichuan pepper, as in Kung Pao chicken; chillies arrived in Sichuan cooking during the reign of the Kangxi emperor, and UNESCO named Chengdu a city of gastronomy in 2011
粤菜 Yuècài, CantoneseGuangdong, especially Guangzhou, with Hong Kong and MacauFlavours that should be well balanced and not greasy, with spices used modestly so that ingredients at the peak of their freshness come through
淮扬菜 Huáiyángcài, HuaiyangThe lower Huai and Yangtze rivers, around Huai'an, Yangzhou and Zhenjiang in JiangsuWidely seen as the most prestigious style of Jiangsu cooking

In short: there is no single Chinese food. Wikipedia's descriptions alone set fiery, bold Sichuan cooking against Cantonese cooking that uses spices modestly, and the BBC's sweet-or-salty arguments show how strongly people feel about their own region's version.

At the table

Wikipedia's article on chopsticks, 筷子 (kuàizi), describes Chinese table customs, and the verb you need is 用 (yòng), to use: 用筷子吃饭, to eat with chopsticks.

  • It is normal to lift your rice bowl to your mouth and push the rice in with chopsticks.
  • Family members may put a good piece of food into an elder's bowl as a sign of respect, and serving chopsticks are increasingly used for this, for hygiene.
  • Do not leave chopsticks standing upright in a bowl of rice: it resembles the incense burned for the dead. Do not tap them on your bowl, the noise beggars make to attract attention, and do not dig through a shared dish looking for the best piece.

Two more words complete the table. 汤 (tāng) is soup, and you drink it: 喝汤. And to toast, raise your glass and say 干杯 (gānbēi), which Wiktionary defines as "cheers" or "bottoms up"; literally it is "dry cup".

Then there is tea. In 2022 UNESCO inscribed China's traditional tea processing techniques and associated social practices on its Representative List. Its description counts six categories of tea, green, yellow, dark, white, oolong and black, and over 2,000 tea products. It notes that tea is served in homes, workplaces, tea houses, restaurants and temples, and is part of ceremonies such as weddings.

Eating out across the Chinese-speaking world

  • Taiwan's night markets. Wikipedia's article says they are known for 小吃 (xiǎochī), "small eats", served in small portions at low prices and eaten at folding tables or while walking. Oyster omelets and stinky tofu, 臭豆腐 (chòudòufu), are staples; Raohe Street and Shilin in Taipei are among the best known.
  • Hong Kong's dim sum. 点心 (diǎnxīn), dim sum in Cantonese, is a large range of small dishes traditionally eaten in restaurants for brunch, mostly associated with Cantonese cuisine. Wikipedia traces it to teahouses in Guangzhou, where travellers stopped for small meals with tea, yum cha, 饮茶.
  • Singapore's hawker centres. In 2020 UNESCO inscribed hawker culture in Singapore, describing hawker centres as "community dining rooms" where people from diverse backgrounds eat together, markers of a multicultural city of Chinese, Malay, Indian and other cultures.
  • Peru's chifa. Wikipedia describes chifa as a Chinese Peruvian tradition fusing Cantonese elements with Peruvian ingredients. A Peruvian dictionary commission traced the word to Cantonese 食飯, "to eat a meal", heard in Lima's Chinese restaurants in the 1930s; chaufa, fried rice, comes from Cantonese 炒飯. Both contain the 饭 of Lesson 18.
  • The United States. General Tso's chicken has two claimed inventors, Wikipedia reports, both chefs in New York City: T. T. Wang, and Peng Chang-kuei, a Hunan chef who had worked in Chongqing and Taipei and who opened a restaurant on East 44th Street around 1973.

Characters to learn

CharacterTraditionalPinyinMeaningRadicalStrokes
辣samelà (la4)spicy, hot辛14
甜sametián (tian2)sweet甘 (舌 in mainland dictionaries)11
酸samesuān (suan1)sour酉14
咸鹹 (20 strokes) for salty; 咸 for "all"xián (xian2)salty口9
南samenán (nan2)south十9
北sameběi (bei3)north匕5
汤湯 (12 strokes)tāng (tang1)soup氵 (水)6
筷samekuài (kuai4)chopstick, in 筷子竹 (⺮)13
用sameyòng (yong4)to use用5

Wiktionary's notes give each of these a story. The character 甜 is a tongue, 舌, beside 甘, sweet. The character 北 is two people standing back to back, and its first meaning was "back". The character 筷 is bamboo over 快 (fast) from Lesson 13: Wiktionary explains that the word began as a euphemism replacing the older 箸 (zhù), which sounded like 住 (zhù), to stop. And 咸 is another simplified merger: it stands for 鹹, salty, and for 咸, all.

Dialogue: at a Taipei night market (written for this course)

SpeakerChinesePinyinEnglish
王小文你吃过臭豆腐吗?Nǐ chī guo chòudòufu ma?Have you ever had stinky tofu?
Maya没吃过。好吃吗?Méi chī guo. Hǎochī ma?Never. Is it good?
王小文很好吃!有点儿辣。Hěn hǎochī! Yǒudiǎnr là.Delicious! A bit spicy.
Maya我不怕辣。来一份!Wǒ bú pà là. Lái yí fèn!I don't mind spicy. One serving, please!
Maya这个汤太咸了!Zhège tāng tài xián le!This soup is too salty!
王小文喝一点茶吧。Hē yìdiǎn chá ba.Have some tea.
Maya北方人喜欢吃面,南方人喜欢吃米饭,对吗?Běifāngrén xǐhuan chī miàn, nánfāngrén xǐhuan chī mǐfàn, duì ma?Northerners like noodles and southerners like rice, right?
王小文一般是这样。可是我是北京人,我也很喜欢吃米饭!Yìbān shì zhèyàng. Kěshì wǒ shì Běijīngrén, wǒ yě hěn xǐhuan chī mǐfàn!Generally, yes. But I'm from Beijing, and I love rice too!
Maya那我们用筷子吃吧!Nà wǒmen yòng kuàizi chī ba!Then let's eat with chopsticks!

The dialogue reuses old patterns: 过 for experience, 太 ... 了 for "too", 吧 for suggestions and 来一份 for ordering. New words: 好吃 (hǎochī, delicious), 有点儿 (yǒudiǎnr, a bit), 怕 (pà, to fear) and 一般 (yìbān, generally). 王小文's answer shows the right attitude to the wheat-rice findings: true on average, not for every person.

Listening: tastes and table words

  1. Play Wiktionary's recordings of 辣, 甜, 酸 and 鹹, and write each tone. Answers: là 4, tián 2, suān 1, xián 2.
  2. Play 南 and 北, then say 南方, 北方, 南方人 and 北方人.
  3. Play 湯, 筷子 and 用, then say: 我用筷子吃饭。 我喝汤。
  4. Play 乾杯 and 點心, and practise a toast: raise a cup of tea and say 干杯!
  5. Self-dictation: record a description of a meal you love in four sentences, using two taste words, then play it back the next day and write it in characters.

Speaking: describe a dish

Alone: choose a dish you know well, Chinese or not, and record a description: what it is, where it comes from, what is in it, and how it tastes, with at least two taste words: 这个菜有点儿辣,也有点儿甜。 Then compare it with a dish from this lesson.

With a partner: take sides in the sweet-or-salty argument about 豆腐脑, or about any food your families disagree on, and argue for two minutes in simple Chinese: 我喜欢甜的。 咸的太咸了! Then plan a meal for a visitor using one dish from each of two regional traditions.

Character writing: nine characters

Write each character five times, saying it aloud. Stroke counts: 辣 14, 甜 11, 酸 14, 咸 9, 南 9, 北 5, 汤 6, 筷 13, 用 5. In 北, write the left half first, a vertical, a short horizontal and a rising stroke, then the right half, a slanting stroke and a hooked one. In 南, write 十 at the top first, then the frame and the inside. In 筷, the bamboo radical on top comes first, then 快. In 用, the frame's left stroke comes first and the long vertical last.

Check the animations on 汉典 (zdic.net) (shown for 筷), and write the traditional forms 鹹 and 湯 once each, checking them on Taiwan's 國語小字典 (shown for 鹹). Then write the four tastes in characters and a dish you think fits each.

Common misconceptions

  • "Chinese food is one cuisine." Wikipedia lists four great traditions, extended to eight, and Sichuan and Cantonese cooking differ sharply.
  • "Chillies are ancient in Sichuan cooking." Wikipedia dates their arrival in Sichuan cuisine to the Kangxi emperor's reign, long after Sichuan cooking itself began.
  • "The rice-wheat studies describe every northerner and southerner." They report average differences between groups, not rules for individuals.
  • "Lifting the rice bowl is bad manners." At a Chinese table it is normal to hold the bowl up and push rice into your mouth.
  • "Chifa and General Tso's chicken are dishes from China." Chifa grew up in Peru, and General Tso's chicken was introduced in New York.
  • "咸 only means salty." In simplified writing it also stands for 咸, all; the salty one is 鹹 in traditional characters.

The short version

Tastes are 辣, 甜, 酸, 咸 and 苦, and 酸甜苦辣 can mean the whole of life. China's north grew wheat and its south rice, and a research team has argued that the difference still shows in how people think and even in how they deal with a chair in a café, on average. Wikipedia counts four great culinary traditions, Shandong, Sichuan, Cantonese and Huaiyang, and eight with Anhui, Fujian, Hunan and Zhejiang. At the table, 用筷子, lift your bowl, never stand chopsticks in rice, drink your 汤, toast with 干杯 and share tea, a practice UNESCO recognized in 2022. Beyond China, Taiwan's night markets serve 小吃, Hong Kong's restaurants serve dim sum, Singapore's hawker culture is on UNESCO's list, Peru has chifa and New York gave the world General Tso's chicken. Lesson 24 leaves the table and gets on the metro.

Sources

  1. Talhelm, T., Zhang, X., Oishi, S., Shimin, C., Duan, D., Lan, X., & Kitayama, S. (2014). Large-scale psychological differences within China explained by rice versus wheat agriculture. Science, 344(6184), 603-608. doi.org
  2. Talhelm, T., Zhang, X., & Oishi, S. (2018). Moving chairs in Starbucks: Observational studies find rice-wheat cultural differences in daily life in China. Science Advances, 4(4), eaap8469. doi.org
  3. Wikipedia contributors. (2026). Chinese cuisine; Sichuan cuisine; Cantonese cuisine; Shandong cuisine; Huaiyang cuisine. Wikipedia. en.wikipedia.org
  4. Wikipedia contributors. (2026). Chopsticks [etiquette in China]. Wikipedia. en.wikipedia.org
  5. UNESCO. (2022). Traditional tea processing techniques and associated social practices in China. ich.unesco.org
  6. UNESCO. (2020). Hawker culture in Singapore, community dining and culinary practices in a multicultural urban context. ich.unesco.org
  7. Wikipedia contributors. (2026). Night markets in Taiwan; Dim sum; Chifa; General Tso's chicken. Wikipedia. en.wikipedia.org
  8. BBC News 中文. (2018, June 22). 出版社改教材引發「外婆」與「姥姥」的南北之爭 [north-south food arguments]. bbc.com
  9. Wiktionary contributors. (2026). 酸甜苦辣; 乾杯; 筷 [etymology]; 甜; 北 [glyph origins]; and entries with Mandarin audio. Wiktionary. en.wiktionary.org
Key terms
辣 / 甜 / 酸 / 咸 / 苦
Spicy / sweet / sour / salty / bitter. 酸甜苦辣 is all flavours, and the joys and sorrows of life.
北方 / 南方
The north and the south of China; the north long grew wheat and the south rice.
rice-wheat studies
Research by Talhelm and colleagues (2014, 2018) reporting average differences in thinking and behaviour between rice-growing south and wheat-growing north.
four great traditions
Shandong, Sichuan, Cantonese and Huaiyang cuisines; eight with Anhui, Fujian, Hunan and Zhejiang.
筷子 / 用
Chopsticks / to use: 用筷子吃饭. Never leave them standing upright in rice.
干杯 (gānbēi)
Cheers! Bottoms up! Literally 'dry cup'.
汤 (tāng)
Soup, which you drink: 喝汤.
小吃 (xiǎochī)
Small eats, the cheap small dishes of Taiwan's night markets.
点心 (diǎnxīn)
Dim sum, small dishes eaten for brunch, associated with Cantonese cuisine and Hong Kong.
chifa
Chinese Peruvian cuisine; the word is traced to Cantonese 食飯, to eat a meal.

Getting Around: Transport, Directions and 从 ... 到 ...

  • Ask how to get somewhere with 怎么去 and 怎么走, and say how you travel with 坐, 骑 and 开.
  • Give and follow a route step by step with 从 ... 到 ..., 往 + direction + verb, 一直, 离 ... 远 or 近, and station words.
  • Recognize the words for metro, bus, taxi and bicycle used in mainland China, Taiwan, Hong Kong and Singapore.
  • Read and write 坐, 地, 铁, 站, 从, 到, 走, 往, 离, 远, 近, 路, 自 and 出.

A route in five steps

Maya is at a hotel in a Chinese city and wants to reach 中山路 (Zhōngshān Lù), Zhongshan Road, a street name found in many cities. She asks at the front desk: 请问,去中山路怎么走? The answer comes as a route in five steps, and each step uses one pattern from this lesson.

  1. 从这儿到地铁站,走路五分钟。 From here to the metro station is a five-minute walk.
  2. 出门往左拐,一直往前走。 Go out of the door, turn left and go straight ahead.
  3. 坐地铁到中山路站。 Take the metro to Zhongshan Road station.
  4. 从二号出口出去。 Leave by exit 2.
  5. 中山路离出口很近,走两分钟就到了。 Zhongshan Road is close to the exit; walk two minutes and you're there.

This lesson takes the route apart one step at a time, then puts it back together so that you can ask for directions, follow them and give them.

Step 1: ask the way

There are two common questions. 去中山路怎么走? asks which way to go, usually on foot. 你怎么去学校? asks how someone gets somewhere, by which transport. Both use 怎么 before the verb, the "how to" pattern of Lesson 20, and the Chinese Grammar Wiki's examples include 你知道怎么去外滩吗?, "Do you know how to get to the Bund?", and 你怎么上班?坐地铁吗?, "How do you get to work? By metro?".

Step 2: choose the transport

Mandarin uses three different verbs for travelling by vehicle, depending on how you are carried.

VerbMeaningExamples
坐 zuòto sit; to travel by, as a passenger坐地铁 (metro), 坐公交车 (bus), 坐火车 (huǒchē, train), 坐飞机 (fēijī, plane)
骑 qíto ride, sitting astride骑自行车 (zìxíngchē, bicycle), 骑马 (horse)
开 kāito drive开车 (drive a car)

Wiktionary's examples show the pattern: 我坐飞机去上海, "I go to Shanghai by plane", and 她开车去,不坐火车去, "she's driving, not taking the train". The transport comes first and then 去 and the place, two actions in a row as in Lesson 18. On foot is 走路, from Lesson 21: 我走路去学校.

Regional words for the same vehicles

Wiktionary's labels show that the same vehicle can have a different name in each place.

VehicleMainland ChinaTaiwanElsewhere
Metro地铁 dìtiě捷运 jiéyùn, chiefly Taiwan, MRT地铁 is also used in Singapore
Bus公交车 gōngjiāochē公车 gōngchē, chiefly Taiwan巴士 bāshì, a regional word
Taxi出租车 chūzūchē, chiefly mainland计程车 jìchéngchē, chiefly Taiwan的士 dīshì, chiefly Cantonese, as in Hong Kong; 德士 déshì in Malaysia and Singapore
Bicycle自行车 zìxíngchē脚踏车 jiǎotàchē, a regional word

You pay with a card in many cities. Wikipedia reports that Hong Kong's Octopus card was launched in September 1997 to collect transport fares and that by 2016 it was used by 98 percent of people aged 15 to 64; it even records school attendance. Taipei's EasyCard has paid for the metro and buses since June 2002 and is sold at every metro station and chain convenience store.

Step 3: from ... to ...

The Chinese Grammar Wiki gives the pattern 从 + place 1 + 到 + place 2 for "from one place to another", and the same pattern for times: 从一号到五号, from the first to the fifth. So 从这儿到地铁站 is "from here to the metro station", and 从我家到学校,坐地铁二十分钟 is "from my home to school is twenty minutes by metro". The order is fixed: 从 introduces the start and 到 the end, and both come before the main verb or the time it takes.

Step 4: which way: 往, 一直 and turning

To give a direction, the Chinese Grammar Wiki explains, put 往 (wǎng, towards) and a direction or place before the verb. Its examples are 一直往前走, "go straight ahead", and 往左拐, "turn left". The verb 拐 (guǎi) means to turn; 转 (zhuǎn) is another, as in 左转 (zuǒzhuǎn).

ChinesePinyinEnglish
往左拐wǎng zuǒ guǎiturn left
往右拐wǎng yòu guǎiturn right
一直往前走yìzhí wǎng qián zǒugo straight ahead
往东走wǎng dōng zǒugo east

The compass points are 东 (dōng, east), 南 (nán, south), 西 (xī, west) and 北 (běi, north), and Chinese says them in that order: 东南西北.

Step 5: near or far: 离

To say how far one place is from another, the Chinese Grammar Wiki gives place 1 + 离 + place 2 + 很 + 近 (near) or 远 (far): 我家离公司很近, "my home is close to my office", and 美国离中国很远, "the USA is far from China". It warns that the pattern trips learners up because it does not feel like natural word order in English. To ask, use 吗 or the A-not-A form: 离这儿远吗? 离这儿远不远?

Remember: in a Mandarin route, everything that describes the movement comes before the verb. The transport (坐地铁去), the start and end (从 ... 到 ...) and the direction (往左拐) all precede it, and 离 compares two places before 近 or 远.

Stations, exits and getting off

WordPinyinMeaning
站zhànstation, stop; also to stand
地铁站, 火车站, 公交车站dìtiě zhàn, huǒchē zhàn, gōngjiāochē zhànmetro station, train station, bus stop
出口, 入口chūkǒu, rùkǒuexit, entrance
上车, 下车shàng chē, xià chēto get on, to get off
路lùroad, as in 中山路

The pairs 上车 and 下车, like 上课 and 下课 in Lesson 17, use up and down for on and off. 出口 is literally "out mouth", the opening you go out of.

Characters to learn

CharacterTraditionalPinyinMeaningRadicalStrokes
坐samezuò (zuo4)to sit; to travel by土7
地samedì (di4)ground, land; place土6
铁鐵 (21 strokes)tiě (tie3)iron; rail钅 (金)10
站samezhàn (zhan4)station; to stand立10
从從 (11 strokes)cóng (cong2)from人4
到samedào (dao4)to arrive; to刂 (刀)8
走samezǒu (zou3)to walk; to leave走7
往samewǎng (wang3)towards彳8
离離 (19 strokes)lí (li2)away from, distant from亠 (traditional 隹)10
远遠 (14 strokes)yuǎn (yuan3)far辶 (辵)7
近samejìn (jin4)near辶 (辵)7 (8 in Taiwan's count)
路samelù (lu4)road, way足13
自samezì (zi4)self; from自6
出samechū (chu1)to go out, exit凵5

Wiktionary's notes on origins are especially vivid here. The character 出 is a foot, 止, stepping out of a pit or cave, 凵: to exit. The character 自 began as a picture of a nose, and Wiktionary mentions the folk explanation that people point at their noses to mean themselves. The traditional 從 was originally written 从, two people one behind the other, so the simplified form went back to the older shape. And the foot radical 足 on the left of 路 and the walking radical 辶 in 远 and 近 tell you that these words are about moving.

Dialogue: at the hotel desk (written for this course)

SpeakerChinesePinyinEnglish
Maya请问,去中山路怎么走?Qǐngwèn, qù Zhōngshān Lù zěnme zǒu?Excuse me, how do I get to Zhongshan Road?
服务员中山路离这儿有点儿远。你坐地铁吧。Zhōngshān Lù lí zhèr yǒudiǎnr yuǎn. Nǐ zuò dìtiě ba.Zhongshan Road is a bit far from here. Take the metro.
Maya地铁站在哪儿?Dìtiě zhàn zài nǎr?Where's the metro station?
服务员很近。出门往左拐,一直往前走,走路五分钟。Hěn jìn. Chū mén wǎng zuǒ guǎi, yìzhí wǎng qián zǒu, zǒulù wǔ fēnzhōng.It's close. Go out, turn left and go straight; it's a five-minute walk.
Maya坐地铁到哪个站?Zuò dìtiě dào nǎge zhàn?Which station do I take the metro to?
服务员到中山路站。从二号出口出去,就到了。Dào Zhōngshān Lù zhàn. Cóng èr hào chūkǒu chūqu, jiù dào le.To Zhongshan Road station. Go out of exit 2 and you're there.
Maya从这儿到中山路要多长时间?Cóng zhèr dào Zhōngshān Lù yào duō cháng shíjiān?How long does it take from here to Zhongshan Road?
服务员二十分钟左右。Èrshí fēnzhōng zuǒyòu.About twenty minutes.
Maya谢谢!Xièxie!Thank you!

Trace the five patterns: 离 ... 远, 往左拐 and 一直往前走, 坐地铁, 到 ... 站, and 从 ... 到 .... New words: 出门 (chū mén, go out of the door), 分钟 (fēnzhōng, minute), 多长时间 (duō cháng shíjiān, how long) and 左右 (zuǒyòu), which after a number means "about", literally "left and right". The phrase 就到了 is the 就 of Lesson 21 with sentence 了: "then you're there".

Listening: on the move

  1. Play Wiktionary's recordings of 坐, 地鐵 and 站, then say 坐地铁 and 地铁站. Which word has a third tone? Answer: 鐵, tiě.
  2. Play 從, 到, 走 and 往, and write each tone. Answers: cóng 2, dào 4, zǒu 3, wǎng 3.
  3. Play 遠 and 近, then say: 我家离学校很近。 中国离美国很远。
  4. Play 路, 出口 and 一直. In the recording of 一直, which tone does 一 take before the second tone of 直? Answer: fourth, yìzhí.
  5. Watch Legit Mando, episode 6: What is the way to ...? on TaiwanPlus, free and without an account. The phrase lesson starts at 0:11, a segment at Taipei 101 at 2:30 and the writing segment at 5:55. Repeat the question 怎麼去? after the hosts, then ask how to get to a place in your own town.

Speaking: give directions

Alone: choose a route you know, from your home to school or to a shop, and record it in at least five steps using 从 ... 到 ..., 往 with a direction, 一直, and one transport verb. Then record how far the place is with 离 ... 近 or 远.

With a partner: draw a simple street map on paper with a metro station, three streets and five places. One of you asks 去 ... 怎么走? for a place on the map, and the other gives directions in Chinese while the first traces the route with a finger. Swap roles, and add a regional twist: give the same directions once with mainland words and once with Taiwan's, 捷运 for 地铁.

Character writing: fourteen characters

Write each character five times, saying it aloud. Stroke counts: 坐 7, 地 6, 铁 10, 站 10, 从 4, 到 8, 走 7, 往 8, 离 10, 远 7, 近 7, 路 13, 自 6, 出 5. In 坐, write the two 人 first, left then right, then 土 through the middle. In 走, write 土 at the top, then the lower part. In 远 and 近, the walking radical 辶 comes last, and Taiwan counts it as one stroke more. In 路, write the foot radical 足 on the left first.

Check the animations on 汉典 (zdic.net) (shown for 路), and write the traditional forms 鐵, 從, 離 and 遠 once each, checking them on Taiwan's 國語小字典 (shown for 離). Then write the five-step route from the start of the lesson from memory.

Common misconceptions

  • "You 'sit' a bicycle: 坐自行车." Bicycles and horses take 骑; passengers 坐; drivers 开.
  • "Directions go after the verb, as in English: 拐往左." 往 and the direction come first: 往左拐.
  • "离 works like English 'far from': 我家很远离学校." The order is 我家离学校很远.
  • "The metro is called 地铁 everywhere." In Taiwan it is chiefly 捷运, and taxis have four names across the region.
  • "从 and 到 can go at the end." They come before the verb: 从这儿到地铁站走五分钟.
  • "站 only means station." It also means to stand, its original meaning.

Summing up

To ask the way, say 去 ... 怎么走? or 怎么去 ...? To say how you travel, use 坐 for metro, bus, train and plane, 骑 for bicycles and 开 for driving, then 去 and the place. A route uses 从 ... 到 ... for start and end, 往 + direction + verb for turns and 一直往前走 for straight on, and 离 ... 近 or 远 for distance, all before the main verb. Stations, exits and getting on and off are 站, 出口, 上车 and 下车. The vehicles change their names from place to place: 地铁 and 捷运, 出租车, 计程车, 的士 and 德士. Module 9 travels further, to the Chinese-speaking communities of Southeast Asia and the Americas.

Sources

  1. AllSet Learning. (n.d.). Expressing "from... to..." with "cong... dao...". Chinese Grammar Wiki. resources.allsetlearning.com
  2. AllSet Learning. (n.d.). Expressing distance with "li". Chinese Grammar Wiki. resources.allsetlearning.com
  3. AllSet Learning. (n.d.). Expressing "toward" with "wang"; How to do something with "zenme". Chinese Grammar Wiki. resources.allsetlearning.com
  4. Wiktionary contributors. (2026). 捷運 [chiefly Taiwan]; 計程車; 出租車; 德士; 的士; 公交車; 公車; 巴士; 腳踏車; 坐; 騎; 站 [definitions and regional labels]. Wiktionary. en.wiktionary.org
  5. Wiktionary contributors. (2026). 出; 自; 從 [glyph origins]; and entries with Mandarin audio. Wiktionary. en.wiktionary.org
  6. Wikipedia contributors. (2026). Octopus card; EasyCard. Wikipedia. en.wikipedia.org
  7. TaiwanPlus. (n.d.). Legit Mando, episode 6: What is the way to ...? Public Television Service. taiwanplus.com
Key terms
怎么走 / 怎么去
Which way? / how do you get there? 去中山路怎么走? 你怎么去学校?
坐 / 骑 / 开
Travel as a passenger / ride astride / drive: 坐地铁, 骑自行车, 开车.
从 A 到 B
From A to B, placed before the verb: 从这儿到地铁站走五分钟.
往 + direction + verb
Towards: 往左拐, turn left; 一直往前走, go straight ahead.
A 离 B 很近 / 很远
A is near to / far from B: 我家离学校很近.
站 / 出口
Station, stop / exit: 地铁站, 二号出口.
上车 / 下车
To get on / to get off a vehicle.
地铁 / 捷运
Metro: the mainland word / chiefly Taiwan's word, MRT.
出租车 / 计程车 / 的士 / 德士
Taxi: chiefly mainland / chiefly Taiwan / chiefly Cantonese, as in Hong Kong / Malaysia and Singapore.
东南西北
East, south, west, north, said in that order.

Module 9: Mandarin around the World

Mandarin in Singapore and Malaysia, Chinese communities in the Americas and beyond, and a final review of the year with the full list of characters and a self-test.

Mandarin in Singapore and Malaysia

  • Compare the place of Mandarin in Singapore and Malaysia: official languages, schools, script and Chinese communities.
  • Explain the Speak Mandarin Campaign and how the languages Singaporeans speak at home changed between the 2010 and 2020 censuses.
  • Recognize Mandarin words used in Singapore and Malaysia, such as 巴刹, 甘榜, 组屋 and 德士, and use 华人, 华语, 华文 and 方言 correctly.
  • Read and write 华, 加, 坡, 亚, 言 and 方.

Two countries, one Chinese word

In 新加坡 (Xīnjiāpō), Singapore, and in 马来西亚 (Mǎláixīyà), Malaysia, you will see the same word on school signs, bookshops and newspapers: 华文 (huáwén), Chinese. Wiktionary's table of regional words lists 华语 and 华文 as the words for Mandarin in both countries, and both write it in simplified characters. Yet Mandarin's place in the two countries is very different. In Singapore it is one of four official languages; in Malaysia the national language is Malay, and Chinese is learned above all in Chinese-medium schools. This lesson compares the two.

The two countries compared

SingaporeMalaysia
Languages in the constitutionFour official languages, Malay, Mandarin, Tamil and English; Malay is the national language (Article 153A)Malay is the national language (Article 152)
Chinese community2,675,521 people, 75.9 percent of the resident population in 20206,892,367 people in the 2020 census, which Wikipedia describes as the second-largest overseas Chinese community after Thailand's
Chinese in schoolAn English-based bilingual system, with Mandarin taught as the Mother Tongue of Chinese students, as Lesson 17 showedChinese-medium primary schools, called 华小 (Huáxiǎo); and 60 to 63 Chinese independent high schools teaching in Mandarin
ScriptSimplified; in 1993 Singapore adopted mainland China's 1986 revisions, though parents may register a child's name in traditional charactersSimplified; a set identical to the mainland's was promulgated in 1981 and is used in Chinese-language schools
A defining policyThe Speak Mandarin Campaign, since 1979Private Chinese independent high schools with their own examination

The population figures and the Malaysian column come from Wikipedia's articles. Most Malaysian Chinese descend from southern Chinese immigrants who arrived between the early nineteenth and mid-twentieth centuries. Most came from Fujian or from the Lingnan region around Guangdong, and they belong to groups such as the Hokkien, Teochew, Cantonese, Hakka and Hainanese. The independent high schools continue the education of the Chinese-medium primary schools. Their curriculum and their examination, the Unified Examination Certificate, are coordinated by the United Chinese School Committees' Association, known as the Dong Zong.

The Speak Mandarin Campaign

Wikipedia's article on the campaign explains that Prime Minister Lee Kuan Yew launched it on 7 September 1979. The Promote Mandarin Council has organized it every year since. The government's aim, as Wikipedia's article on Singapore's languages reports Lee saying, was to unify the Chinese community with a single language. At the time, most Chinese Singaporeans' families came from regions where other Chinese languages were spoken, and Singaporean Hokkien had served as the common language of the community. The government classes those other varieties as 方言 (fāngyán), dialects. Wiktionary defines the word as any variety of Chinese other than standard Mandarin, and as Lesson 1 explained, linguists count many of them as separate languages.

The campaign is contentious, Wikipedia notes. Since the 2010s it has been scaled down, and the government has shown more appreciation for the other Chinese varieties. Many Singaporeans have also begun to rediscover the varieties their grandparents spoke.

What Singaporeans speak at home

Singapore's census asks which language each resident speaks most often at home. Wikipedia's article on the languages of Singapore tabulates the results.

Language most often spoken at home20102020
English32.3%48.3%
Mandarin35.6%29.9%
Other Chinese varieties14.3%8.7%
Malay12.2%9.2%
Tamil3.3%2.5%

The upshot: a language can be official, compulsory in school and promoted for decades, and still lose ground at home. Between 2010 and 2020, English overtook Mandarin as Singapore's most common home language, just as Mandarin had earlier overtaken the other Chinese varieties. For a learner, this means that the Mandarin speakers you meet in Singapore have usually been schooled in English too.

Local words

Mandarin in Singapore and Malaysia has words of its own, many of them borrowed from Malay or from other Chinese varieties. Wiktionary labels these as used chiefly in Singapore and Malaysia.

WordPinyinMeaning
巴刹 (巴剎)bāshāmarket, especially for groceries; Malay pasar
甘榜gānbǎngkampung, a village
组屋 (組屋)zǔwūpublic housing, such as a Singapore HDB flat
德士déshìtaxi, from Lesson 24
沙爹shādiēsatay, grilled meat skewers
华小 (華小)Huáxiǎoin Malaysia, a Chinese-medium primary school

The Promote Mandarin Council has collected such words. In 2025 it published the Singaporean Mandarin Database in print, in two volumes. The National Institute of Education describes it as the result of a five-year research project, documenting 1,131 uniquely Singaporean Mandarin terms with their origins and examples.

华, 华人, 华语 and 华文

The character 华 (huá) appears in many of these words. Wiktionary gives it older meanings such as blossoming and splendour; in compounds it means Chinese. The word 华人 (Huárén), which Wiktionary defines as a person of Chinese origin or ethnicity, describes heritage, not citizenship: a Malaysian or an American can be 华人. The word 华语 is spoken Mandarin and 华文 the written language or the school subject, while 中华 (Zhōnghuá) appears in many names meaning "Chinese". Lesson 1 noted that Taiwan uses 华语 too, when teaching Mandarin to the rest of the world.

Characters to learn

CharacterTraditionalPinyinMeaningRadicalStrokes
华華 (12 strokes)huá (hua2)Chinese; splendour十 (traditional 艸)6
加samejiā (jia1)to add; in 新加坡 and 加拿大 (Jiānádà, Canada)力5
坡samepō (po1)slope; in 新加坡土8
亚亞 (8 strokes)yà (ya4)Asia; in 亚洲 (Yàzhōu) and 马来西亚二6
言sameyán (yan2)speech, words言7
方samefāng (fang1)side, direction; square; place方4

Two of these are the full forms of radicals you have met. The character 言 is the speech radical, simplified to 讠 on the left of 语, 说 and 谁; as a whole character it appears in 语言 (yǔyán), language, and 方言, dialect. The character 方 gives 地方 (dìfang), place, 北方 and 南方 from Lesson 23, and 方言, literally "regional speech". Country names often use characters for their sound. Wiktionary traces 新加坡 to English Singapore and Malay Singapura, the "lion city", with each character chosen for a syllable, and 马来西亚 strings together 马, 来, 西 and 亚 for Malaysia.

Dialogue: in Singapore (written for this course)

SpeakerChinesePinyinEnglish
王小文新加坡人在家说什么语言?Xīnjiāpōrén zài jiā shuō shénme yǔyán?What language do Singaporeans speak at home?
Maya很多人说英语,也有很多人说华语。Hěn duō rén shuō Yīngyǔ, yě yǒu hěn duō rén shuō Huáyǔ.Many speak English, and many speak Mandarin.
王小文他们也说方言吗?Tāmen yě shuō fāngyán ma?Do they speak dialects too?
Maya有的人说。我朋友的奶奶说福建话。Yǒude rén shuō. Wǒ péngyou de nǎinai shuō Fújiànhuà.Some do. My friend's grandmother speaks Hokkien.
王小文我们去巴刹买水果吧!Wǒmen qù bāshā mǎi shuǐguǒ ba!Let's go to the market to buy fruit!
Maya好!我们坐德士去还是坐地铁去?Hǎo! Wǒmen zuò déshì qù háishi zuò dìtiě qù?OK! Shall we take a taxi or the MRT?
王小文坐地铁吧。巴刹离这儿不远。Zuò dìtiě ba. Bāshā lí zhèr bù yuǎn.The MRT. The market isn't far from here.
Maya你看,那些组屋很高!Nǐ kàn, nàxiē zǔwū hěn gāo!Look, those housing blocks are tall!

New words: 有的 (yǒude, some), 福建话 (Fújiànhuà, Hokkien, literally "Fujian speech") and 水果 (shuǐguǒ, fruit). The dialogue reuses 还是 for a choice, 离 for distance and 吧 for suggestions, so the grammar is the same as anywhere else; only the local words change.

Listening: words around the region

  1. Play Wiktionary's recordings of 中文, 普通話 and 語言, and write the tones. Answers: Zhōngwén 1 2; pǔtōnghuà 3 1 4; yǔyán 3 2.
  2. Play 加 and 亞, then say 新加坡, 马来西亚 and 亚洲.
  3. Play 地方 and read its pronunciation table: which reading is standard on the mainland and which in Taiwan? Answer: dìfang on the mainland, dìfāng in Taiwan.
  4. Open the entries for 巴剎 and 華語, read the pinyin aloud and find the regional labels. For 巴剎, which reading is marked for Taiwan? Answer: bāchà.
  5. Self-dictation: record these sentences, then write them down the next day: 新加坡有四种官方语言。 马来西亚的国语是马来语。 我会说一点华语。 Here 种 (zhǒng) means kind, 官方语言 (guānfāng yǔyán) official language, and 国语 national language.

Speaking: compare two places

Alone: record a short comparison of Singapore and Malaysia in Chinese, in at least six sentences, using the table: 新加坡有四种官方语言。 马来西亚的国语是马来语。 Then add one sentence about the place where you live: which languages people speak there at home.

With a partner: one of you is a reporter interviewing the other, a student from Singapore or Kuala Lumpur, about home languages, school and local food. Use at least three question words and two local words from this lesson.

Character writing: six characters

Write each character five times, saying it aloud. Stroke counts: 华 6, 加 5, 坡 8, 亚 6, 言 7, 方 4. In 华, the top is 化, the person radical and 匕, written over 十. In 加, write 力 first, then 口. In 方, the dot and horizontal come first, then the hooked stroke, then the sweep to the left. In 言, the dot comes first, then the three horizontals, then 口.

Check the animations on 汉典 (zdic.net) (shown for 华), and write the traditional forms 華 and 亞 once each, checking them on Taiwan's 國語小字典 (shown for 華). Then write 新加坡, 马来西亚, 华语 and 方言 three times each.

Common misconceptions

  • "Mandarin is Singapore's main home language." In the 2020 census English led, at 48.3 percent, ahead of Mandarin at 29.9 percent.
  • "Malaysia has Mandarin as an official language." Malay is the national language; Chinese education is run largely through Chinese-medium schools.
  • "Singapore and Malaysia write traditional characters, like Taiwan." Both use simplified characters, identical to the mainland's.
  • "方言 just means accent." It means a regional variety of speech; in Singapore it refers to Chinese varieties such as Hokkien and Cantonese.
  • "华人 means a citizen of China." It means a person of Chinese origin or ethnicity, whatever their citizenship.
  • "Local words such as 巴刹 are slang to avoid." They are the normal words where you are, recorded in dictionaries and in Singapore's own database.

What to carry forward

Singapore and Malaysia both call Mandarin 华语 and write 华文 in simplified characters, but its place differs. Singapore names Mandarin as one of four official languages, teaches it as a Mother Tongue in an English-medium system and has run the Speak Mandarin Campaign since 1979. Even so, English overtook Mandarin as the most common home language between 2010 and 2020. Malaysia's national language is Malay, and its 6.9 million Chinese Malaysians learn Chinese in Chinese-medium primary schools and independent high schools. Both have local words, from 巴刹 and 甘榜 to 组屋 and 德士, and Singapore has now documented 1,131 of its own. Lesson 26 crosses the Pacific to the Chinese communities of the Americas.

Sources

  1. Attorney-General's Chambers of Singapore. (n.d.). Constitution of the Republic of Singapore, Article 153A. Singapore Statutes Online. sso.agc.gov.sg
  2. Wikipedia contributors. (2026). Speak Mandarin Campaign. Wikipedia. en.wikipedia.org
  3. Wikipedia contributors. (2026). Languages of Singapore [language most frequently spoken at home, census tables]. Wikipedia. en.wikipedia.org
  4. Wikipedia contributors. (2026). Malaysian Chinese; Chinese Singaporeans; Chinese independent high school; Malaysian language [Article 152]. Wikipedia. en.wikipedia.org
  5. Wikipedia contributors. (2026). Simplified Chinese characters [Singapore and Malaysia]. Wikipedia. en.wikipedia.org
  6. National Institute of Education, Singapore. (2025, April 1). 新加坡华语资料库出版 收录逾1100个本地词语 [Singaporean Mandarin Database published, with over 1,100 local terms]. ntu.edu.sg
  7. Wiktionary contributors. (2026). 巴剎; 甘榜; 組屋; 德士; 沙爹; 華小; 華人; 華; 方言; 華文 [regional synonyms]; and entries with Mandarin audio. Wiktionary. en.wiktionary.org
Key terms
新加坡 / 马来西亚
Singapore / Malaysia.
华语 / 华文 / 华人
Spoken Mandarin / written Chinese or the school subject / a person of Chinese origin or ethnicity.
方言 (fāngyán)
A regional speech variety; in Singapore, Chinese varieties other than Mandarin, such as Hokkien and Cantonese.
Speak Mandarin Campaign
Singapore's annual campaign, launched on 7 September 1979 by Prime Minister Lee Kuan Yew, to unify the Chinese community through Mandarin.
home language shift
In Singapore's census, English rose from 32.3% to 48.3% as the most common home language between 2010 and 2020, while Mandarin fell from 35.6% to 29.9%.
华小 / independent high schools
Malaysia's Chinese-medium primary schools / its 60 to 63 private high schools teaching in Mandarin.
巴刹 / 甘榜 / 组屋
Market / kampung, village / public housing: words used chiefly in Singapore and Malaysia.
Singaporean Mandarin Database
A 2025 collection of 1,131 uniquely Singaporean Mandarin terms by the Promote Mandarin Council.
语言 (yǔyán)
Language, with the full speech radical 言.
Article 153A / Article 152
The provisions naming Singapore's four official languages and Malaysia's national language, Malay.

Chinese Communities in the Americas and Beyond

  • Trace Chinese communities in the Americas from the 1850s to today, reading short passages from primary sources such as the Chinese Exclusion Act.
  • Explain why the first Chinatowns spoke Taishanese and Cantonese and why Mandarin is now spreading, using census figures from Canada and the United States.
  • Describe the Chinese communities of Peru and Cuba and the role of heritage-language schools.
  • Read and write 唐, 街, 移, 民 and 城, and use 唐人街, 移民, 华侨 and 华裔.

Grant Avenue, the 1850s

In the early 1850s, Chinese arrivals in San Francisco began to settle around what is now Grant Avenue and Stockton Street. Wikipedia describes the neighbourhood that grew there as the oldest Chinatown in North America and one of the largest Chinese communities outside Asia, still speaking mainly Cantonese and Taishanese. Chinese speakers call such a neighbourhood 唐人街 (Tángrénjiē), literally "street of the Tang people". Wiktionary explains that 唐人, people of the Tang dynasty, came by extension to mean Chinese people in general, and lists 华埠 (huábù) as a more formal word for Chinatown.

This lesson follows Chinese communities in the Americas from those first streets to today. It covers the laws that tried to keep them out and the communities of Peru and Cuba. Then it turns to the change from Cantonese to Mandarin and to the schools where children of Chinese families learn the language, perhaps including you.

Why the first Chinatowns spoke Taishanese

Wikipedia's article on Taishanese explains where the first immigrants came from. In the late nineteenth and early twentieth centuries, most Chinese immigrants to North America came from Sze Yup, or Siyi, a region of Guangdong that includes Taishan. As a result, until the mid-twentieth century Taishanese was the dominant Chinese variety in the Chinatowns of Canada and the United States, the common language of Chinese Americans. It is a Yue language related to Cantonese but, the article notes, with little mutual intelligibility between the two.

1882: exclusion in the United States

On 6 May 1882, President Chester A. Arthur signed the Chinese Exclusion Act. The U.S. National Archives describes it as the first significant law restricting immigration into the United States: it banned Chinese laborers from immigrating for ten years. Its opening words give the reason in the language of the time: "the coming of Chinese laborers to this country endangers the good order of certain localities". The law also barred courts from granting citizenship to Chinese residents.

The ban did not end after ten years. The Archives explains that the Geary Act of 1892 extended it and required Chinese residents to carry a certificate of residence, and the extension was made permanent in 1902. Congress repealed the exclusion acts only in 1943, when China was an ally in the Second World War. Even then, a quota allowed just 105 Chinese immigrants a year.

1885: the head tax in Canada

Canada took a different route to the same end. The Canadian Museum of Immigration at Pier 21 calls the Chinese Immigration Act of 1885 the first Canadian law to exclude immigrants by ethnic origin. It charged every Chinese person entering Canada a duty of $50, the head tax. The tax rose to $100 in 1900 and $500 in 1903, though diplomats, merchants, tourists, students and "men of science" were exempt. From 1923 to 1947 Chinese immigration was excluded altogether. On 22 June 2006, Prime Minister Stephen Harper offered Chinese Canadians a full apology for the head tax and expressed sorrow for the exclusion that followed.

Bottom line: for about sixty years, from 1882 in the United States and 1885 in Canada, the law singled out Chinese immigrants by name. The restrictions ended only in 1943 and 1947, within living memory of some grandparents today.

Peru and Cuba

Chinese workers also crossed the Pacific to Latin America. Wikipedia's article on Chinese Peruvians traces the community to about 100,000 Chinese immigrants of the nineteenth century, many of whom formed families with Peruvian women. Peru now has the largest population of Chinese descent in Latin America. Chinese Peruvians are called tusán, from Cantonese 土生 (tǔshēng, "local-born"). How many there are depends on how you count. Only 14,307 people declared tusán or Chinese ancestry in Peru's 2017 census, but the embassy estimated that around 4 million Peruvians have some Chinese roots. Lesson 23 described their cuisine, chifa.

In Cuba, Wikipedia reports, about 141,000 Chinese workers arrived between 1847 and 1874 on eight-year labour contracts, most of them to work on sugar plantations. The community peaked at around 60,000 people in the 1950s. After the 1959 revolution it almost disappeared, as most of its members left for Miami and other parts of Latin America.

From Cantonese to Mandarin

The language of Chinese communities in the Americas is changing. Statistics Canada reports that just over 1.5 million Canadians speak a Chinese language. In the 2021 census Mandarin, with 987,000 speakers, was the most spoken, ahead of Cantonese with 725,000. Mandarin speakers were more likely to have been born in another country, 85 percent against 76 percent. They were also much younger on average, 39 years against 50, which the agency links to an earlier wave of immigration from the Cantonese-speaking regions of China.

In the United States, the Census Bureau counted the languages people spoke at home in 2018 to 2022. Among people who spoke a language other than English, Chinese, counting all its varieties, came second at 5.1 percent, after Spanish at 61.1 percent.

Heritage-language schools

Many children of Chinese families in North America learn to read and write Chinese outside regular school, in community-run Chinese schools. The Center for Applied Linguistics describes two national networks, both founded in 1994. Member schools of the Chinese School Association in the United States were set up by immigrants from the People's Republic of China. The National Council of Associations of Chinese Language Schools is made up mainly of heritage-language schools set up by immigrants from Taiwan. If you spent Saturdays or Sundays at such a school, you are part of this history, and this course has tried to build on what you learned there.

Words for Chinese people abroad

WordPinyinMeaning, according to Wiktionary
华侨 (華僑)huáqiáooverseas Chinese; in law, a Chinese national living outside China
华人 (華人)huáréna person of Chinese origin or ethnicity, from Lesson 25
华裔 (華裔)huáyìa person of Chinese ancestry, usually born abroad
移民yímínto immigrate or emigrate; an immigrant

The differences matter. A Chinese citizen studying in Toronto is a 华侨; a Canadian-born grandchild of immigrants is a 华裔; both are 华人.

Characters to learn

CharacterTraditionalPinyinMeaningRadicalStrokes
唐sametáng (tang2)Tang dynasty; Chinese, in 唐人街口10
街samejiē (jie1)street行12
移sameyí (yi2)to move, to shift禾11
民samemín (min2)people, citizens氏 (乛 in mainland dictionaries)5
城samechéng (cheng2)city; city wall土9

Together these make the vocabulary of this lesson: 唐人街, Chinatown; 移民, to migrate, from 移 (move) and 民 (people); and 城市 (chéngshì), city. The radical of 街 is 行, which shows a crossroads, and the old meaning of 城, a city wall, explains its earth radical 土. You have seen 民 already in 人民币, the people's currency, in Lesson 16.

Dialogue: in Vancouver's Chinatown (written for this course)

SpeakerChinesePinyinEnglish
Maya奶奶,这条街叫什么?Nǎinai, zhè tiáo jiē jiào shénme?Grandma, what's this street called?
奶奶这是唐人街。我小时候常常来这儿。Zhè shì Tángrénjiē. Wǒ xiǎoshíhou chángcháng lái zhèr.This is Chinatown. I often came here when I was little.
Maya那时候这儿的人说什么语言?Nà shíhou zhèr de rén shuō shénme yǔyán?What language did people speak here then?
奶奶都说广东话。Dōu shuō Guǎngdōnghuà.Everyone spoke Cantonese.
Maya现在呢?Xiànzài ne?And now?
奶奶现在很多人说普通话。你的中文学校也教普通话,对吧?Xiànzài hěn duō rén shuō pǔtōnghuà. Nǐ de Zhōngwén xuéxiào yě jiāo pǔtōnghuà, duì ba?Now lots of people speak Mandarin. Your Chinese school teaches Mandarin too, right?
Maya对!我每个星期六都去中文学校。Duì! Wǒ měi ge xīngqīliù dōu qù Zhōngwén xuéxiào.Yes! I go to Chinese school every Saturday.
奶奶太好了!我们去吃点心吧。Tài hǎo le! Wǒmen qù chī diǎnxīn ba.Wonderful! Let's go and have some dim sum.

This is Maya's grandmother from Lesson 13, who speaks Cantonese at home and Mandarin with Maya. New words: 小时候 (xiǎoshíhou, when I was little), 常常 (chángcháng, often), 那时候 (nà shíhou, at that time), 广东话 (Guǎngdōnghuà, Cantonese, literally "Guangdong speech") and 教 (jiāo, to teach). The dialogue uses 条 for a street, 每 ... 都 from Lesson 18 and 吧 from Lesson 20.

Listening: words of migration

  1. Play Wiktionary's recordings of 移民, 城市 and 街, and write the tones. Answers: yímín 2 2; chéngshì 2 4; jiē 1.
  2. Play 華僑, then read the pinyin on the entries for 唐人街 and 華裔 and say all three aloud. Which two begin with the same syllable? Answer: 華僑 and 華裔, huá.
  3. Look at the pronunciation table on the 唐人街 entry and find the Cantonese reading. Compare it with the Mandarin tángrénjiē: you are hearing, in writing, the language of the first Chinatowns.
  4. Self-dictation: record these, then write them down the next day: 我的奶奶是移民。 这条街是唐人街。 很多华裔学生星期六去中文学校。

Speaking: a community you know

Alone: describe in Chinese a community you know, in at least six sentences. It could be your own neighbourhood, a Chinatown you have visited or your family's story of moving. Say where it is, who lives there, what languages people speak and what you can eat there. Use 移民 and at least one time phrase with 那时候 or 现在.

With a partner: interview each other about family history, in Chinese or in English with Chinese key words. Then report back in Chinese: 他的爷爷是移民。 他们家说英语和广东话。 Share only what your partner is happy to share.

Character writing: five characters

Write each character five times, saying it aloud. Stroke counts: 唐 10, 街 12, 移 11, 民 5, 城 9. In 街, write the left part of 行, then the two 土 in the middle, then the right part of 行. In 移, write 禾 first, then the two 夕 on the right, upper before lower. In 民, the first stroke turns a corner, and the last is a long slanting hook.

Check the animations on 汉典 (zdic.net) (shown for 街), and check 唐 on Taiwan's 國語小字典; all five characters are the same in both scripts. Then write 唐人街, 移民, 城市 and 华侨 three times each.

Common misconceptions

  • "The first Chinatowns spoke Mandarin." Until the mid-twentieth century the main language was Taishanese, with Cantonese.
  • "Chinese exclusion was a brief episode." The U.S. exclusion acts ran from 1882 to 1943, and Canada's restrictions from 1885 to 1947.
  • "The head tax was a small fee." It rose from $50 in 1885 to $500 by 1903.
  • "Chinese communities in Latin America are tiny." Peru has the largest population of Chinese descent in Latin America, though counts vary widely with how ancestry is defined.
  • "华侨 and 华人 mean the same." 华侨 means overseas Chinese and, in law, Chinese nationals abroad; 华人 means people of Chinese ethnicity, whatever their citizenship.
  • "Chinese communities abroad have always spoken Mandarin." In Canada, Cantonese speakers are older on average, reflecting an earlier wave of immigration; Mandarin has grown with newer arrivals.

Where this leaves us

Chinese communities in the Americas began in the 1850s in places like San Francisco's 唐人街, speaking Taishanese and Cantonese because most immigrants came from Sze Yup in Guangdong. Laws singled them out: the U.S. Chinese Exclusion Act of 1882, in force until 1943, and Canada's head tax of 1885, rising to $500, followed by exclusion until 1947 and an apology in 2006. About 100,000 Chinese arrived in nineteenth-century Peru and about 141,000 in Cuba. Today Mandarin is overtaking Cantonese: Canada's 2021 census counted 987,000 Mandarin speakers and 725,000 Cantonese speakers. Community Chinese schools, founded by immigrants from both the mainland and Taiwan, keep the written language alive, and the words 华侨, 华人 and 华裔 describe people with different relationships to China. Lesson 27 brings the year together and helps you measure what you can now do.

Sources

  1. National Archives (U.S.). (n.d.). Chinese Exclusion Act (1882) [milestone document, with transcript]. archives.gov
  2. Canadian Museum of Immigration at Pier 21. (n.d.). The Chinese Immigration Act, 1885. pier21.ca
  3. Government of Canada. (2006, June 22). Prime Minister Harper offers full apology for the Chinese head tax. canada.ca
  4. Statistics Canada. (n.d.). Asian History Month: Let's talk languages. statcan.gc.ca
  5. U.S. Census Bureau. (2023). Most Americans speak only English at home or speak English "very well" [2018-2022 American Community Survey]. census.gov
  6. Center for Applied Linguistics. (2011). Chinese language teaching organizations. cal.org
  7. Wikipedia contributors. (2026). Taishanese; Chinatown, San Francisco; Chinese Peruvians; Chinese Cubans. Wikipedia. en.wikipedia.org
  8. Wiktionary contributors. (2026). 唐人街; 唐人; 華埠; 華僑; 華裔; 移民 [definitions]; and entries with Mandarin audio. Wiktionary. en.wiktionary.org
Key terms
唐人街 (Tángrénjiē)
Chinatown, literally 'street of the Tang people'; 华埠 is a more formal word.
Taishanese
A Yue language from Taishan in Guangdong, the dominant Chinese variety in North American Chinatowns until the mid-twentieth century.
Chinese Exclusion Act
The 1882 U.S. law that suspended the immigration of Chinese laborers; extended and made permanent, it was repealed in 1943.
head tax
Canada's duty on Chinese immigrants from 1885: $50, then $100 in 1900 and $500 in 1903; exclusion followed from 1923 to 1947.
tusán
A Chinese Peruvian, from Cantonese 土生, 'local-born'.
华侨 / 华人 / 华裔
Overseas Chinese, and in law Chinese nationals abroad / people of Chinese ethnicity / people of Chinese ancestry, usually born abroad.
移民 (yímín)
To immigrate or emigrate; an immigrant. From 移, move, and 民, people.
城市 (chéngshì)
City; 城 once meant a city wall.
heritage-language school
A community-run school where children of immigrant families learn the family language; in the U.S., two national networks were founded in 1994.
Mandarin overtaking Cantonese
In Canada's 2021 census, 987,000 people spoke Mandarin and 725,000 Cantonese; Cantonese speakers were older on average.

Putting It All Together: Checking Your Year

  • Explain the ACTFL proficiency levels and the Novice sublevels, and rate your own listening, speaking, reading and writing against the NCSSFL-ACTFL Can-Do Statements.
  • Review the 300 characters of the course lesson by lesson, with the tones and tone changes, 是, 有 and 在, word order, measure words, question words and 了.
  • Take a practice test in listening, reading, speaking and character writing, and mark it against model answers.
  • Plan a next year of Mandarin with free resources, knowing what the AP, HSK and TOCFL tests are and what common apps say about age and accounts.

From ten characters to three hundred

In Lesson 1 you wrote your first ten characters: 一, 二, 三, 十, 人, 大, 小, 中, 文 and 口. Twenty-five lessons later you have met 300. You can greet a teacher politely, give your age and phone number, and say what your family members do. You can describe your school day, order a bowl of noodles and ask the way to the metro. You also know the four tones, the tone changes of real speech, and how to read both simplified and traditional characters.

This last lesson teaches no new characters. Instead it gives you a procedure in five steps for checking your year. First you learn the scale this course was designed around. Then you check your characters, check your sounds and grammar, take a practice test with model answers, and plan what to do next. You will need paper, a pencil and a phone that records sound. The whole procedure takes longer than one sitting, so spread it over a week if you like. Keep everything you write and record, with the date: together it makes a portfolio of your first year.

Step 1: Learn the yardstick

This course was written for the Novice range of a scale published by ACTFL, the American Council on the Teaching of Foreign Languages. ACTFL is a language education organization founded in 1967. Its Proficiency Guidelines, revised in 2024, describe five major levels: Novice, Intermediate, Advanced, Superior and Distinguished. Each level includes all the ones below it.

What separates the levels? ACTFL's guide to its Oral Proficiency Interview, a speaking test, says the main difference is the tasks a speaker can carry out. With effort and time, speakers also become more accurate and handle more situations and topics. They produce longer stretches of language too: words and phrases first, then sentences, then paragraphs.

The guide describes a Novice speaker as someone who can give basic personal information and meet a limited number of personal needs, using "formulaic and rote utterances, lists, and phrases". In plain English, that means memorized expressions, lists and short phrases. An Intermediate speaker has crossed an important line. They can take part in short conversations on predictable topics, ask and answer simple questions and handle simple transactions. They do it in sentences they put together themselves, which ACTFL calls creating with language.

The Novice, Intermediate and Advanced levels each have three sublevels. In the guide's terms, Low is baseline performance at a level, and Mid is solid performance, sometimes with partial ability at the next level. A speaker at High functions much of the time at the next level up but cannot sustain it. So a Novice High speaker already makes sentences of their own much of the time, but not yet reliably.

For learners, ACTFL and the National Council of State Supervisors for Languages (NCSSFL) publish the NCSSFL-ACTFL Can-Do Statements, revised for 2026. They are written as "I can" sentences, and one of their stated purposes is to help learners set goals and assess their own progress. They divide communication into three modes, and you may be at a different sublevel in each.

ModeWhat it coversThe Novice benchmark, in brief
InterpretiveUnderstanding what you hear, read or watchPick out the topic and some basic information from words, phrases and simple sentences on very familiar and everyday topics
InterpersonalConversation, spoken or written, with real back and forthTake part in unrehearsed conversations on very familiar and everyday topics, using words, phrases, simple sentences and questions
PresentationalPresenting information to listeners, readers or viewersShare information on very familiar and everyday topics, using practised or memorized words, phrases and simple sentences

The interpersonal statements show most clearly how the three Novice sublevels differ. The table paraphrases them.

SublevelIn a conversation, you can
Novice Lowanswer a few simple questions on very familiar topics with practised or memorized words and phrases, helped by gestures, facial expressions or pictures
Novice Midask and answer simple questions on very familiar and everyday topics, with a mix of memorized words, phrases and simple sentences
Novice Highask and answer practised and some original questions on familiar and everyday topics, using simple sentences most of the time

Now rate yourself. For each statement below, write Yes, With help or Not yet. Be honest: the point is to find what to practise, not to collect ticks.

  1. I can greet people and introduce myself, both formally and casually. (Lesson 5)
  2. I can say where I am from and ask someone else. (Lesson 6)
  3. I can give numbers, dates, clock times and prices. (Lessons 11, 12 and 16)
  4. I can describe my family and ask about someone else's. (Lesson 14)
  5. I can describe my day with times and places in the right order. (Lesson 18)
  6. I can say where things are. (Lesson 19)
  7. I can ask questions with 吗 and with question words. (Lessons 6 and 20)
  8. I can say what I did and what has changed, using 了. (Lesson 21)
  9. I can order food and pay for it. (Lessons 16 and 22)
  10. I can ask for directions and follow simple ones. (Lesson 24)

Then look at how you do each task, not only whether you can. Managing with single memorized words matches the Novice Low description. A mix of words, phrases and simple sentences matches Novice Mid, and simple sentences most of the time match Novice High. Remember that this is a self-assessment. The guide explains that an official interview rating needs an ACTFL-certified tester, whose sample is rated separately by a second certified tester, and the two ratings must agree.

Worth holding on to: Novice is not a failing grade. It is the first level of a scale that describes what you can do, and the step up to Intermediate comes when you stop reciting memorized lines and start building your own sentences to say what you mean.

Step 2: Check your 300 characters

The table lists every character in the course, lesson by lesson, in simplified form. The traditional forms are in each lesson's own table. Work through it in four passes.

  1. Read each row aloud, giving every character's pinyin and a meaning. Put a dot under any character you cannot read.
  2. Cover the Characters column. For each lesson, write as many of its characters as you can remember from the topic alone, then uncover the column and circle any you missed.
  3. For every dotted or circled character, go back to its lesson, check its stroke order and write it five times, saying it aloud.
  4. Count your results: how many of the 300 can you read, and how many can you write from memory?
LessonTopicCharactersCount
1Mandarin, characters, pinyin and zhuyin一 二 三 十 人 大 小 中 文 口10
2The four tones女 子 好 马 妈 吗6
3Initials and finals我 你 他 她 们 是 去7
4Tones in connected speech不 很 也 都 对 天 客 气 起9
5Greetings, names and address叫 姓 名 字 什 么 老 师 先 生 再 见 谢 您 王 李 请 问18
6是 and 吗国 美 英 学 同 呢 哪 朋 友 认 识 高 兴13
7Describing without 是太 真 忙 累 可 爱 漂 亮 非 常 冷 热12
8Strokes and stroke order日 月 山 水 火 木 林 田 力 男 目 心 手13
9Radicals and sound components上 下 青 清 晴 河 海 休 话 说 读 听12
10Simplified and traditional门 东 西 车 书 开 关 长 后 发 电11
11Numbers四 五 六 七 八 九 零 百 千 万 两 岁 几 多 少15
12Dates and the clock年 号 星 期 今 明 昨 点 分 半 现 在 时 候14
13The lunar calendar春 夏 秋 冬 节 新 快 乐 红 包 农 历12
14Family家 有 没 爸 哥 姐 弟 妹 的 和 爷 奶 工 作14
15Measure words个 本 张 只 条 杯 件 位 这 那 些 狗 猫13
16Money and shopping钱 块 毛 元 买 卖 贵 便 宜 要 衣 服 机 给 打15
17School life校 课 考 试 数 汉 语 史 体 育 喜 欢 会 写14
18A day in Mandarin早 午 晚 床 吃 饭 回 睡 觉 每 来 看 做 以 视15
19Where things are里 外 前 边 左 右 桌 椅 旁 儿 住 洗 间13
20Question words谁 为 怎 样 还 吧 知 道 意 思 能11
21了了 已 经 完 过 雨 就7
22Ordering food菜 面 米 茶 喝 想 碗 饺 肉 鸡 鱼 牛12
23Regional food辣 甜 酸 咸 南 北 汤 筷 用9
24Getting around坐 地 铁 站 从 到 走 往 离 远 近 路 自 出14
25Singapore and Malaysia华 加 坡 亚 言 方6
26Communities in the Americas唐 街 移 民 城5
1 to 26The whole courseEvery character above300

Count reading and writing separately, because they are different skills: recognizing a character is not the same as producing it from memory. Then try the traditional forms. 學, 國, 說, 書, 東, 車, 門, 長, 錢, 華 and 認識 all appeared in the course, and you should be able to read each of them aloud.

Step 3: Check your sounds and grammar

The tables below collect the rules of the year. Read each one aloud, examples included, and mark anything that surprises you. That is a rule to revisit in its lesson.

ToneMarkFive-level numberIn wordsExample
Firstā55high and level妈 mā, mother
Secondá35rising from the middle to the top麻 má, hemp
Thirdǎ214, often 21low, dipping, sometimes climbing back马 mǎ, horse
Fourthà51falling from the top to the bottom骂 mà, to scold
Neutralno markdepends on the tone beforeshort and light吗 ma, question word
Tone change (Lesson 4)As this course writes itAs it is said
A third tone before another third tone rises你好 nǐ hǎo; 可以 kěyǐní hǎo; kéyǐ
A third tone before any other tone stays low, the half third tone北京 Běijīng; 很大 hěn dàlow, without climbing back
不 before a fourth tone不是 bú shì; 不对 bú duìbú, a second tone
一 before a fourth tone一个 yí ge; 一样 yíyàngyí, a second tone
一 before a first, second or third tone一天 yì tiān; 一起 yìqǐyì, a fourth tone
一 counting, at the end of a word, or in order一, 二, 三; 第一 dì-yīyī, its own first tone
PatternUseExample
A 是 BIdentity: one noun is another他是学生。 Tā shì xuésheng. He is a student.
很 + adjectiveDescribing, with no 是 (Lesson 7)她很忙。 Tā hěn máng. She is busy.
有 and 没有Having; there is (Lessons 14 and 19)我没有弟弟。 Wǒ méiyǒu dìdi. I don't have a younger brother.
在 + placeWhere something is; where an action happens书在桌子上。 Shū zài zhuōzi shang. The book is on the table.
Subject, time, place, verb, objectWord order (Lessons 12 and 18)我明天在学校吃午饭。 Wǒ míngtiān zài xuéxiào chī wǔfàn. I'm having lunch at school tomorrow.
Measure word (Lessons 15 and 22)CountsExample
个 gePeople and many other things; the safe default一个朋友 yí ge péngyou, a friend
本 běnBooks三本书 sān běn shū, three books
张 zhāngFlat things一张纸 yì zhāng zhǐ, a sheet of paper
只 zhīMost animals; one of a pair两只猫 liǎng zhī māo, two cats
条 tiáoLong, thin things一条路 yì tiáo lù, a road
件 jiànClothes, matters一件衣服 yí jiàn yīfu, an item of clothing
杯 bēi and 碗 wǎnCups and glasses; bowls一杯茶 yì bēi chá, a cup of tea; 两碗面 liǎng wǎn miàn, two bowls of noodles
位 wèi and 口 kǒuPeople, politely; members of a household一位老师 yí wèi lǎoshī, a teacher; 五口人 wǔ kǒu rén, five people
Question word (Lesson 20)MeaningExample
谁 shéiwho他是谁? Who is he?
什么 shénmewhat你喝什么? What are you drinking?
哪 nǎ + measure wordwhich你要哪本书? Which book do you want?
哪儿 nǎr, 哪里 nǎlǐwhere你去哪儿? Where are you going?
什么时候 shénme shíhouwhen你什么时候回家? When are you going home?
几 jǐ, 多少 duōshaohow many; 几 for small numbers你有几本书? How many books do you have?
怎么 zěnme; 怎么样 zěnmeyànghow; how is it你怎么去学校? How do you get to school?
为什么 wèishénmewhy你为什么学中文? Why are you learning Chinese?
了 and its neighbours (Lesson 21)MeaningExample
Verb 了The action is complete我买了三本书。 I bought three books.
Sentence 了A new situation or a change下雨了。 It's raining now.
没 + verb, with no 了It did not happen我没去。 I didn't go.
已经 ... 了Already他们已经走了。 They've already left.
Verb 过Experience: at least once我去过中国。 I've been to China.
A past habit, with no 了Used to我以前每天六点起床。 I used to get up at six every day.

Now test the rules on seven sentences. Each contains one mistake that a lesson of this course warned against. Correct them, then check the answers.

  1. 我是很忙。
  2. 我不有弟弟。
  3. 二个人
  4. 三书
  5. 我吃午饭在学校。
  6. 你去哪儿吗?
  7. 我昨天没去了。

Answers: 1) 我很忙, with no 是 before an adjective (Lesson 7). 2) 我没有弟弟, because the negative of 有 is 没有 (Lesson 14). 3) 两个人, with 两 before a measure word (Lessons 11 and 15). 4) 三本书, with a measure word between the number and the noun (Lesson 15). 5) 我在学校吃午饭, with the place before the verb (Lesson 18). 6) 你去哪儿?, with no 吗 after a question word (Lesson 20). 7) 我昨天没去, with no 了 after 没 (Lesson 21).

Step 4: Take the practice test

The practice test has four parts: listening, reading, speaking and character writing. Allow about an hour. Do each part without looking ahead, then mark it with the answers that follow it. Give yourself one point for each correct answer in the listening, reading and writing parts, and use the checklist for speaking. Write the date and your scores at the top of the page.

Listening: the practice test, part 1

Each link opens a Wiktionary entry whose Mandarin recording is hosted on Wikimedia Commons, free of charge and with no account. Play each recording twice. Write the pinyin with tone marks and the meaning, then check. The words come from across the year.

  1. 你好
  2. 對不起
  3. 一起
  4. 星期
  5. 快樂
  6. 工作
  7. 多少錢
  8. 喜歡
  9. 已經
  10. 城市

Answers: 1) nǐ hǎo, hello, which the speaker says as ní hǎo (Lesson 4). 2) duìbuqǐ, sorry, with a light bu (Lessons 4 and 5). 3) yìqǐ, together (Lesson 4). 4) xīngqī, week (Lesson 12). 5) kuàilè, happy, as in 新年快乐 (Lesson 13). 6) gōngzuò, work or job (Lesson 14). 7) duōshǎo qián, how much money, the reading this entry gives (Lesson 16). 8) xǐhuan, to like, with xǐhuān as Wiktionary's Taiwan reading (Lesson 17). 9) yǐjīng, already, with the second syllable often light (Lesson 21). 10) chéngshì, city (Lesson 26).

For a second listening task, watch an episode of Legit Mando that you used earlier in the year, such as the family episode from Lesson 14. It is free on the TaiwanPlus site with no account. Watch it once without pausing and write down every word you recognize. Then watch again, pausing after each sentence, and count how many more words you catch. The difference between your two lists shows how much your ear has still to gain from slower listening.

Reading: the practice test, part 2 (a letter written for this course)

Maya Chen, the Vancouver student you met in Lesson 5, is home again after her year in Taipei. She writes to her classmate 王小文. Every character in the letter is one of your 300.

小文:

你好!我回家了。我们家的两只狗和大王都很好。我现在每天早上七点起床,吃了早饭就坐车去学校。我星期一有数学课、历史课和中文课。我很喜欢中文课,我们的老师很有意思。中午我在学校吃午饭,有时候吃面,有时候吃饺子。

上个星期六,我和哥哥去了唐人街。我们吃了两碗牛肉面,喝了两杯茶。面很好吃,也不贵。

现在天气冷了。你那儿怎么样?你什么时候来我这儿?我们一起去唐人街吃饭吧!

Maya,十二月五日

  1. Where is Maya now, and how are her pets?
  2. What does she do every morning before school, and how does she get there?
  3. Which classes does she have on Monday, and which one does she like?
  4. Where does she eat lunch, and what does she eat?
  5. What did she do last Saturday, and with whom?
  6. Find two examples of verb 了 and one of sentence 了.
  7. Find three measure words and the nouns they count.
  8. Which two question words does she use, and what does she suggest at the end?

Answers: 1) She is home, and her two dogs and her cat, Big King (大王) from Lesson 15, are all well. 2) She gets up at seven, has breakfast and goes straight to school by bus or car; 吃了早饭就 means "as soon as I've eaten breakfast". 3) Math, history and Chinese, and she likes Chinese class because the teacher is interesting. 4) At school: sometimes noodles, sometimes dumplings. 5) She went to Chinatown with her older brother, where they had two bowls of beef noodles and two cups of tea. 6) Verb 了: 吃了早饭, 去了唐人街, 吃了两碗牛肉面 and 喝了两杯茶. Sentence 了: 天气冷了, "it has turned cold", and 我回家了, "I'm home now". 7) 只 for the dogs, 个 in 上个星期六 (last Saturday), 碗 for the noodles and 杯 for the tea. 8) 怎么样 and 什么时候; with 吧 she suggests that they go to Chinatown for a meal together.

Translation: Xiaowen, hello! I'm home now. Our two dogs and Big King are all fine. These days I get up at seven every morning, and as soon as I've had breakfast I ride to school. On Mondays I have math, history and Chinese. I really like Chinese class; our teacher is very interesting. At noon I have lunch at school, sometimes noodles and sometimes dumplings. Last Saturday my brother and I went to Chinatown. We had two bowls of beef noodles and two cups of tea. The noodles were delicious, and not expensive either. It has turned cold now. How are things where you are? When are you coming to see me? Let's go to Chinatown for a meal together! Maya, 5 December.

Speaking: the practice test, part 3

Alone: record yourself answering each prompt for 30 to 60 seconds, without notes. Then play the recordings back and mark them with the checklist. With a partner: take turns asking the questions in Chinese. Play the shop owner in prompt 4 and the passer-by in prompt 5, then mark each other.

  1. Introduce yourself: name, nationality, age, school and the languages you speak.
  2. Describe your family: how many people, who they are and what they do.
  3. Describe your school day from getting up to going to bed, with times and places.
  4. Order a meal in a noodle shop: one dish, one drink, a request about chilli, and paying.
  5. Ask the way to the nearest metro station and check whether it is far.

Checklist: give yourself one tick for each of these that is true.

  • Tones: 你好 and 很好 come out as ní hǎo and hén hǎo, and 不 and 一 change before a fourth tone.
  • Word order: time and place come before the verb.
  • Measure words: every number before a noun has one, with 两 for two.
  • Questions: question words stay where the answer goes, with no 吗.
  • 了: used for a completed action or a new situation, and never after 没.
  • Sentences: you spoke in sentences most of the time, not in single words.

Compare your recordings with these model answers. Yours will differ in content, and that is the point: the models show the patterns, not the only right answer.

PromptModel answerPinyinEnglish
1大家好!我叫Alex,是美国人。我今年十六岁,是高中学生。我会说英语,也会说一点儿中文。Dàjiā hǎo! Wǒ jiào Alex, shì Měiguó rén. Wǒ jīnnián shíliù suì, shì gāozhōng xuésheng. Wǒ huì shuō Yīngyǔ, yě huì shuō yìdiǎnr Zhōngwén.Hello, everyone! I'm Alex, and I'm American. I'm sixteen and in high school. I speak English and a little Chinese.
2我家有四口人:爸爸、妈妈、弟弟和我。我爸爸妈妈都工作,他们很忙。我没有姐姐,也没有哥哥。我们家有一只猫。Wǒ jiā yǒu sì kǒu rén: bàba, māma, dìdi hé wǒ. Wǒ bàba māma dōu gōngzuò, tāmen hěn máng. Wǒ méiyǒu jiějie, yě méiyǒu gēge. Wǒmen jiā yǒu yì zhī māo.There are four people in my family: Dad, Mom, my younger brother and me. My parents both work, and they're very busy. I don't have an older sister or an older brother. We have a cat.
3我每天早上六点半起床,七点吃早饭。我坐车去学校。中午我在学校吃午饭。下午三点半下课,我回家看书。晚上十点我睡觉。Wǒ měitiān zǎoshang liù diǎn bàn qǐchuáng, qī diǎn chī zǎofàn. Wǒ zuò chē qù xuéxiào. Zhōngwǔ wǒ zài xuéxiào chī wǔfàn. Xiàwǔ sān diǎn bàn xiàkè, wǒ huí jiā kàn shū. Wǎnshang shí diǎn wǒ shuìjiào.Every day I get up at 6:30 and have breakfast at 7. I ride to school. At noon I eat lunch at school. Classes end at 3:30, and I go home and read. At ten at night I go to bed.
4老板,来一碗牛肉面,不要辣。我也想喝一杯茶。多少钱? (After the answer:) 给你。谢谢!Lǎobǎn, lái yì wǎn niúròumiàn, bú yào là. Wǒ yě xiǎng hē yì bēi chá. Duōshao qián? Gěi nǐ. Xièxie!A bowl of beef noodles, please, no chilli. I'd also like a cup of tea. How much is it? Here you are. Thanks!
5请问,地铁站怎么走?离这儿远吗? (The answer:) 不太远。从这儿一直走,到路口往右拐,就到了。Qǐngwèn, dìtiězhàn zěnme zǒu? Lí zhèr yuǎn ma? Bú tài yuǎn. Cóng zhèr yìzhí zǒu, dào lùkǒu wǎng yòu guǎi, jiù dào le.Excuse me, how do I get to the metro station? Is it far from here? Not very. Go straight on from here, turn right at the intersection, and you're there.

Character writing: the practice test, part 4

Part A. Write the character for each pinyin and meaning, in simplified form, on squared paper. Then check your answers and the stroke counts below.

  1. wǒ, I
  2. hǎo, good
  3. xiè, to thank
  4. guó, country
  5. xīn, heart
  6. shū, book
  7. nián, year
  8. jiā, home
  9. qián, money
  10. xiě, to write
  11. shéi, who
  12. chī, to eat
  13. lù, road
  14. jiē, street
  15. le, the particle of completion and change

Answers, with stroke counts: 1) 我, 7. 2) 好, 6. 3) 谢, 12 (traditional 謝, 17). 4) 国, 8 (國, 11). 5) 心, 4. 6) 书, 4 (書, 10). 7) 年, 6. 8) 家, 10. 9) 钱, 10 (錢, 16). 10) 写, 5 (寫, 15). 11) 谁, 10 (誰, 15). 12) 吃, 6. 13) 路, 13. 14) 街, 12. 15) 了, 2.

Part B. Write the simplified form of each traditional character: 學, 國, 說, 書, 東, 車, 門, 長, 錢, 華. Answers: 学, 国, 说, 书, 东, 车, 门, 长, 钱, 华.

Part C. Write six sentences in characters about your year of Chinese: what you learned, what you can do now, what you like and what you plan. Use at least one 了, one measure word and one time word before the verb. Here is a model.

ChinesePinyinEnglish
今年我学了很多中文。Jīnnián wǒ xué le hěn duō Zhōngwén.This year I learned a lot of Chinese.
现在我会写三百个汉字了。Xiànzài wǒ huì xiě sānbǎi ge Hànzì le.Now I can write 300 characters.
我能用中文说我的家、我的学校和我的一天。Wǒ néng yòng Zhōngwén shuō wǒ de jiā, wǒ de xuéxiào hé wǒ de yì tiān.I can use Chinese to talk about my family, my school and my day.
我很喜欢中文课,也很喜欢我们的老师。Wǒ hěn xǐhuan Zhōngwén kè, yě hěn xǐhuan wǒmen de lǎoshī.I really like Chinese class, and I like our teacher too.
明年我想去新加坡看看。Míngnián wǒ xiǎng qù Xīnjiāpō kànkan.Next year I'd like to visit Singapore.
我要每天说中文!Wǒ yào měitiān shuō Zhōngwén!I'm going to speak Chinese every day!

Check any character you are unsure of on 汉典 (zdic.net) (shown for 谢), which animates simplified stroke order, and on Taiwan's 國語小字典 (shown for 謝), which gives the traditional form with its zhuyin, pinyin, radical, stroke count and stroke order.

Step 5: Plan your next year

The last step is a plan for keeping what you have and building on it. Start with goals. From each of the three modes, pick one Can-Do statement that you cannot do yet. Write it as an "I can" sentence, and add how you will practise it. Then choose your resources. Everything in the table is free, and none of it needs an account.

ResourceWhat it gives you
WiktionaryMandarin recordings, readings, meanings and measure words
Pitch Perfect Pinyin, University of Texas at AustinTone and pronunciation lessons with audio
The Yabla pinyin chartEvery syllable played in each of the four tones
Legit Mando, on the TaiwanPlus siteShort video lessons in everyday Mandarin
Chinese Grammar Wiki, AllSet LearningExplanations and examples of the grammar points in this course
汉典 (zdic.net) and 國語小字典Stroke order, radicals and stroke counts, simplified and traditional
TOCFL practice testsPractice tests with audio, in traditional and simplified characters

You may also want a test to aim at. Three are worth knowing about.

  • AP Chinese Language and Culture. The College Board describes the course as equivalent to an intermediate college course, typically the third or fourth semester. It has no prerequisites, but students are typically in their fourth year of high school study, and native or heritage speakers may reach it by a different path.
  • The HSK. This is mainland China's standardized test of Chinese for non-native speakers, administered by a committee of the Ministry of Education. Wikipedia reports that a revised syllabus, known as HSK 3.0, took effect in November 2025, and that the new exams were still being rolled out in 2026.
  • The TOCFL (華語文能力測驗). This is Taiwan's test, run by the Steering Committee for the Test Of Proficiency-Huayu under Taiwan's Ministry of Education. It has four bands, Novice and Bands A, B and C, each with two levels. The committee offers free practice tests with audio, in traditional and simplified versions.

Which test suits you depends on where you plan to study or work. Your teacher or school counselor can tell you which tests your school recognizes.

Many learners also use apps. Before you sign up for one, read the age rules in the service's own terms with a parent or guardian. Here is what three of them say. None of them is needed for anything in this course.

ServiceWhat its own terms or policy say about age and accounts
YouTubeYou must be at least 13 to use the service, though children of any age may use it, and YouTube Kids where available, if a parent or legal guardian enables it. Users under 18 must have a parent's or guardian's permission.
DuolingoUsers under 13 in the United States, or under the age of digital consent in their country, are Child Users. They register with a username instead of an email address, and the first time they log out they are asked for a parent's email address. All users under 16 get non-personalized ads, and third-party tracking and analytics are switched off.
Anki and AnkiWebThe computer version of Anki and AnkiDroid for Android are free. Syncing through AnkiWeb needs a free account, and if you are not old enough to agree to its terms, they ask a parent or guardian to agree on your behalf.

Common misconceptions

  • "Novice means I have failed." Novice is the first of ACTFL's five major levels, and each level includes those below it. The scale describes what you can do; it is not a pass mark.
  • "A level measures how much I have studied." ACTFL's guide defines proficiency as using a language effectively in situations you have not rehearsed. A memorized dialogue counts only when you can adapt it to a new conversation.
  • "I must be at the same level in every skill." The Can-Do Statements give separate benchmarks for interpretive, interpersonal and presentational communication. A heritage learner who understands Chinese at home, for example, may rate higher for listening than for writing.
  • "了 means the past." 了 marks a completed action or a new situation. A past habit takes no 了, and 没 never takes it (Lesson 21).
  • "If an app is free, anyone can sign up." YouTube's terms set a minimum age of 13 and require a parent's or guardian's permission under 18. Duolingo registers children under 13 in the United States without an email address, and AnkiWeb asks a parent or guardian to agree for anyone too young to agree to its terms.
  • "There is one Chinese test." The AP exam, the HSK and the TOCFL are run by different organizations, and the TOCFL publishes its practice tests in both traditional and simplified characters.

Looking back

This lesson turned the year into a checklist. ACTFL's scale has five major levels. A Novice communicates with memorized words, lists and phrases, and the move to Intermediate comes with sentences of your own; the sublevels Low, Mid and High show how securely you hold a level. The Can-Do Statements split communication into interpretive, interpersonal and presentational modes, so you can rate each one separately. You checked the 300 characters of Lessons 1 to 26, the tones and their changes, 是, 有 and 在, word order, measure words, question words and 了. Then you took a practice test in listening, reading, speaking and writing. For next year you have free resources that need no account, three tests to aim at, and the age rules of YouTube, Duolingo and Anki. Keep your recordings. Played back in a year's time, they will show how far you have come.

Sources

  1. ACTFL. (2024). ACTFL Oral Proficiency Interview familiarization guide. actfl.org
  2. NCSSFL and ACTFL. (2026). NCSSFL-ACTFL Can-Do Statements: Novice level. actfl.org
  3. College Board. (n.d.). AP Chinese Language and Culture [course and exam page]. apstudents.collegeboard.org
  4. Steering Committee for the Test Of Proficiency-Huayu. (n.d.). 華語文能力測驗 免費下載試題 [Free practice tests]. tocfl.edu.tw
  5. Wikipedia contributors. (2026). American Council on the Teaching of Foreign Languages; Zhongwen Shuiping Kaoshi (HSK); Test of Chinese as a Foreign Language. Wikipedia. en.wikipedia.org
  6. YouTube. (n.d.). Terms of service [Who may use the service]. youtube.com
  7. Duolingo. (2026, May 26). Privacy policy [Child users]. duolingo.com
  8. Ankitects. (2018). AnkiWeb terms and conditions. ankiweb.net; and (n.d.) Anki downloads and Anki Manual, Syncing with AnkiWeb. apps.ankiweb.net and docs.ankiweb.net
  9. Wiktionary contributors. (2026). 你好; 對不起; 一起; 星期; 快樂; 工作; 多少錢; 喜歡; 已經; 城市 [entries with Mandarin audio]. Wiktionary. en.wiktionary.org
Key terms
ACTFL
The American Council on the Teaching of Foreign Languages, founded in 1967, whose Proficiency Guidelines describe five major levels from Novice to Distinguished.
Novice
The first ACTFL level: communicating with memorized words, lists and phrases on very familiar topics.
Intermediate
The second ACTFL level: creating sentences of your own, asking and answering simple questions and handling simple transactions.
Low, Mid and High
The sublevels of Novice, Intermediate and Advanced: baseline performance, solid performance, and often reaching the next level without sustaining it.
Can-Do Statements
'I can' statements from NCSSFL and ACTFL, revised for 2026, that learners can use to set goals and assess themselves.
interpretive, interpersonal, presentational
The three modes of communication: understanding what you hear, read or watch; conversation with back and forth; presenting to listeners, readers or viewers.
AP Chinese Language and Culture
A College Board course and exam equivalent to an intermediate college course, typically the third or fourth semester.
HSK
Mainland China's standardized test of Chinese for non-native speakers, administered by a committee of the Ministry of Education; a revised syllabus, HSK 3.0, took effect in 2025.
TOCFL
Taiwan's test of Mandarin, 華語文能力測驗, with four bands: Novice and Bands A, B and C, each with two levels.
age of digital consent
The age below which an online service treats a user as a child; Duolingo uses 13 in the United States.

Open the interactive version with quizzes and progress →